Copyright: Copyright © 1991 - 1996, Attachmate Corporation. All Rights Reserved.


Keyboard Maps

  IBM Enhanced keyboard map

  Attachmate PowerStation keyboard map

  DEC LK250 keyboard map

  DEC LK450 keyboard map

  On-screen VT Keyboard

  Mapping the Keyboard

  Mapping the Mouse

  Composing Characters

  User-defined Keys


Menu Commands

In this window, click the menu you want information about. Or press TAB until the menu is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The File Menu provides commands for saving and restoring your configuration, performing file transfers, and printing.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Edit Menu provides commands for using the clipboard, selecting text, and copying the current page into history.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Transfer Menu provides commands for transferring files.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Options Menu provides commands for configuring most options.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Connection Menu provides commands for communication management, resetting modes, and history control.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Macro Menu provides commands for running, editing, and managing the macro environment.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Window Menu provides commands for running multiple sessions.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Help Menu provides commands for getting help on KEA!, help on Help, and information about KEA!.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


The Control Menu provides commands for changing the size of the KEA! window, and hiding the menu bar.

In this window, click the command you want information about. Or press TAB until the command is highlighted, and then press ENTER.


New KEA! Session command (File menu)
New Session command (File menu)

The New KEA! Session dialog box appears the first time you run KEA!, and whenever you use the New Session command on the File menu. In this dialog box you create a new session and give it a name. When you choose OK, the Session Setup dialog box lets you choose the essential options for your new session.

Dialog Box Options

Name

Type a name that you want to give to the new session. Do not give a session a name that conflicts with a DOS device, such as COM1.

Template

An existing session on which your new session will be based.

Existing Sessions

Names of previously-defined sessions. Selecting a name from this list places it in the Template option.


Session Setup dialog box

The Session Setup Dialog box appears the first time you run KEA!, and whenever you create a new session by choosing New Session from the File menu.

The options in this dialog box let you quickly select the communications port, file transfer protocol, and terminal mode for this session. If you attempt to close the dialog box without having selected a communications port, you are warned that you will be unable to connect to a host.

Dialog Box Options

Communications

Port

Select the communications method you want to use to connect to the host system. You must select and configure a communications port prior to starting your first session.

Configure

Display the Setup dialog box for the communication method you selected in the Port field. This will be the

Serial Port Setup,

Modem

LAT Setup,

Telnet Setup,

KEAlink MSU Port Setup,

or NetWare for LAT Setup dialog box.

File Transfer

Protocol

Select the method (protocol) to use for sending and receiving files.

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box where you can set options for the method you selected in the Protocol field.

Terminal

Mode

Select the terminal operating mode from the drop-down list.

Configure

Display the Terminal General dialog box where you can set additional options.


Open Session command (File menu)

The Open Session command on the File menu (and on the Control menu) displays a dialog box containing a list of previously-defined sessions. You obtain a similar dialog box when you start KEA! from the icon in the KEA! Program group, if you have previously saved more than one session, or a combination of sessions and layouts. You also obtain this dialog box when you choose the Open Session button on the toolbar.

  Open Session button

Selecting a session opens a new emulation window and starts that session in the window. If you configured a macro to execute on start-up, that macro is executed.

Dialog Box Options

Name

Type a configuration filename, or select a name from the list of existing sessions or layouts. The current session configuration file, if any, is used as the default.

Existing Sessions

Displays a list of previously defined sessions. Select a filename from this list to insert it in the Name box.

Existing Layouts

Displays a list of previously defined layouts. Select a filename from this list to insert it in the Name box. This option only appears when you start KEA! from the icon in the KEA! Program group, and have previously saved more than one session, or a combination of sessions and layouts.

New Window

This option only appears when you display the Open Session dialog box by choosing Open Session from the File menu (or the Control menu). If this option is selected, the opened session starts in a new window. If you clear this option, the current session is changed to match the named session.

New Session

Displays the New Session dialog box in which you can name a new session and select its communication method and file transfer protocol. This option only appears when you start KEA! from the icon in the KEA! Program group, and have previously saved more than one session, or a combination of sessions and layouts. If this button does not appear, you can create a new session with the New Session command on the File menu.


Close Session command (File menu)

The Close Session command on the File menu exits the current display window.

If you made changes to your session, you might be prompted to save the configuration. This depends on your selection for the option Save Changes on Exit in the General Settings dialog box (Options menu).


Save command (File menu)

The Save command on the File menu saves the current configuration and user mappings under the current configuration filename . The current session name is assigned. If you want to save your session under a different name, or save only specified parts of your configuration, use the Save As command from the File menu.


Save As command (File menu)

The Save As command on the File menu displays the Save As dialog box. The options in this dialog box let you specify a name and create an icon for the session configuration file. If you want to save the complete configuration under the current name, you can use the Save command.

You also can save individual components in a component file, which you can later apply to an existing session using the Run command on the Macro menu.

Dialog Box Options

Name

Type a configuration filename without the .KTC extension (session name), or select one from the list under Existing Sessions. Or you can type a component filename without the .KTU extension.

Existing Sessions

A list of previously created sessions (configuration filenames). This list does not include component filenames.

Components

Select the components you want to save. Details

Create Icon

Create a new icon in the currently active group, or any specified group. The icon is given the name of the configuration file. Choosing the icon starts KEA! with the new configuration. To create an icon, you must select Configuration in the Components list.

Program Group

Specify the group in which you want to put the icon. The currently active group is the default. You can use this option only if you select Create Icon.


Components

Select the components you want to save. If you want to save enough information to define a session, include Configuration among the components you select. This command then saves a configuration file with a .KTC extension.

If you choose one or more components but Configuration is not among them, this command saves a component file, with a .KTU extension. Although component files do not completely define a session, you can apply a component file to any current session with the Run command on the Macro menu.

Configuration
All the user-configurable items except those named by the following options.

User-mapped Keys
The assignments you made in the Mapping dialog box (Options menu, Keyboard command).

User-mapped Buttons
The assignments you made in the SmartPad dialog box (Options menu).

User-mapped Menus
The assignments you made in the Menus dialog box (Options menu).

User-mapped Mouse Events
The assignments you made in the Mouse dialog box (Options menu).

User-mapped Colors
The assignments you made in the Attribute Colors dialog box (Options menu, Colors command).


Capture / End Capture command (File menu)

The Capture command displays the Capture dialog box. Use the options in this box to specify a file in which to save all data received from the host.

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type a filename, or select a name from the displayed list.

Save File as Type

Select the default filename extension for files displayed in the list box.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory where you want to write the file. The current drive and directory are used as the default.

Append

Select to write new data at the end of an existing file. If you do not select Append, KEA! overwrites data in the existing file with the new data.

Strip Escape Sequences

Select to remove any control sequences from the data and save only text in the file. Selecting this option also enables host-to-local translation of the data during a Capture operation.


PlayBack command (File menu)

The PlayBack command on the File menu displays the PlayBack dialog box. Use the options in this box to select the file whose contents you want to display.

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type a file name in the File Name field, or select one from the list box under the File Name field.

List Files of Type

Select the extension for the files you want listed in the list box under the File Name field.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory containing the file. The current drive and directory are used as the default.


Print command (File menu)

The Print command on the File menu displays the Print dialog box. The options in this box let you select how much of page memory to print. You can print text or graphics using this command.

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Print button on the toolbar.

  Print button

KEA! appends a form feed only if you selected Form Feed under Terminator in the Printer dialog box. Otherwise, a terminator is not appended.

On keyboards other than PowerStation, you also can print page memory using the F2 or PRINTSCREEN key, depending on your keyboard. You cannot use this command in Printer Controller mode.

Dialog Box Options

Extent

Specify how much of page memory to print. The selection you make here overrides the selection under Extent in the Printer dialog box (Options Terminal menu). Select from:

Selection	Print the selected area.

Window	Print what appears in the emulation window.

Page	Print the current VT page. If in 401X mode, print the entire Tektronix image.

All Pages	Print all VT pages. (Does not apply to graphics.)

Format

Specify whether to print text only, or text and graphics. Select from:

Text	Print text only.

Graphics	Print text and graphics.


Close Print Job command (File menu)

The Close Print Job command on the File menu flushes accumulated printer data from the buffers. This sends the data to the Windows printing spooler, or the printer. It affects all modes of printing: the Print command, print key, escape sequences, and Auto Print. The action taken depends on the type of printer configured. At the end of a flush, the printer driver usually sends a form feed to the printer, causing it to eject the last page.


Print Setup command (File menu)

The Print Setup command on the File menu displays the Print Setup dialog box. The first option in this box lets you select a printer. The remaining options depend on the printer you select. These may include whether to print in portrait or landscape orientation, the paper size and source, and advanced features such as dithering.


Exit All command (File menu)

The Exit All command on the File menu exits all KEA! sessions. A dialog box might appear, with questions that depend on changes you have made, and the options in the General Settings dialog box (Options menu).

The Exit dialog box appears if you have

•	made changes to your session configuration(s) and Save Changes on Exit in the General Settings dialog box is set to Prompt,

•	or Prompt on Exit All in the General Settings dialog box is set to Yes,

•	or sessions are still connected.

Dialog Box Options

Save changes to configuration(s)

Select Yes to save all configuration changes you made to the currently running sessions. Select Prompt to be asked about individual sessions. If you have not changed the configuration of any sessions, this option is not available.

Save Layout changes

Select this option if the sessions were started from a layout file, and you want to save changes to the layout.

Exit all sessions

Tells you how many sessions are connected. When you choose OK to exit the box, all sessions are disconnected.


MRU list (File menu)

The list at the bottom of the File menu names the four most recently used sessions. If the current session is among them, it is checked. To re-start one of the others, select it on the list. It will be started in a new window. However, if that session is currently open on your desktop, KEA! simply switches to that window — it does not start another session.


Copy command (Edit menu)

The Copy command on the Edit menu places a copy of the selected text and graphics onto the Clipboard. KEA! 340 sends graphics to the Clipboard as bitmaps and Windows Metafiles. This replaces any data previously stored on the Clipboard. You can use this command only after selecting the text and graphics you want to copy.

You can also copy selected text with the Copy button on the toolbar.

  Copy button


Copy Special command (Edit menu)

The Copy Special command on the Edit menu places a copy of the selected area onto the Clipboard. You then can use this information in a word processing or spreadsheet application. Copying to the Clipboard replaces any data previously stored there. You can use this command only after selecting the area you want to copy.

The Copy Special command lets you specify whether you want to use the selected area in a word processing document or spreadsheet. Your choice determines the type of line terminator used.

Dialog Box Options

Copy Type

Specify how the selected text is formatted. Select from:

Data	Include no line terminators or formatting at all.

Lines	Insert a carriage return and linefeed at the end of each line. This is equivalent to choosing Copy from the Edit menu.

Paragraph	Insert a space at the end of each line if required to prevent words from running together. The selected text is treated as one or more paragraphs. A carriage return and a linefeed are inserted only before a blank line.

Table	If there is more than one space between words, the space is changed to a single tab character. Most spreadsheets and word processor tables interpret tab characters as cell separators. Single spaces remain spaces when you copy the data.

Copy

Copy selected area using specified Copy Type. The specified Copy Type is stored for use the next time you perform a copy special.


Paste command (Edit menu)

The Paste command on the Edit menu sends the selected text to the host. (If no text is selected, Paste sends the text in the Clipboard, if any.) Whether or not line terminators are sent with the data depends on the type of selection you perform. If you use the left mouse button (stream select), the selection is sent with the "Data" formatting—without line terminators. If you use the right mouse button (block select) the selection is pasted with the "Lines" formatting—a terminator at the end of each line.

The Newline As option (in the ASCII Options dialog box) is used to determine how to translate line terminators for the host: as CR, CR+LF, or LF. KEA! always translates data you paste from the clipboard to your host character set.

You can also paste text with the Paste button on the toolbar.

  Paste button

You cannot paste graphics to the host.


Select command (Edit menu)

The Select command on the Edit menu lets you select areas of the emulation window using your keyboard. You do not need this command if you use your mouse to select areas.

If the area contains graphics, the selected area is converted to a rectangular block.


Block Select command (Edit menu)

The Block Select command on the Edit menu lets you select a rectangular area (block) of the emulation window using your keyboard. You do not need this command if you use your mouse to select areas.


Links command (Edit menu)

Use the Links command on the Edit menu to configure hotlink options. When KEA! is started by another application, the Enable Remote Updates option is disabled. This provides an opportunity for you to ensure that both the screen and the host application are ready to interact before links are automatically updated.

Dialog Box Options

Enable Remote Updates

Enables the automatic updating of established hotlinks.

Update when

These options control when new data will be sent.

No change for

Sets the idle period timer for updating the hotlink. Range is 100 to 2000 msec. Default is 1000 msec.

Max delay

Sets the maximum length of time to wait before sending the data to the linked application. KEA! will send the data after this period even if the linked data has not been idle for the specified period. Range is 0 to 600 seconds. Default is 60 seconds. 0 means don't send until idle.


Snapshot command (Edit menu)

The Snapshot command copies the entire viewed page into the History buffer. This lets you store the data you want even with applications that do not scroll. You can use this command only when you select Enable History (Connection menu, or History dialog box).

Note  The Snapshot command is only available if you have enabled the Old KEAterm Menus option in the General Settings dialog box. This option changes the organization of KEA! menus and commands to the older, pre-Version 4 style. The General Settings dialog box appears when you choose Settings from the Options menu (or, in the old style, choose General from the Configure menu).


Shuttle command (Transfer menu)

Choosing Shuttle from the Transfer menu displays the File Shuttle dialog box. This dialog box allows you to build a list of upload files from your computer and download files from the host which can then be transferred with the click of a button. You can add or remove files from the transfer list. A list of local and host directories and a list of local drives are provided as a way of navigating directories. You can enter file patterns to filter certain local or host files, navigate directories and drives, and add files to the transfer list with the edit field above each file list. Shuttle also provides an Options button that allows you to customize the host commands used by Shuttle to communicate with the host and a Configure button that allows you to make changes to your file transfer protocol. To find out more about using Shuttle, see Using Shuttle with Kermit and X/Y/ZModem and Using Shuttle with FTP.

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Shuttle button on the toolbar.

  Shuttle button

Dialog Box Options

(PC directory list)

Name of the local directory and a list box you can use to move through the directory structure.

Drives

List of the drives on the local machine.

PC File Name

Filter the names displayed in the PC Files list box or type a filename to add to the Transfer List. You can also navigate the personal computer file structure by typing directory names and/or drives in this edit box.

PC Files

List of files on the local machine. Double-clicking a file adds it to the Transfer List.

(host directory list)

Name of the remote directory and a list box you can use to move through the directory structure.

Host File Name

Filter the names displayed in the Host Files list box or type a filename to add to the Transfer List. You can also navigate the host file structure by typing directory names or drives in this edit box.

Host Files

List of files on the host machine. Double-clicking a file adds it to the Transfer List.

Display Host Files/Directories

Select this box to display host directories and files.

Add

When a PC file or host file is selected, add the selected file to the Transfer List.

Add All

When a PC file or host file is selected, add all files in the PC Files or Host Files box to the Transfer List.

Remove

When a transfer is selected in the Transfer List, deletes it from the list. (The Remove and Remove All buttons replace the Add and Add All buttons when you select anything in the Transfer List.)

Remove All

When a transfer is selected in the Transfer List, delete all transfers from the Transfer List.

Rename

When a PC file or host file is selected, display a dialog box in which you can rename the selected file.

Delete

When a PC file or host file is selected, delete the selected file. You will be asked for confirmation before the file is deleted.

Transfer List

List of the transfers that will occur when you choose the Transfer button. Double-clicking an entry removes it from the list.

Host

Type of host to which KEA! is connected. This determines how directories on the host are read, and how transfers are performed.

Options

The result of choosing this button varies with the Host selected in the previous option.

for Host

VMS or UNIX	Display the VMS Host Options (or UNIX Host Options) dialog box in which you edit host command strings used by Shuttle.

FTP Server	Display the FTP Host Options dialog box in which you can choose the Host type for the FTP Server to which you are connecting, or define new Host types.

KEA!	When the selected host is another KEA!, this option is not available.

Connect

Available only when FTP selected as file transfer protocol. Display the FTP Connect dialog box in which you can edit your FTP login information. (The Disconnect button replaces the Connect button when you have an active FTP connection.)

Transfer

Perform the transfers shown in the Transfer List. The order in which files are transferred does not correspond to the order in which they appear in the Transfer List, because all uploads are performed first, followed by downloads.

Protocol

Displays the file transfer protocol that you selected in the File Transfer dialog box. You can change the transfer method by selecting from the drop-down list of available protocols.

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box in which you can select or edit your file transfer protocol options.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.


VMS/UNIX Host Options dialog box

You use options in the VMS Options (or UNIX Options) dialog box to control the issue of Kermit or X/Y/ZModem file transfer commands to the host. You access this dialog box by choosing Options in the Shuttle dialog box, after selecting Kermit or X/Y/ZModem as your file transfer protocol.

Dialog Box Options

Host response timeout (sec.)

Change the timeout period for waiting for a response from the host. The default is 8 seconds.

Host Commands

List box containing the host commands that will be used by Shuttle. Clicking a list box entry causes its current value to be displayed under Current Value. You can then modify its value and store the change by choosing Apply or pressing ENTER.

Current Value

Edit field in which you can view and modify the currently selected host command string. When you type in a new value, pressing ENTER or clicking another host command will cause the change to be registered.

Apply

Apply the current value to the currently selected host command.

Default

Restore the selected host command string to its original default value.

Default All

Restore all host command strings to their original default values.


FTP Host Options dialog box

The options in the FTP Host Options dialog box allow you to choose the Host type for the FTP Server to which you are connecting, or define new Host types. With an FTP connection, if KEA! cannot determine the host operating system type when connecting, this box is automatically displayed. Or, you can display this dialog box by choosing Options in the Shuttle dialog box when you have selected FTP as your file transfer protocol.

Although rarely necessary, if the information you receive when trying to display host files with Shuttle is not what you expect, you might need to make changes to the Host type or define a new Host type in the FTP Host Options dialog box. Any changes you make in this box are reflected in the directory output that is redisplayed after you choose OK.

Dialog Box Options

Host type

Select a host type from the drop-down list to override the Host detected by KEA!.

Save as default

When selected, saves the host type from the current connection to be used as the default host type in subsequent sessions.

Define

Display the New Host Type dialog box and define a new Host type. This is useful if KEA! fails to automatically detect your Host. After a new Host type has been defined, it is automatically detected in subsequent sessions.

Delete

Delete the selected Host type. Only user-defined Host types can be deleted.

Output of LIST command

Displays the host files.

The following options are only available for user-defined Host types.

Filename starts in column

Indicates the column in which the filename appears in a line of directory output.

Keyword to distinguish directory

Indicates the keyword that distinguishes directories from files.

Directory keyword is part of filename

When selected, indicates that the directory keyword is part of the displayed filename.

Directory keyword is in column

Indicates the column in which the directory keyword appears in a line of directory output. If you also selected Directory Keyword Is Part Of Filename, the information you type here is ignored.


New Host Type dialog box

You can use the options in this box to define new Host Types to be displayed in the drop-down list in the FTP Host Options dialog box.

The easiest way to define a new Host Type is to connect to your host before you begin. If you do, the login message will be displayed in the New Host Type dialog box and you can use the information in it to help you choose a Login keyword and Host Type name. If you do not connect to your host first, you must know the keyword you should use.

Dialog Box Options

Login keyword

Type the keyword that should be used to detect this Host type. Use one of the words displayed in the login message. The keyword should be unique for this host type, but common among hosts of this type.

Host type name

Type the name you want to appear in the Host type drop-down list in the FTP Host Options dialog box.


Send command (Transfer menu)

The Send command on the Transfer menu lets you send files to your host system. The available options depend on the Protocol you have selected in the File Transfer dialog box (Transfer menu).

  Send command, Ascii method

  Send command, Kermit method

  Send command, X/Y/ZModem method

  Send command, FTP method


Send command, ASCII method (Transfer menu)

The Send command on the Transfer menu displays the ASCII Transmit dialog box. The options in this box let you select a file and start transmission to the host using the ASCII method. You must select ASCII from the drop-down list in the Protocol field of the Options command (Transfer menu).

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type a file name in the File Name field, or select one from the list box under the File Name field.

List Files of Type

Select the extension for the files you want listed in the list box under the File Name field.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory containing the file. The current drive and directory are the defaults.

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method. To transfer text files without using a protocol, select ASCII from the Protocol field drop-down list.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.


Send command, Kermit protocol (Transfer menu)

The Send command on the Transfer menu displays the Kermit Transmit dialog box. The options in this box let you select the file(s) you want to send to the host, and start the transfer.

Make sure you selected Kermit in the Protocol field of the Options command (Transfer menu).

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type one or more file names in the File Name field, or select one or more from the list box.

List Files of Type

Select the extension for the files you want listed in the list box under the File Name field.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory containing the file. The current drive and directory are the defaults.

Select All

Selects all the files in the list box under the File Name field.

Host File

Type the file name for the host to use to store the file. If you selected more than one file to transfer, you can rename only the first file.

File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file. This field overrides the selection under File Type in the File Transfer dialog box. Details

Quit Server at end

Select to automatically send the Finish command to the host Kermit to indicate the end of the transfer. This option is unavailable when you select Interactive under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box (Transfer menu, Options, Options).

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.


File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file.

Automatic	Enables the automatic file type processing based on the file extension and file scan options in the File Transfer dialog box.

Binary	Send file in binary mode. KEA! sends all 8 data bits, and does not perform character translation. Typically, binary files are object code or executable programs.

Text	Send file in text mode. KEA! translates characters to suit a dissimilar remote system. You may lose data if the file contains any binary data.


Send command, XYZmodem protocol (Transfer menu)
Send command, X/Y/Zmodem protocol (Transfer menu)

The Send command on the Transfer menu displays the Transmit dialog box; the dialog box title contains Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem depending on the protocol you selected. The options in this box let you select a file and start transmission to the host.

You must select one of these protocols from the drop-down list in the Protocol field of the Options command (Transfer menu).

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type a file name in the File Name field, or select one from the list box under the File Name field. For Ymodem and Zmodem, you can type or select more than one file name.

List Files of Type

Select the extension for the files you want listed in the list box under the File Name field.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory containing the file. The current drive and directory are used as the default.

Select All

Choose to select all the files in the list box under the File Name field. Available for Ymodem and Zmodem only.

Host File

Type a file name for the host to use to store the file. When you select more than one file, you can rename only the first one. Available for Ymodem, and Zmodem only.

File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file. Details

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method. To transfer text files without using a protocol, select ASCII from the Protocol field drop-down list.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.


File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file.

Automatic	Enables the automatic file type processing based on the file extension and file scan options in the File Transfer dialog box.

Binary	Send file in binary mode. KEA! sends all 8 data bits, and does not perform character translation. Typically, binary files are object code or executable programs.

Text	Send file in text mode. KEA! translates characters to suit a dissimilar remote system. You may lose data if the file contains any binary data.


Send command, FTP protocol (Transfer menu)

The Send command on the Transfer menu displays the FTP Transmit dialog box. The options in this box let you select the file(s) you want to send to the host, and start the transfer. You must have selected FTP in the Protocol field of the File Transfer dialog box (Transfer Options menu).

You can also obtain this dialog box by choosing Transmit in the FTP Commands dialog box or by clicking the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type one or more file names in the File Name field, or select one or more from the list box.

List Files of Type

Select the extension for the files you want listed in the list box under the File Name field.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory containing the file. The current drive and directory are the defaults.

Select All

Selects all the files in the list box under the File Name field.

Host File

Type the file name for the host to use to store the file. If you selected more than one file to transfer, you can rename only the first file.

File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file. This field overrides the selection under File Type in the File Transfer dialog box. Details

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method. This option is not available when you have an active FTP connection.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.


File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file. This field overrides the selection under File Type in the File Transfer dialog box (Options on the Transfer menu).

Automatic	Enables the automatic file type processing based on the file extension and file scan options in the File Transfer dialog box.

Binary	Send file in binary mode. KEA! sends all 8 data bits, and does not perform character translation. Typically, binary files are object code or executable programs.

Text	Send file in text mode. KEA! translates characters to suit a dissimilar remote system. You may lose data if the file contains any binary data.


Receive command (Transfer menu)

The Receive command on the Transfer menu lets you receive files from your host. The available options depend on the Protocol you have selected in the File Transfer dialog box (Transfer menu).

  Receive command, Kermit method

  Receive command, X/Y/ZModem method

  Receive command, FTP method

To receive files using ASCII protocol, use the Capture command on the File menu.


Receive command, Kermit protocol (Transfer menu)

The Receive command on the Transfer menu displays the Kermit Receive dialog box. The options in this box let you specify the file(s) you want to transfer from the host to your personal computer. You must select Kermit from the Protocol field drop-down list of the Options command (Transfer menu).

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Receive button on the toolbar.

  Receive button

If Interactive was selected in the Remote Kermit option of the Kermit Options dialog box, KEA! receives a file from the host. If Server was selected, a Get command must be issued to obtain the file.

Dialog Box Options

Host File

Type the file name(s) you want to get from the host. This field is available only when you select Server under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box.

Local Path or File Name

Type the location and name you want to use to store the file you receive from the host.

If you leave this field blank, the received file(s) are placed into your current directory with the same name(s) they had on the remote system. Details

File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file.

Automatic	Enables the automatic file type processing based on the file extension and file scan options in the File Transfer dialog box.

Binary	Send file in binary mode. KEA! sends all 8 data bits, and does not perform character translation. Typically, binary files are object code or executable programs.

Text	Send file in text mode. KEA! translates characters to suit a dissimilar remote system. You may lose data if the file contains any binary data.

Quit Server at end

Select to automatically send the Finish command to the host Kermit to indicate the end of the transfer. This option is unavailable when you select Interactive under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box.

Browse

Display the Browse dialog box where you can select the location (and possibly filename) into which to receive the file(s).

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.

Note  To receive files with the ASCII protocol, use the Capture command on the File menu.


Local Path or File Name

Type the location and name you want to use to store the file you receive from the host.

If you leave this field blank, the received file(s) are placed into your current directory with the same name(s) they had on the remote system.

If you specify a filename, it is used for the first received file. If you receive more than one file, the others keep their original names.

If you specify only a path, your current directory changes to the specified one, and  the file(s) are received into that directory.


Receive command, XYZmodem protocol (Transfer menu)
Receive command, X/Y/Zmodem protocol (Transfer menu)

The Receive command on the Transfer menu displays the Receive dialog box; the dialog box title contains Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem depending on the protocol you selected. The options in this box let you specify the local directory and file name for the file(s) you want to transfer from the host to your personal computer.

You must select Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem from the Protocol field drop-down list of the Options command (Transfer menu).

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Receive button on the toolbar.

  Receive button

Dialog Box Options

Local Path or File Name

Type the location and name you want to use to store the file you receive from the host.

If you leave this field blank, the host name (and path if the Use Path option is selected) and Receive To path specified in the Options dialog box are used. Details

File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file.

Automatic	Enables the automatic file type processing based on the file extension and file scan options in the File Transfer dialog box. Not available for XModem.

Binary	Send file in binary mode. KEA! sends all 8 data bits, and does not perform character translation. Typically, binary files are object code or executable programs.

Text	Send file in text mode. KEA! translates characters to suit a dissimilar remote system. You may lose data if the file contains any binary data.

Crash Recovery

Available for Zmodem only. Details

Browse

Display the Browse dialog box where you can select the location (and possibly filename) into which to receive the file(s).

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.


Local Path or File Name

Type the location and name you want to use to store the file you receive from the host.

If you leave this field blank, the host name (and path if the Use Path option is selected) and Receive To path specified in the Options dialog box are used.

If you specify a filename, that name is used for the first received file. If you receive more than one file, the others are treated as if this field was left blank.

If you specify only a path, it is used instead of the Receive To path specified in the Options dialog box.

If you specify a path and filename, it is used only for the first received file. If you receive more than one file, the others are treated as if this field was left blank.


Crash Recovery

Available for Zmodem only. If this option is selected, before Zmodem starts to receive a file it checks if a local file already exists with the same name. If a local file exists, Zmodem tries to determine if the local file is the partial result of an earlier failed or aborted transfer. To do this, the Zmodem components at each end calculate a Cyclic Redundancy Check on the entire contents of the local file and compare it to a CRC generated on the same number of bytes in the host file. If the CRCs match, Zmodem transfers only the remainder of the file, appending it to the existing local file.

Although this feature exists primarily to recover from failed transfers, it is often used to save time when receiving a host file in which data is being added to the end. With Crash Recovery enabled, only the recently-added portion needs to be transferred.

The default is taken from the Crash Recovery option in the File Transfer dialog box.


Receive command, FTP protocol (Transfer menu)

The Receive command on the Transfer menu displays the FTP Receive dialog box. The options in this box let you specify the file(s) you want to transfer from the host to your personal computer. You must have selected FTP in the Protocol field of the File Transfer dialog box (Transfer Options menu).

You can also obtain this dialog box by choosing Receive in the FTP Commands dialog box or by clicking the Receive button on the toolbar.

  Receive button

Dialog Box Options

Host File

Type the file name(s) you want to get from the host.

Local Path or File Name

Type the location and name you want to use to store the file you receive from the host.

If you leave this field blank, the received file(s) are placed into your current directory with the same name(s) they had on the remote system. Details

File Type

Select the mode in which to transfer the file.

Automatic	Enables the automatic file type processing based on the file extension and file scan options in the File Transfer dialog box.

Binary	Send file in binary mode. KEA! sends all 8 data bits, and does not perform character translation. Typically, binary files are object code or executable programs.

Text	Send file in text mode. KEA! translates characters to suit a dissimilar remote system. You may lose data if the file contains any binary data.

Browse

Display the Browse dialog box where you can select the location (and possibly filename) into which to receive the file(s).

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method. This option is not available when you have an active FTP connection.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.

Note  To receive files with the ASCII protocol, use the Capture command on the File menu.


Local Path or File Name

Type the location and name you want to use to store the file you receive from the host.

If you leave this field blank, the received file(s) are placed into your current directory with the same name(s) they had on the remote system.

If you specify a filename, it is used for the first received file. If you receive more than one file, the others keep their original names.

If you specify only a path, your current directory changes to the specified one, and  the file(s) are received into that directory.


Commands command (Transfer menu)

The Commands command on the Transfer menu displays either the Kermit Commands or FTP Commands dialog box, if you have selected one of these as your file transfer protocol. If you selected Kermit, you must also have selected Server under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box and you must be connected to your host. Otherwise, this command is not available to you.

  Commands command, Kermit protocol

  Commands command, FTP protocol


Commands command, Kermit Protocol (Transfer menu)

The Commands command on the Transfer menu displays the Kermit Commands dialog box when you have selected Kermit as your file transfer method and selected Server under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box. The options in this box let you select a command to send to the host, and change settings for the remote Kermit.

Server commands let you perform operating system functions on the remote computer when Kermit is running as a server. The Kermit protocol defines these commands. They let you perform file manipulation on a remote host without having to know the host's command language. These commands work only if the remote server Kermit supports them.

Dialog Box Options

Command

Select the command you want to issue to the host Kermit, or type your own command. Select from:

Bye	ChangeDir	Copy	Delete
Directory	DiskUsage	Finish	Help
Host	Journal	Kermit	Login
Program	Query	Rename	SendMessage
Set	SetVariable	Type	Who
Execute

Execute the selected command.

Transmit

Display the Kermit Transmit dialog box.

Receive

Display the Kermit Receive dialog box.

Finish

Send a Finish command. This terminates the remote Kermit's server mode. (Same as selecting Finish in the Command box.)

Remote Set

Display the Remote Set dialog box. The options in this box let you select option settings for the remote Kermit.

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method.


BYE

Terminate Kermit Server mode and log out.


CHANGEDIR [directory]

Change your working directory to the specified device and/or directory. Or resets the default directory if no operands are specified.


COPY file_spec1 file_spec2

Copy a specified remote file to a remote file.


DELETE file_spec

Delete the specified remote file(s).


DIRECTORY [file_spec]

List names of files on the host.


DISKUSAGE

Display information about used or available disk space on the host.


FINISH

Terminate Kermit Server mode but do not log out.


HELP

Display a summary of available Kermit commands, if this command is supported by the host.


HOST command

Execute the command on the host.


JOURNAL command [argument]

Control server transaction logging.


KERMIT [command]

Pass a command to the server, using the server's command syntax. This is useful for changing Kermit settings.


LOGIN [user [password [account]]]

Change identity to that of a new user, or remove user identity if no operands are specified.


PROGRAM  [program_filespec [program_commands]]

Run the specified program, feeding it the specified commands.


QUERY

Give server status.


RENAME oldname newname

Rename the specified file or file group.


SENDMESSAGE destination message

Request the server to send a single line message to the specified destination.


SET parameter [parameter] [value]

Establish or modify a communication, protocol, or other parameter.


SETVARIABLE command [variable] [value]

Set the specified variable to the specified value. Create the variable if it does not already exist. If the value is null, undefine the variable.


TYPE file_spec

Display the contents of the specified remote file(s) on the screen.


WHO [user [options]]

List the named user, or all users who are logged in. If an operand is specified, provide detailed information about a specified user.


Remote Set dialog box

You use the options in the Remote Set dialog box to tell the remote Kermit to change some of its settings. You access this dialog box by choosing Remote Set in the Kermit Commands dialog box (Transfer menu).

Dialog Box Options

File

The options under File tell the Remote Kermit how to handle file settings during a transfer.

Type

Select how to change the current file type setting. Select from:

No Change	Do not change.

Text	Change to text file type.

Binary	Change to binary file type.

Names

Select how to handle file names during the transfer. Select from:

No Change	Do not change file name.

Converted	Convert file names to the Kermit common format.

Literal	Use filenames literally during transfer (useful between like systems).

Collision

Select the action to take when receiving a duplicate file name. Details

Replace

Select from:

No Change    Preserve    Default

Incomplete

Select the action to take on the file(s) when the transfer is incomplete. Select from:

No Change	Do not change the handling.

Discard	Discard incomplete transferred files.

Keep	Keep incomplete transferred files.

Block Check

Select the block check method to use on sends to detect errors. Details

Transfer Character Set

Select the character set to use to represent text data in the Kermit packets. Select from:

No Change	Do not change character set.

ASCII	Use the ASCII character set.

Latin 1	Use the ISO Latin 1 character set.

Receive

Packet-Length

Type the maximum packet length to receive.

Timeout

Type a value for the receive time out.

Retry

Type the number of retries to allow.

Server Timeout

Type a value for the amount of time before the Server times-out.

Window-Slots

Type the number of outstanding packets to allow before requiring an acknowledgment (ACK).


Collision

Select the action to take when receiving a duplicate file name. Select from:

No Change	Do not change file name.

Rename	Give incoming file a unique name.

Replace	Overwrite the existing file.

Backup	Rename the old file to a new, unique name, and store the incoming file under its current name.

Append	Add the incoming file to the end of the existing file.

Discard	Refuse and/or discard the incoming file.


Block Check

Select the block check method to use on sends to detect errors. Select from:

No Change	Do not change error detection.

Sum-1	Standard; catches most errors.

Sum-2	More rigorous checking, but high overhead.

CRC	More rigorous checking, but high overhead.


Commands command, FTP Protocol (Transfer menu)

The Commands command on the Transfer menu displays the FTP Commands dialog box when you have selected FTP as your file transfer method. The options in this box let you select a command to send to the host, and change settings for the remote FTP. You must have selected FTP from the Protocol field drop-down list of the Options command (Transfer menu).

These commands let you perform file manipulation on a remote host without having to know the host's command language. To display a list of available commands, type help at the command line.

Dialog Box Options

Command

Select the command you want to issue to the host FTP, or type your own command. Select from:

ascii	lcd	mkdir	remotestatus
binary	ldir	mput	rename
cd	lls	open	rmdir
close	login	prompt	size
delete	lpwd	put	status
dir	ls	pwd	system
get	mdelete	quit	type
help	mget	quote	verbose
image
Execute

Execute the selected command.

Transmit

Display the FTP Transmit dialog box.

Receive

Display the FTP Receive dialog box.

Configure

Display the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common file transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method. This option is not available when you have an active FTP connection.


ASCII

Sets the file transfer type to ASCII (the default value). This command overrides the default file type setting in the File Transfer dialog box while the current session is active.


BINARY

Sets the file transfer type to BINARY image transfer. This command overrides the default file type setting in the File Transfer dialog box while the current session is active.


CD  remote_directory

Changes the current directory on the remote host to remote_directory.


CLOSE

Terminates the FTP session with the remote server, but leaves the Commands dialog box open.


DELETE  remote_file

Deletes the named file from the remote host.


DIR  [remote_directory [local_file]]

Displays a detailed list of files in the current directory on the remote host. If you specify remote_directory, FTP displays a list of that directory. If you specify local_file, FTP redirects the list to that file on your computer. The file can be in the current directory, or you can specify a full pathname. If no local file is specified output is directed to the log or commands window.


GET  remote_file [local_file | local_directory]]

Copies remote_file from the remote host to a file on your computer. If you specify local_file, remote_file is renamed to local_file when FTP copies it to your computer. If you specify local_directory, remote_file is copied into that directory. If you specify a hyphen (-) for local_file, FTP redirects the file to your screen. The current settings for TYPE are used during file transfers. To transfer multiple files, use MGET.


HELP

Lists FTP commands.


IMAGE

Sets the file transfer type to BINARY image transfer. This command overrides the default file type setting in the File Transfer dialog box while the current session is active.


LCD  local_directory

Changes the current working directory on your personal computer.


LDIR  [file_spec]

Displays a detailed list of the contents of the current directory on your computer. If you specify a drive, FTP lists the contents of the current directory on that drive. If you specify a directory, FTP lists the contents of that directory. If you specify a file (with or without wildcard characters), FTP lists any files matching that name.


LLS  [file_spec]

Displays a list of the files on the current directory on your workstation. If you specify a drive, FTP lists the files in the current directory on that drive. If you specify a directory, FTP lists the files in that directory. If you specify a file (with or without wildcard characters), FTP lists any files matching that name.


LOGIN  [hostname [user [password [account]]]]

Opens a connection, and logs in to the FTP server on the host.


LPWD

Displays the name of the current drive and working directory on your personal computer.


LS  [remote_directory] [local_file]

Displays a detailed list of files in the current directory on the remote host. If you specify remote_directory, FTP displays a list of that directory. If you specify local_file, FTP redirects the list to this file on your computer. The file can be in the current directory, or you can specify a full pathname.


MDELETE  remote_file [...]

Deletes one or more files from the remote host. Wildcard characters are expanded on the host; to specify remote_file, you can use any wildcard characters the host understands. If PROMPT is set to on, you will be asked for confirmation before each file is deleted.


MGET  remote_file [...]

Copies one or more files from the host to the current working directory on your computer. To specify remote_file, you can use any wild card characters that the host understands; they are expanded on the host. If PROMPT is set to on, you will be asked for confirmation before each file is copied.


MKDIR  remote_directory

Creates remote_directory on the host.


MPUT  local_file [...]

Copies one or more files from your computer to the current working directory on the host. To specify local_file, you can use DOS wildcard characters. If PROMPT is set to on, you will be asked for confirmation before each file is copied.


OPEN  [hostname [user [password [account]]]]

Opens a connection, and logs in to the FTP server on the host.


PROMPT

Sets interactive prompting on or off. When on, interactive prompting occurs during multiple file transfers to allow you to selectively retrieve or store files.


PUT  local_file [remote_file | remote_directory]

Copies a file from your computer to the current directory on the host. If you specify remote_file, FTP copies local_file to that name. If you specify remote_directory, local_file is copied to the remote_directory. The current settings for TYPE are used during file transfers. To transfer multiple files, use MPUT.


PWD

Displays the name of the current working directory on the host.


QUIT

Terminates the FTP session with the remote server, and closes the FTP Commands dialog box.


QUOTE  protocol_command

You can use this command only when you have an active connection, and it should only be used if you are familiar with the FTP protocol.

Sends an FTP protocol command to the server, bypassing normal command parsing. Incorrect specification of the FTP protocol command might make the current FTP session useless. Specifically, any command that requires data to be transferred might interfere with the current FTP session.

You can try typing QUOTE HELP to get a list of FTP protocol commands supported by the server for the active session.


REMOTESTATUS

Displays the status of the remote FTP server.


RENAME  [oldname] [newname]

Renames the host file oldname to newname.


RMDIR  Host_directory name

Deletes the named directory on the host. This command might fail if the named directory contains files.


SIZE  Host_filename

Displays the size of the host file. Some servers do not support this command.


STATUS

Displays the current state of all FTP options.


SYSTEM

Displays the current type of operating system running on the host. Some servers do not support this command.


TYPE  [type_name]

Sets the file transfer type to type_name. If no type_name is specified, displays the current type. The default file transfer type is ASCII. The other supported type is BINARY (image). You can use this command only when you have an active connection, and it affects only the active connection. This command overrides the default setting for file type in the File Transfer dialog box while the current session is active.


VERBOSE

Toggles verbose mode. The default setting is on. When verbose mode is on, FTP displays all responses from the FTP server.


Options command (Transfer menu)

The Options command on the Transfer menu displays the File Transfer dialog box. The options in this box let you select common transfer options, and select and configure a specific file transfer method.

Dialog Box Options

Protocol

Select the method (protocol) to use for sending and receiving files. Details

Duplicate Name

Select how you want to process an incoming file that has the same name as another file in the target directory. (Not available if you select ASCII in the Protocol field.) Details

Crash Recovery

Provides default for the Crash Recovery option in the Zmodem Receive dialog box. Only available if you select Zmodem in the Protocol field.

Directories

Select how to handle the directory information of the transferring file. (Not available if you select ASCII or Xmodem in the Protocol field.)

Send Full Path

Send the file's complete path information. See also the following Recurse Subdirectories option.

Use Path

Store the file based on the path supplied by the host appended to the path specified by the Receive To option.

Create Path

Create the path to store the file if the directories do not exist.

Recurse Subdirectories

Transfer files in the current directory's subdirectories that match the given filename or pattern.

Receive to

This is the starting path from which the destination path is created. When the Use Path option is selected the path supplied by the host will be appended to this path. When no path is supplied by the host or when the Use Path option is not selected the received files is placed in this directory.

Browse

Display the Browse dialog box in which you can select a directory for the Receive To field.

File Type Information

Select the mode in which to transfer the file. (Not available if you select ASCII in the Protocol field.)

File Type

Select whether to send file in automatic, binary, or text mode. Details

Scan unknown file for type

This option is activated only if File Type Automatic is selected. Read a portion of the file and determine if it contains any 8-bit or control codes. If it does, use Binary for the File Type.

Text files

This option is activated only if File Type Automatic is selected. Specify the file extensions you want to identify as text files.

Text File Options

Display the Text File Options dialog box. You can select special handling for text file transfers.

Options

Display the Options dialog box for the transfer method you selected in the Protocol field. This will be the ASCII Options, Kermit Options, Xmodem Options, Ymodem Options, Zmodem Options or FTP Options dialog box.

Log

View log of file transfers that occurred during the current session.


Protocol

Select the method (protocol) to use for sending and receiving files. Select from:

ASCII	Send file as if you typed the information.

Kermit	Use Kermit protocol to send and receive files.

Xmodem	Use Xmodem protocol to send and receive files.

Ymodem	Use Ymodem protocol to send and receive files.

Zmodem	Use Zmodem protocol, with optional crash recovery, to send and receive files.

FTP	Use FTP protocol to send and receive files.

This option is not available if you access the File Transfer dialog box by choosing Configure in the File Shuttle dialog box.


Duplicate Name

Select how you want to process an incoming file that has the same name as another file in the target directory. (Not available if you select ASCII in the Protocol field.) Select from:

Rename (Default)
Give the incoming file a unique name. KEA! renames the file by adding the numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. to the filename. If the filename ends in a number, that number is incremented. The extension is not changed.

Overwrite	Replace the existing file with the incoming file.

Discard	Do not accept transfer of the incoming file, and retain the existing file.

RenameOld	Rename the existing file using the procedure described for Rename.

Append	Add the incoming file to the end of the existing file.


File Type

Automatic	Enables the automatic file type processing based on the file extension and file scan options.

Binary	Send file in binary mode. KEA! sends all 8 data bits, and does not perform character translation. Typically, binary files are object code or executable programs. If you are using the Kermit file transfer protocol, often you need to issue the Set File Type Binary command on the remote Kermit.

Text	Send file in text mode. KEA! translates characters to suit a dissimilar remote system. You might lose data if the file contains any binary data.


Text File Options dialog box

You use options in the Text File Options dialog box to control the transfer of text files when transferring files with Kermit, X/Y/Zmodem, or FTP. You can display this dialog box by choosing Text File Options in the File Transfer dialog box (Options command, Transfer menu). If you select ASCII under Protocol, the Text File Options button is unavailable.

Note  If you transfer text files with ASCII, select your text file transfer options in the ASCII Options dialog box instead.

Dialog Box Options

Sending

Send Newlines As

Select what to send to indicate a new line. Select from:

CR LF

LF

Ctrl Z is end of file

Select to scan the file during transfer and stop when a Ctrl Z is encountered. If this option is selected the Ctrl Z will not be sent.

Receiving

Map Newlines to CR LF

Select to change host end-of-line indicator to CR LF.

Add Ctrl Z at end of file

Select to add a Ctrl Z at the end of the received file if one is not already there.

Translation

Display the Translation dialog box. In this box, you can control how one character set is translated to another during text file transfer.


Translation dialog box

You use the options in the Translation dialog box to control how one character set is translated to another during text file transfer. You access this dialog box by choosing Translation from the Text File Options dialog box (Options command, Transfer menu). Alternatively, you can choose Translation from the ASCII Options dialog box, if you select ASCII from the drop-down list under Protocol in the File Transfer dialog box.

Note  The type of translation performed is not part of the Kermit protocol.

Dialog Box Options

Enable

Select to perform translation on text file transfers and ASCII transmit operations.

Method

Select how characters that do not translate exactly are handled. This option applies to all translation methods. Select from:

Exact Only	Output an exact translation, or a ? if exact translation not possible.

Readability	Output the best match found in the output character set, or a ? if there is no reasonable best match.

Local character set

Select the character set to use to store the data, whether on the screen or in a file. You should not change the default (ISO Latin) unless you intend to move the data from the host to a DOS application rather than a Windows application. Details

Host Character Set

Select, from the drop-down list, the character set used for text file transfers. This option applies to Capture/PlayBack, Copy/Paste, and Kermit methods of transferring text. Details


Local character set

Select the character set to use to store the data, whether on the screen or in a file. You should not change the default (ISO Latin) unless you intend to move the data from the host to a DOS application rather than a Windows application. The other character sets are IBM character sets arranged on DOS PC code pages.

ISO Latin 1 (Default)	Standard Windows character set.

US English (437)

Multilingual (850)

Portugal (860)

Canadian-French (863)

Nordic (865)


Host Character Set

Select the character set used for text file transfers. This option applies to Capture/PlayBack, Copy/Paste, and Kermit methods of transferring text. Select from:

Automatic (Default)   Use current KEA! configured character set. If you set Character Set Mode to Multinational, the User Preferred Supplemental selection (DEC-MCS, ISO Latin 1, IBM Graphics) is used to determine the character set. If you set Character Set Mode to National, the keyboard language is used to determine the character set.

ASCII	Translate all data to standard ASCII characters.

ISO Latin 1	Use the 8-bit ISO Latin 1 character set.

DEC-Multinational
Use the 8-bit DEC Multinational character set.

National	Use the 7-bit National character set for the country specified in the National Character Set field in the Terminal General dialog box.


ASCII Options dialog box

The options in the ASCII Options dialog box control how text files are transferred using the Send command from the Transfer menu and the Copy and Paste commands from the Edit menu. To access this dialog box, choose Options from the Transfer menu, ensure ASCII is selected in the Protocol list, then choose the Options button.

Dialog Box Options

Start Host Receiving

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start receiving files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

End Host Receiving

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to end its side of the transfer. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Newline As

Select the character that indicates the end of a line. Select from:

CR (Default)	Send a carriage return (expected by most hosts).

CR LF	Send a carriage return and line feed.

LF	Send only a line feed.

Null Line Padding

Select to pad null lines with a character before sending them to the host. You may want to do this as some host software interprets a blank line as a termination signal.

Character

Type the character you want to use to pad null lines.

Limit Transmit Rate

Select to limit how fast characters are sent to the host.

Rate (ch/sec)

Type the number of characters per second you want to use for the Limit Transmit Rate.

Translation

Display the Translation dialog box.


Kermit Options dialog box

You use the options in the Kermit Options dialog box to change settings for KEA!'s Kermit. To access this dialog box, choose Options from the Transfer menu, ensure Kermit is selected in the Protocol list, then choose the Options button.

Dialog Box Options

Start Host Receiving

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start receiving files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Start Host Sending

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start sending files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Quit Host Server

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host what to do once transmission completes. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used. Details

Quit server at end of each transfer

This option is the default value for the Quit Server at end option in the Kermit Transmit and Kermit Receive dialog boxes. If selected, the option causes the Finish command to be sent to a server after every transfer.

Remote Kermit

Select the type of remote Kermit to which you will connect. Details

Block Check

Select the error detection method to use when sending files to the host. Details

Rx Packet Length

Type the maximum length, in bytes, for a packet that can be received from the remote Kermit. The minimum value is 30; the maximum value is 1024. Details

Tx Packet Max Length

Type the maximum length, in bytes, for a packet that can be sent to the remote Kermit. The minimum value is 30; the maximum value is 1018. Details

Window Request

Type the maximum number of unacknowledged packets to allow. The minimum number is 1; the maximum number is 8. Details

Advanced

Display the Advanced dialog box. The options in this box let you specify more option settings for the local Kermit. Normally, you do not need to change anything in this box as the defaults correspond to the standard Kermit configuration.


Quit Host Server

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host what to do once transmission completes. This macro will execute after any Finish command is sent to the server. Finish commands can be sent individually from the Kermit Commands dialog box (Transfer menu), or automatically if Quit Server at End is selected in the Kermit Transmit or Kermit Receive dialog box. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.


Remote Kermit

Select the type of remote Kermit to which you will connect. Select from:

Interactive	You must tell the remote Kermit to Receive and Transmit files before KEA! Kermit starts.

Server	The proper commands for the host are issued when you use the Send or Receive (Get) command (Transfer menu).


Block Check

Select the error detection method to use when sending files to the host. Select from:

Sum-1 (Default)	Simple one-byte checksum.

Sum-2	Simple two-byte checksum.

CRC	16-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check using CCITT polynomial.

Kermit retransmits any packets in which it detects an error. If many retransmissions occur, it may help to decrease the maximum packet length.

KEA!'s Kermit provides three ways of detecting errors: Sum-1, Sum-2, and CRC. The default one-byte checksum (Sum-1) often is enough; all Kermit implementations support this type. However, if you use large packets (greater than 94 bytes), or the line is noisy, you should use one of the longer checksums, preferably CRC. Note that not all Kermit implementations support the longer checksums.

When receiving a file, the block check method the sender uses is accepted, independent of the setting of the KEA! Block Check option. When sending a file, KEA! requests to use the selected option, but accepts whatever the receiver replies it wants to use.


Rx Packet Length

Type the maximum length, in bytes, for a packet that can be received from the remote Kermit. The minimum value is 30; the maximum value is 1024.

This value is the length of the data portion of the packet that is 6 bytes less than the actual transmitted packet. You may want to set this option to a low value if you transfer files over noisy lines. If the remote Kermit does not support long packets, and you type a value greater than 94, the standard packet size of 94 bytes is used.


Tx Packet Max Length

Type the maximum length, in bytes, for a packet that can be sent to the remote Kermit. The minimum value is 30; the maximum value is 1018.

You may want to set this option to a low value if you transfer files over noisy lines. This value takes effect only if you set it before Kermit parameter negotiation occurs. The remote Kermit tells KEA! the maximum packet length it can receive. If the remote Kermit does not support long packets, and you type a value greater than 94, the standard packet size of 94 bytes is used.


Window Request

Type the maximum number of unacknowledged packets to allow. The minimum number is 1; the maximum number is 8.

KEA! negotiates Sliding Windows protocol with the remote Kermit. Sliding Windows Kermit is faster than standard Kermit. The actual number used depends on the negotiation with the remote Kermit. Therefore, KEA! could use a value lower than the one you type in this field.


(Kermit) Advanced dialog box

The options in the Advanced dialog box let you make further changes to the operation of KEA!'s Kermit. Because the defaults conform to the standard Kermit configuration, you normally do not need to change these options.

You access this dialog box by choosing Advanced in the Kermit Options dialog box (Transfer menu, Options).

Dialog Box Options

Rx Packet Start Char

Enter the received packet start character. The standard received packet start character is ASCII SOH. If your host uses a different character, you must enter that character in this field.

Tx Packet

Tx Packet Start Char

Enter the packet start character. The standard packet start character is SOH (^A). If the host expects a different character, you must enter that character in this field.

Enable Tx Packet End Char

Select to send an end character to the remote Kermit. If the remote Kermit does not need an end character, you can obtain a slight increase in speed by not selecting this option. (KEA! does need an end character.)

Tx Packet End Char

Enter the packet end character. The standard packet end character is CR (^M). If the host expects a different character, you must enter that character in this field.

Error Control

Rx Timeout in seconds

Type the number of seconds to wait before issuing a timeout. The minimum value is 0; the maximum is 94. Details

Tx Timeout in seconds

Type the number of seconds to wait before issuing a timeout. The minimum value is 0; the maximum is 94. Details

Error Retry Limit

Type the number of consecutive errors to allow on the same packet before aborting a file transfer. An error is either a NAK or a timeout.

Prefix Characters

Control Quote Character

Enter the printable character to use as the prefix for printable control character sequences. Details

Enable 8th Bit Quoting

Select to have Kermit use 8th bit quoting to let 8-bit data pass through a 7-bit communications channel.

Eight Bit Quote Character

Enter the character to use as the 8th bit quote character. Kermit uses the ampersand (&) as the default character. Details

Enable Compression

Select to have Kermit prefix strings of repeated characters with a special character to speed up transmission.

Compression Character

Enter the character for Kermit to use as a prefix to strings of repeated characters.

The Kermit protocol allows special prefix encoding for long strings of repeated characters. This special compression character speeds up transmission.

If you try to set the compression character to the same character as the control quote or 8th bit quote character, Kermit displays the Quote Conflict error message.

Padding

Pad Character

Enter the character to send before sending the first character of a packet. This is useful on slow half-duplex systems.

No. of Pad Characters

Type the number of pad characters you want Kermit to send before the first character of a packet. The minimum is one; the maximum is 50. Details

Attribute Packets

Select to use attribute packets. If the remote Kermit cannot handle attribute packets, do not select this option.


Rx Timeout in seconds

Type the number of seconds to wait before issuing a timeout. The minimum value is 0; the maximum is 94.

KEA!'s Kermit instructs the remote computer to timeout, or send a NAK back if it does not receive a packet in the specified time interval. Other Kermits usually interpret a value of 0 as meaning do not time out.


Tx Timeout in seconds

Type the number of seconds to wait before issuing a timeout. The minimum value is 0; the maximum is 94.

KEA! issues a timeout and sends a NAK to the remote Kermit if the host has not transmitted a packet in the specified time interval. The host usually sets this value during the parameter negotiation. You can set this option if you want a timeout to occur before parameter negotiation completes. A value of 0 causes KEA! to issue a timeout to the remote Kermit after approximately one hour.


Control Quote Character

Enter the printable character to use as the prefix for printable control character sequences.

To avoid interference from communications channels and device drivers, the Kermit protocol translates each control character in the data it is transmitting to a two-character printable sequence consisting of a control prefix (quote character), normally the # character, followed by a printable ASCII character. The CRLF line terminator sequence becomes #M#J, control-A becomes #A, and so on. The receiving Kermit translates these two characters back to control characters upon reception.

If the remote Kermit uses a non-standard quote character, or if you send text with a very large number of # characters, you can change the control quote character to some other printable character. If you specify a control quote character that is the same as either the compression character or the 8th bit quote character, Kermit displays the Quote Conflict error message.


Eight Bit Quote Character

Enter the character to use as the 8th bit quote character. Kermit uses the ampersand (&) as the default character.

Eighth bit prefixing is a way of letting 8-bit data pass through a 7-bit communications channel. To do this, Kermit transforms characters with the eighth bit set into two characters: the 8th bit quote (prefix) character, and the actual character. Kermit sends the 8th bit quote character before the 7-bit portion of the character.

By default, Kermit does not use 8th bit quoting if you use 8 data bits, but does use it if you use 7 data bits. You can specifically enable 8th bit quoting by selecting the Enable 8th Bit Quoting option in the Advanced dialog box.

If you try to set the 8th bit quote character to the same character as the control quote or compression character, Kermit displays the Quote Conflict message.

If parameter negotiation with the remote Kermit concludes that it will not allow 8th bit quoting, KEA! transfers all files as 7-bit, and logs the following warning message for each file sent: "Warning: File being sent with 7-bit bytes".


No. of Pad Characters

Type the number of pad characters you want Kermit to send before the first character of a packet. The minimum is one; the maximum is 50. You can use any control character as the pad character. The most commonly used ones are NUL and DEL. This parameter is normally set during the negotiation. Because Kermit must send one or two packets before negotiation completes, you may have to set temporary parameters to use during the initial negotiation.


Xmodem Options dialog box

You use the options in the Xmodem Options dialog box to control how files are transferred. To access this dialog box, choose Options from the Transfer menu, ensure Xmodem is selected in the Protocol list, then choose the Options button.

Dialog Box Options

Start Host Receiving

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start receiving files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Start Host Sending

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start sending files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Block Size 1K

Select to send data in 1K size packets. This can significantly increase file transfer speed.

Ack Timeout

Specify how many seconds to wait for an acknowledgment of a sent packet.

CRC 16 bit

Select to use a 16 bit check sum to verify the integrity of packets.


Ymodem Options dialog box

You use the options in the Ymodem Options dialog box to control how files are transferred. To access this dialog box, choose Options from the Transfer menu, ensure Ymodem is selected in the Protocol list, then choose the Options button.

Dialog Box Options

Start Host Receiving

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start receiving files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Start Host Sending

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start sending files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Ack Timeout

Specify how many seconds to wait for an acknowledgment of a sent packet.

G Option

Select to use the Ymodem-G protocol. This protocol assumes the modems are handling error control.


Zmodem Options dialog box

You use the options in the Zmodem Options dialog box to tell control how files are transferred. To access this dialog box, choose Options from the Transfer menu, ensure Zmodem is selected in the Protocol list, then choose the Options button.

Dialog Box Options

Start Host Receiving

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start receiving files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Start Host Sending

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to start sending files. However, if the transfer is effected in a macro, this option is not used.

Automatically start receive

Select to start receiving files when a special Zmodem code is received.

Allow unchecked crash recovery

Allows crash recovery to occur even when the remote Zmodem does not support CRC checking and so cannot tell whether the local file resembles the remote file in anything more than its name. Use caution when enabling this option—the resulting "transferred" file could be a combination of unrelated data.

This option has no effect unless Crash Recovery has been enabled in the Receive dialog box.

Escape CR and DLE

Select to send an Escape character before sending any CR or DLE character.

Transmit Window Request

Set a window size for unacknowledged transmitted data. The setting indicates the number of 1K blocks that can be transmitted before Zmodem will wait for an acknowledge. If this is set to 0, Zmodem does not wait for acknowledges.


FTP Options dialog box

You use the options in the FTP Options dialog box to change settings for KEA!'s FTP. To access this dialog box, choose Options from the Transfer menu, ensure FTP is selected in the Protocol list, then choose the Options button. If you are unsure of what your selections should be, contact your system administrator before you proceed.

If you save your session configuration before exiting KEA!, this information is saved as default login information and displayed in the FTP Connect dialog box when you initiate a file transfer.

Note  If you use a Telnet or FTP proxy, Host name lookup for the remote host is performed by the proxy. The proxy might use a different Domain Name Server than you would use locally. In order to be sure that Host names are resolved correctly, do not use abbreviated names for hosts outside your local area network.

Dialog Box Options

Host

Type the name of the host to which you want to connect, or select a Host name from the drop-down list. The list displays up to 16 of your most recently used FTP or Telnet connections. The Host name you type does not have to be one of those displayed in the list.

Login Information

Userid

Type your user name.

Password

Type your password, which will be hidden as a series of asterisks. The password you type is used as the default password for the current session. It is not saved as part of your session configuration.

Account

Type your account name if it is required by your host; otherwise, leave this option blank. Some hosts require an account name before connecting. VM/CMS hosts use the account as the password to the user's default directory.

FTP Port

Some FTP connections to non-standard systems use a port number for FTP other than 21. Most systems do not require modification of the port number.

Internet Mail Address

Type your Internet mail address (yourname@yourlocation). The information you type here is used as the default password when you log in to a host anonymously.

TCP Type

Specify Windows Sockets. You can use any TCP/IP package that supports the Windows Sockets API V1.1 definition.

Hosts File

Specify a file containing host names to be used in the host drop-down list. The file is formatted similarly to a standard hosts file with one host name per line. In a real hosts file the address is the first entry on the line and the host name is separated from it with white space (tab or blank(s)), but the address field is not required, only the white space. The names will show in the drop-down list but name resolution is the responsibility of the TCP/IP stack or domain name server. If your TCP/IP stack is set up to use a hosts file, then specify the same one to KEA! unless you want to limit the displayed list.

Passive mode transfers

If this option is selected, the FTP data connection is established by the client rather than by the server. This works for most servers and is sometimes necessary if the client (your PC) is behind a firewall. If you use an FTP Proxy, select this option. If your FTP connection fails with Passive Mode Transfers selected, try reconnecting with this option cleared. The default is cleared.

Proxies

Choose this button to display the Proxies dialog box where you can configure your FTP, Telnet, and SOCKS proxy server options.


Proxies dialog box

As a component of network security, a proxy acts as an intermediary and limits access to servers outside your internal network. Use the options in the Proxies dialog box to configure your FTP, Telnet, and SOCKS proxy server options.

To display the Proxies dialog box, choose Proxies in either the FTP Options or Telnet Setup dialog box.

Note  If an FTP Proxy and a SOCKS Proxy are both enabled, FTP sessions use the FTP proxy. If a Telnet Proxy and a SOCKS Proxy are both enabled, Telnet sessions use the Telnet proxy.

Dialog Box Options

Use FTP proxy

Select this option to use an FTP proxy.

FTP Proxy

Type the Host name or IP address of your FTP Proxy server.

FTP Port

Type the port number for the FTP proxy server.

Use Telnet proxy

Select this option to use a Telnet proxy.

Telnet Proxy

Type the Host name or IP address of your Telnet proxy server.

Telnet Port

Type the port number for the Telnet Proxy server.

Use SOCKS proxy

Select this option to use a SOCKS version 4.0 proxy. A SOCKS proxy can be used for both FTP and Telnet sessions.

SOCKS Proxy

Type the Host name or IP address of your SOCKS proxy server.

SOCKS Port

Type the port number for the SOCKS proxy server.


FTP Connect dialog box

You use the options in the FTP Connect dialog box to change login information for KEA!'s FTP. This box is displayed before you make a new FTP connection using Shuttle, FTP Commands, Send, or Receive. It displays the login parameters of your most recently used FTP session. If no previous login information is available, the FTP Connect dialog box displays the default login information that you previously entered in the FTP Options dialog box. Changes you make in the FTP Connect dialog box are only used for the current connection; the default login information does not change.

Note  If you use a Telnet or FTP proxy, Host name lookup for the remote host is performed by the proxy. The proxy might use a different Domain Name Server than you would use locally. In order to be sure that Host names are resolved correctly, do not use abbreviated names for hosts outside your local area network.

Dialog Box Options

Host

Type the name of the host to which you want to connect, or select a Host name from the drop-down list. The list displays up to 16 of your most recently used FTP or Telnet connections. The Host name you type does not have to be one of those displayed in the list.

Login Information

Userid

Type your user name.

Password

Type your password. The password is hidden, except when the Anonymous FTP check box is selected.

Account

Type your account name if it is required by your host; otherwise, leave this option blank. Some hosts require an account name before connecting. VM/CMS hosts use the account as the password to the user's default directory.

FTP Port

Some FTP connections to non-standard systems use a port number for FTP other than 21. Most systems do not require modification of the port number.

Anonymous FTP

Select this box to login to the selected host as User Anonymous. The Userid will be Anonymous, and the Password will be your Internet Mail address as previously entered in the FTP Options dialog box. If you have not yet entered your Internet Mail address, the password you use is saved as the default.

TCP Type

Specify Windows Sockets. You can use any TCP/IP package that supports the Windows Sockets API V1.1 definition.

Hosts File

Specify a file containing host names to be used in the host drop-down list. The file is formatted similarly to a standard hosts file with one host name per line. In a real hosts file the address is the first entry on the line and the host name is separated from it with white space (tab or blank(s)), but the address field is not required, only the white space. The names will show in the drop-down list but name resolution is the responsibility of the TCP/IP stack or domain name server. If your TCP/IP stack is set up to use a hosts file, then specify the same one to KEA! unless you want to limit the displayed list.


View command (Options menu)

The View command on the Options menu displays the View dialog box. The options in this dialog box let you change the size of text in the emulation window, and show or hide the various scroll and status bars.

Dialog Box Options

Font Width

Select a font size from 3 pixels wide to 24 pixels wide, or Auto. The Auto selection uses a font size based on the window size.

If the window contains graphics, this command makes the displayed image larger or smaller. This appears to zoom the image.

The apparent size of different fonts on your screen depends on the resolution of your display.

On a standard VGA (640x480), font sizes 5 Wide and 7 Wide show all 80 (or 132) columns in the full screen, even with the vertical scroll bar enabled. Font size 8 Wide shows all columns only when you disable the vertical scroll bar.

On an 800x600 display, font sizes 5 Wide, 7 Wide, and 8 Wide show all 80 (or 132) columns in the full screen, even with the vertical scroll bar enabled. Font size 10 Wide shows all columns only when you disable the vertical scroll bar.

The font size for a 132-column display is automatically selected, based on the selected 80-column font size.

Vertical Scroll Bar

Select this option to display the vertical scroll bar. Use this bar to scroll up and down the screen, and the History buffer if you enabled History.

Horizontal Scroll Bar

Select this option to display the horizontal scroll bar.Use this bar to scroll left and right on the screen. The scrolled bar is dimmed if there is no additional data to view.

Status Bar

Displays the Status Bar at the bottom of the application window.

VT Status Line

You can hide or display the VT status line, and control its position above or below the horizontal scroll bar.

Language

(Available only in KEA! International versions.) Select the language you want to use when displaying all menus, commands, dialog boxes, and system messages. You can select English, French (Français), German (Deutsch), Spanish (Español ), Italian (Italiano), or Portuguese (Português). This feature is not available in the U.S. version.


Colors command (Options menu)

The Colors command on the Options menu displays the Attribute Colors dialog box. Use this dialog box to map colors to the various character attributes and their combinations. You also can change the background color used for the history buffer.

You can also obtain this dialog box by clicking the Colors button on the toolbar.

  Colors button

Dialog Box Options

Attribute

Select the attribute, or attribute combination, for which you want to specify colors. Or, select History to choose a background for your history buffer area. Dark gray is used as the default for the history buffer area.

Foreground

Choose a foreground color for the selected attribute or combination. The list contains the foreground colors for attribute mapping. You can change the color definition in the Colors dialog box.

Background

Choose a background color for the selected attribute, attribute combination, or history buffer area. The list contains the background colors for attribute mapping. You can change the color definition in the Colors dialog box.

Map to Color

Display characters with the named attribute using the colors shown in the list: Bold, Inverse, Underline, Blink.

ISO Colors

KEA! supports ISO Color sequences, which the host uses to control foreground and background colors independently of other visual attributes. If this option is cleared, ISO sequences are ignored.

Default

Reset the foreground and background index for all attribute combinations. Also, turn off the Map to Color selection for each attribute.

Colors

Display the Colors dialog box where you can change the color value of KEA!'s 16 color indexes.


Colors dialog box

Use the Colors dialog box to change KEA!'s colors. To display this dialog box, choose Colors on the Options menu, then choose the Colors button in the Attribute Colors dialog box. Or, you can choose Display from the Options Terminal menu, then choose the Colors button.

Dialog Box Options

VT Color Index

Select the color you want to change. A number and name identify the color.

Red, Green, Blue

Assign values (0 to 255) to the color ratios for the selected VT Color Index. To make gradual changes to colors, you must have Use Exact Colors selected and have appropriate video hardware.

Use Exact Colors

This option is available only if you have a 256 color display (that is, a display with a palette).

Selected	(default) 16 of the 256 available colors are used to exactly match the VT colors. You can change any of the 16, defining your own exact colors.

Cleared	The palette is disabled. Your display behaves as a 16 color type. The requested color is matched to the closest available Windows pre-set color.

Lock User Colors

This option prevents the host from changing colors. Normally the host can change any of the 16 colors defined by the display. However, some host applications fail to restore the colors, altering the appearance of text and graphics from other applications.

Reset

Restore colors to saved values.

To Saved Colors

Change all indexes to saved values.

To Factory Colors

Change all indexes to KEA!'s original (factory) values.

Current Index to Saved

Change the selected index to the saved value.

Current Index to Factory

Change the selected index to KEA!'s original (factory) value.


General command (Options Terminal menu)

The General command on the Options Terminal menu displays the Terminal General dialog box. Use the options in this box to specify the settings for the type of terminal you want KEA! to emulate. Many of the options correspond to the options available on the VT340 series terminals. Other options are specific to KEA!.

The default values provided for most options in the Terminal General dialog box are suitable for most users. If the default values are not suitable, you might have to consult your host system administrator.

Dialog Box Options

Mode

Select the terminal operating mode from the drop-down list. VT400-7bit is suitable for most applications. Select from:

VT400-7bit	VT420 features with 7-bit control codes

VT400-8bit	VT420 features with 8-bit control codes

VT100	VT100 compatible

VT52	VT52 compatible.

ANSI-BBS	Suitable for many BBS hosts; supports DOS ANSI.SYS functionality.

401X	Emulate a Tektronix 401X series terminal similar to the way a VT340 does.

DA Response

Select the DA (Device Attributes) response from the drop-down list. KEA! sends this response on a request from the host system. The default value KEA! provides a superset of the VT340 DA Response including some VT420 functions. The value Custom responds with the strings stored in Custom Primary DA and Custom Secondary DA. Other values exactly match the DA response for that terminal type.

Custom Primary DA

Specify your own Primary DA (Device Attributes) response. If you selected Custom in DA Response, this string is sent in response to a Primary Device Attributes request. You enter control codes in the range 0 to 31 as a circumflex ^ followed by a character. You also enter any special code as a circumflex followed by three decimal numbers.

Custom Secondary DA

Specify your own Secondary DA (Device Attributes) response. If you selected Custom in DA Response, this string is sent in response to a Secondary Device Attributes request. You enter control and special codes as described in Custom Primary DA.

Answerback

Specify your answerback string. You can enter up to 31 characters. You enter control codes in the range 0 to 31 as a circumflex ^ followed by a character. You also enter any special code as a circumflex followed by three decimal numbers. This string is sent in response to a ^E from the host.

Character Set Mode

Select the character set mode for KEA! to use. Select from:

Multinational	Map the regular ASCII character set into the lower (7-bit) character set (GL). Also, map the supplemental User Preferred Character Set into the upper (8-bit) character set (GR). To send and receive codes in the GR set, you need 8 bits of data. If you use a serial port, ensure that your port can send all 8 bits.

National	Your Character Set Mode is defined by your selection under National Character Set. Map one of the National Replacement Character Sets (NRC) into the lower (7-bit) character set (GL). The National Character Set selection you make determines the actual NRC set used. National mode uses only 7 bits; therefore, the upper (8-bit) character set (GR) is unavailable.

User Preferred Character Set

Select the 8-bit supplemental character set for KEA! to use. Select from:

DEC-MCS	DEC Supplemental

ISO Latin-1	ISO Latin-1

IBM-PC	IBM Graphics set

National Character Set

Select a National Replacement Character Set from the drop-down list. This character set is used when you select National under Character Set Mode. Select from:

N.American	British	Flemish	Fr.Canadian

Danish	Finnish	German	Dutch

Italian	Swiss French	Swiss German	Swedish

Norwegian	French/Belgian	Spanish	Portuguese

Local Echo

Select whether to display the characters sent to the host, or let the host handle echo.

Lock User Keys

Select whether the host system can change user-defined key (UDK) definitions.

Lock User Features

Select whether the host system can change the settings of the user preference features columns, scroll, and inverse screen.


Display command (Options Terminal menu)

The Display command on the Options Terminal menu shows the Display dialog box. The options in this dialog box let you control the appearance of your emulation window. Many of these options correspond to the options available on the DIGITAL terminal; others are specific to KEA!.

Dialog Box Options

Columns

Select the page width for text. When you change the setting, the screen is cleared. Select from:

80	80 columns wide

132	132 columns wide

Lines

Select the number of lines per page for the session. This also determines the number of pages. You can enter any number of lines between 24 and 144. The numbers in the drop-down box are compatible with DIGITAL VT terminals: 24 (6 pages), 25 (5 pages), 36 (4 pages), 48 (3 pages), 72 (2 pages), and 144 (1 page).

Scroll

When the cursor reaches the end of a page, each new line received from the host can cause the previously received lines to scroll upwards. Because this requires all the text in the emulation window to be re-written in a different position, data that is arriving too fast may have to wait while a slow machine repeatedly moves lines of text. To avoid waiting for KEA! to display every line as soon as it arrives, select Jump 2, Jump 4, or Paged. Then if data arrives faster than KEA! can display it, the window is re-written only after a specified number of lines are received. Note that no data is lost, only the line-by-line scrolling is omitted to save time. Whenever KEA! catches up to the incoming data, it re-writes the window to show the most recently received text. Select from:

Jump 1	Display after every line.

Jump 2	Display after one-eighth of the window has changed.

Jump 4	Display after one-quarter of the window has changed.

Paged	Display after a number of (default four) complete pages have changed. You can change this value by adding a line to your Windows Registry.

Disabled	Do not scroll. When the cursor reaches the end of the page, each new line simply overwrites the previous line.

Status Display

Specify how to use the VT status line. Select from:

None	Do not display status line.

Indicator	KEA! uses it to write its status.

Host	The host displays information on it.

Cursor

Specify the appearance of the cursor. Select from:

Show	Display the cursor.

Block	Display cursor as a block, not underline.

Blink	Make the cursor blink.

Coupling

Specify how to scroll to keep the cursor visible. Select from:

Horizontal	Scroll horizontally when the cursor moves beyond the right or left edge of a window.

Vertical	Scroll vertically when the cursor moves beyond the top or bottom of a window.

Page	Automatically display a different page when the cursor moves to that page in page memory.

New Line

Select to have the ENTER key send a CR and LF, instead of just a CR.

Auto Wrap

Select to have text automatically wrap to the next line when it reaches the right margin.

Transparent

Select to display received control characters, rather than process them.

Inverse Screen

Select to reverse the foreground and background colors for normal text.

Tabs

Display the Tabs dialog box where you can set and clear tabs.

Colors

Display the Colors dialog box where you can adjust KEA!'s colors.

Attributes

Display the Attribute Colors dialog box where you can select the colors to use for the various character attributes (bold, underline, inverse, blink), and their combinations.


Tabs dialog box

Use the Tabs dialog box to change tab stop settings. Choose Display from the Options Terminal menu, then choose the Tabs button.

Dialog Box Options

Columns

Specify in which column(s) you want to set tab stops. To set individual tab stops, enter a series of numbers separated by commas, for example: 4,7,15,20. To set tab stops at repeated intervals after the last stop, or column 1, enter the interval as +n, for example: 10,20+5.

Default

Choose this button to set tab stops at 8 column intervals.


Keyboard command (Options Terminal menu)

The Keyboard command on the Options Terminal menu displays the Keyboard dialog box. If required, you can use the options in this box to modify the keystrokes that are sent to the host when you press a key or combination of keys. Many of the options in this dialog box correspond to the VT420 terminal options; others are specific to KEA!.

You can display the UDKs dialog box, in which you can define your own functions for the SHIFT+F6 through SHIFT+F20 function key combinations, and the Keyboard Mapping dialog box, in which you can map macros, macro statements, or strings to keys.

The default values provided for most options in the Keyboard dialog box are suitable for most users.

Dialog Box Options

Layout

Select your keyboard type: Enhanced, PowerStation, LK250, LK450, or LK411/412.

Editpad Arrangement

Select whether to use a VT-like arrangement of the six editing keys, or let the driver determine the layout. If you select Set By Driver, all applications use the setting determined by the driver — either VT-like or PC-like. However, you can override the driver setting by selecting VT-like. Select from:

VT-Like	Force a VT-like arrangement of the six editing keys. (default)

Set By Driver	Let the driver determine whether the layout is VT-like or PC-like.

Keypad Mode

Select what the keypad keys send when pressed. Select from:

Numeric	Send the ASCII code of the numbers shown on the keycaps. (default)

Application	Send control sequences.

Cursor Key Mode

Select what the cursor (ARROW) keys send when pressed. Select from:

Normal	Send ANSI cursor control sequences. (default)

Application	Send control functions.

Backspace Key

Select what the BACKSPACE key sends when pressed. Select from:

Delete	Send the DEL character. (default)

Backspace	Send the BS character.

F1 Key

Select the action the F1 key performs when pressed. Select from:

Hold	Stop scrolling of text. (default)

FKey	Send the VT F1 function key sequence.

Ignore	Do nothing.

F2 Key

Select the action the F2 key performs when pressed. Select from:

Print	Perform VT print functions. (default)

FKey	Send the VT F2 function key sequence.

Ignore	Do nothing.

F3 Key

Select the action the F3 key performs when pressed. Select from:

Setup	Act as an ALT key; effect is similar to the VT setup function. (default)

FKey	Send the VT F3 function key sequence.

Ignore	Do nothing.

F4 Key

Select the action the F4 key performs when pressed. Select from:

Esc	Send the Escape code. (default)

FKey	Send the VT F4 function key sequence.

Ignore	Do nothing.

F5 Key

Select the action the F5 key performs when pressed. Select from:

Break	Send a break signal. (default)

FKey	Send the VT F5 function key sequence.

Ignore	Do nothing.

Bell

Select when the bell sounds. You can select one or both values. Select from:

Margin	Sound when the text cursor approaches the right margin.

Warning	Sound when operating errors occur, or the terminal receives ASCII BEL. (default)

UDKs

Display the UDKs dialog box. You can assign character strings to the SHIFT+F6 through SHIFT+F20 key combinations called user-defined keys (UDKs). Normally, the host assigns values to the UDKs.

Mapping

Display the Keyboard Mapping dialog box. Choosing this button also displays the pop-up VT keyboard. You can change the usual mapping of personal computer keys to DIGITAL VT functions, strings, macros, or macro statements.


UDKs dialog box

The UDKs dialog box options let you assign text and commands that you use often with applications. The contents of UDKs are normally defined by special commands from the host but can also be assigned using this dialog box.

Choose Keyboard from the Options Terminal menu to display the Keyboard dialog box. Then, choose UDKs.

Dialog Box Options

Shift Fn

Type the string containing the text and commands you want to send when you press the key. There is one field for each key combination (SHIFT+F6 through SHIFT+F20).

Clear

This button erases all the stored strings.


Graphics command (Options Terminal menu)

The Graphics dialog box controls the appearance of ReGIS and Tektronix graphic images. Many of the options correspond to the options available on the VT340 or Tektronix 401X series terminals. Other options are specific to KEA!. You can obtain this dialog box by choosing Graphics from the Options Terminal menu.

Dialog Box Options

Backing Store

Affects how KEA! stores the graphics image for printing and redrawing it on the screen. You can select one or both options. If you select both, Display List is used when necessary (for example, after a zoom), and Bitmap is used at other times. To print an image, at least one of these options must be selected.

Display List (Default)

If you use this method, all the graphics commands are stored in a list. This option offers you the most flexibility when you want to change the font size (zoom) and when printing.

Bitmap

If you use this method, a copy of the image is saved in memory. This generally lets the screen be redrawn faster than with the Display List method. However, if you change the font size, the image cannot be redisplayed.

Graphics Cursor

Select to display an output cursor at the writing point. This does not affect the Graphics Input Mode cursor.

Macrograph Report

Select to send the contents of a macrograph in response to a ReGIS Report Macrograph command from the host.

Sixel Scrolling

Select to let sixels scroll the screen. Sixel drawing begins at the current text cursor position, and can scroll the screen. If not selected, sixel drawing begins at the home position, and cannot scroll the screen. This does not affect the text active position. For VT340 compatibility select this option; for VT240 compatibility do not select this option.

Styled Lines

Many Windows video drivers do not properly handle some Windows-defined display options. In particular, many drivers do not support styled lines properly (lines with a dash/dot pattern) on a transparent background. Sometimes, these styled lines do not display. If your image is missing some lines, try this option. It changes the way KEA! draws styled lines.

When you select Styled Lines, a solid background, rather than a transparent background, is used. Although this differs slightly from what the VT340 does, it displays the styled lines properly. This value is stored in the Windows Registry database, not in the configuration file. If you set this value, all KEA! configurations use it.

Host Printing Options

These options determine how KEA! responds to a ReGIS hardcopy command S(H) from the host. Except for Ignore Request, the Host Printing Options control the way the current image is sent, in sixel format, to the host when the host requests it.

Ignore Requests

Select to ignore the host request to print graphics.

Background Printing

Select to send background colors.

Color Printing

Select to send color sixels. If not selected, monochrome sixels are sent.

Sixel Graphics Level

Determines the aspect ratio of the sixel data sent to the host. You should select the option that best matches the VAX printer on which you will print the image. Contact your VAX System Administrator for assistance in selecting which of the following values you should use.

LA210

Level 1	(Default)

Level 2

Sixel Print Option

Sets the size of the sixel image.

Compressed	(Default) Approximately 6 inches wide by 3 inches high.

Rotated	Approximately 12 inches wide by 8 inches high, rotated to print in landscape orientation on letter size paper.

Expanded	Approximately 12 inches wide by 8 inches high.

Color Specification

Select one of the following color encoding methods. The default is HLS (Hue, Lightness, and Saturation).

HLS	(Default)

RGB

Tektronix Options

CR Effect

Specifies action to take when a CR is received. Select from:

CR	(Default) Moves cursor to current margin.

CR LF	Moves cursor to current margin, then down one line.

LF Effect

Specifies action to take when an LF is received. Select from:

LF	(Default) Moves cursor down one line.

LF CR	Moves cursor down one line, then to current margin.

BS Effect

Specifies action to take when an ASCII BS is received. Select from:

BS	(Default) Backspaces the cursor.

Delete	Backspaces the cursor, and erases the character. This is a KEA! feature. The 4014 uses a storage-tube display, and cannot erase individual characters.

DEL Effect

Specifies action to take when a DEL is received. Select from:

LowY	(Default) Processes the DEL the same as any other received character.

Ignored	Does not process the DEL. Use this value if your host sends DEL as a pad character.

GIN Terminator

Set the GIN position report terminator code. Select from:

None	(Default) Sends no terminator code(s) at the end of the report.

CREOT	Sends control codes CR and EOT following a position report.

CR	Sends only a CR.

VT640 Compatible

Select to have the VT640 sequences for entering, and exiting Tektronix mode interpreted.

Characters

Sets the size of displayed characters. Select from:

Aligned	(Default) Uses 4014 character sizes.

Enlarged	Uses enlarged, easy-to-read characters. They do not align exactly with graphics.

Font Type

Sets type of characters to use. Select from:

Bitmap	(Default) Uses the built-in bitmap fonts for Tektronix characters. In most cases, this setting provides better looking characters. The character sizing may be less accurate than Vector drawn characters.

Vector	Generates characters from a vector definition of the characters, much like the Tektronix 4010/4014 device.

Overwrite

Select from:

Transparent	Overwrites existing characters without erasing them. This is the default.

Destructive	Erases existing characters (including spaces) before overwriting the area.

Character Set

Sets the character set to use. Select from:

ASCII	(Default) Uses the ASCII character set that the host cannot change.

APL	Uses the APL character set that the host cannot change.

Prog	Uses a character set that the host can change with control codes.

Line Style Map

Maps the standard 4014 line styles to Windows colors.

Style	(Default) Uses normal line styles. Does not perform color mapping.

Color	Maps line styles to colors. All lines appear as solid lines.

Both	Maps line styles to colors. Maintains original line styles.

Margin Control

Determines the setting of the Page Full Condition. This option is equivalent to the MarginControl switch on a 4014.

None	(Default) Never sets the Page Full Condition. After a page fills, writing continues at the top without clearing the screen.

1	Sets the Page Full Condition when the cursor reaches the bottom of the first margin.

2	Sets the Page Full Condition when the cursor reaches the bottom of the second margin.

Auto Print

Determines whether to produce a hardcopy each time the Page Full Condition occurs. This option is equivalent to the AutoPrint switch on a 4014.

Disabled	(Default) Does not produce a hardcopy.

Enabled	Produces a hardcopy. The screen clears when the hardcopy finishes printing.

Display

Controls the size of the emulation screen used to display the Tektronix image. The normal emulation window contains 80 columns and 24 lines. Select from:

64x24	(Default) Displays the image using 64 of the 80 columns. This setting gives a true aspect ratio.

80x24	Displays the image using the full emulation window. This stretches the aspect ratio wider than a true Tektronix image. However, it makes the image larger, and easier to read.

80x30	Displays the image using all 80 columns, and extends the image vertically to the equivalent of 30 VT lines. This keeps the aspect ratio correct. It makes the image larger, and easier to read.


Local Edit command (Options Terminal menu)

The Local Edit command on the Options Terminal menu displays the Local Edit dialog box. The options in this box let you select the features to use in local edit mode. These options correspond to the VT300 series terminal options.

The Local Edit dialog box contains three options that determine the size of a transmitted block. These include:

To transmit	Select	And clear

a line	Line Transmit	-
the scrolling region	Transfer Termination	Line Transmit
VT131 partial page	VT131 under VT131 Transfer	Line Transmit and Transfer Termination
ANSI partial page	ANSI under VT131 Transfer	Line Transmit and Transfer Termination
Dialog Box Options

Edit Mode

Specify whether to use local edit mode. You also can toggle between Interactive and Enabled modes by pressing SHIFT+SELECT. Select from:

Interactive	Turn off local edit mode.

Enabled	Turn on local edit mode.

Unavailable	Disable local edit mode so neither the host nor keyboard can turn it on.

Function Keys

Specify how the F6 through F20 function keys work in local edit mode. Select from:

Disabled	Do not work.

Immediate	Work in local edit mode, sending their normal escape sequences to the application software; do not affect edit mode.

Prefix	Send pressed key's escape sequence to the host; then send a block of data.

Suffix	Send block of data to the host; then send the pressed key's escape sequence.

EOL Chars

Enter the characters to send to indicate the end of a line in a block of data. The default characters are CR (^M).

EOB Chars

Enter the characters to send to indicate the end of a block of data.The default characters are FF (^L).

Transfer Termination

Select to send scrolling region when you press TRANSMIT. Otherwise, a block based on the VT131 Transfer option is sent when you press TRANSMIT.

Space Compression

Select to send a record separator in place of unused character fields and spaces in a data block; the last field on a line contains an EOL character. Otherwise, a space character is sent for each unused character position.

Line Transmit

Select to send a line of eligible characters when you press TRANSMIT. Otherwise, a full or partial page is sent when you press TRANSMIT. The page size depends on the Transfer Termination and VT131 Transfer options.

New Line Scrolling

Select to scroll at the end of the screen when in line transmit mode.

Erasure Mode

Specify the type of characters you or the host can erase. Select from:

Unprotected	Unprotected only.

All	Protected and unprotected.

Edit Key

Specify how KEA! should switch modes when you press SHIFT+SELECT. Select from:

Deferred	Send request to the host to switch modes.

Immediate	Switch immediately.

Transmit

Specify how KEA! should send data to the host when you press TRANSMIT. Select from:

Deferred	Send ESC S to notify the host that data is available. The host then may send ESC 5 to retrieve the data.

Immediate	Send data immediately.

VT131 Transfer

Specify the terminal type to use to send a data block. Select from:

ANSI	ANSI terminal.

VT131	VT131 terminal.

Guarded Area

Specify the type of characters to send. Select from:

Unprotected	Unprotected only.

All	Protected and unprotected.

Selected Area

Specify which characters should be sent. Selected characters are those to which the host assigned the selected attribute; this is similar to the protected attribute. Select from:

Selected	Only selected characters.

All	All characters on the current page.

Multiple Area

Specify which selected area should be sent. Select from:

Single	Send only the selected area containing the cursor.

Multiple	Send all selected areas on the current page.


Printer command (Options Terminal menu)

The Printer command on the Options Terminal menu displays the Printer dialog box. The options in this box let you select the printing mode, and other printer options. Many of the options correspond to those available on a DIGITAL terminal. Others are specific to KEA!.

Dialog Box Options

Mode

Determine when and how printing takes place. In most cases, the host selects these modes for you.

Normal	Disable continuous printing.

Auto Print	Print the current line of text after receiving an end-of-file, line feed, form feed, or vertical tab.

Controller	Send data directly to the printer without displaying the data on the screen.

Close Print Job Idle Timer

Set the interval of idle time (no data received) after which any buffered printer data is flushed, and the page is printed. This option handles the timing needs of local and network printers. It affects all modes of printing: print screen, auto print, and printer controller modes. Details

Print Screen

Extent

Select how much of the VT page to print when you request a print screen by pressing a key. Details

Terminator

Determine whether a form feed is sent at the end of the print operation.

None	Sends no form feed.

Form Feed	Sends a form feed forcing each print to a separate page.

Controller Mode

Print data from the host without displaying it on the screen.

Emulate ANSI Printer

Translate LA210 ANSI printer sequences to equivalent Windows printer functions. Details

Graphics Printing

Control the handling of printing of graphics images.

Print background

Print the current screen background. By default, the background does not print. (The background color is the paper color.)

Print colors

Print colors on a color printer, and use a dithering technique on a monochrome printer. The dithering technique depends on the driver's support. If you do not select this option, all non-white colors are converted to black.

Reverse black and white colors

Swap the brightest and darkest color in the palette for printing. Usually, this prints the image on a white background (because paper is white, and the screen usually is black).

Use bitmap

Use the bitmap method of graphics printing, regardless of which backing store method was selected in the Graphics dialog box.

Font Selection

Set the printer font to use.

Automatic

Use a fixed-pitch font. The font is selected from those supplied by the printer driver, The one that best fits 80 or 132 columns on the printed page is chosen.

Fonts

Display the Fonts dialog box from which you can choose the font you want to use for printing. Available only if you do not select Automatic.


Close Print Job Idle Timer

Set the interval of idle time (no data received) after which any buffered printer data is flushed, and the page is printed. This option handles the timing needs of local and network printers. It affects all modes of printing: print screen, auto print, and printer controller modes.

If printer data has been buffered, and no further data for the given timer interval is sent, this option flushes the buffered print data. This sends the data to the Windows printing spooler, or printing device, and then closes the printer driver.


Print Screen

Extent

Select how much of the VT page to print when you request a print screen by pressing a key. The VT terminal defines the extent. The host can control this option. Choose one of the following:

Page	Prints the entire page even if you are viewing only a portion of that page.

Region	Prints only the scrolling region. Normally, the scrolling region is defined as the complete page.


Emulate ANSI Printer

Translate LA210 ANSI printer sequences to equivalent Windows printer functions. KEA! assumes the host sends LA210 ANSI printer sequences and translates them to equivalent Windows printer functions. This is useful if you print to a printer for which the host does not generate output (for example, a PostScript printer). If you do not select this option, KEA! assumes the host is configured for the specific printer attached and sends all data to the printer without translation.

In order for this option to have effect, you must also have selected Controller under Mode in this dialog box.


Fonts dialog box

The Fonts dialog box options let you select a font, style, and size to use for printing. To access the Fonts dialog box, choose the Fonts button in the Printer dialog box.

Dialog Box Options

Font

Select from the list of your installed Windows fonts.

Font Style

Select Regular, Italic, Bold, or Bold Italic.

Size

Select a font size from the list.


Communications command (Options menu)

The Communications command displays the Communications dialog box. The options in this dialog box let you choose a port for communication with the host, and access the setup dialog box appropriate for that port.

Dialog Box Options

Port

Select the communications method you want to use to connect to the host system. Select one of the following values:

Serial

Modem

LAT

Telnet

KEAlink-MSU

Netware for DEC Access

Limit Transmit Rate

Select rate limiting during normal terminal emulation, pasting, and read operations. This does not affect protocol controlled file transfers such as Kermit.

Rate (ch/sec)

Set the maximum transmit rate in characters per second to use when sending data to the host. The default rate is 240 characters per second.

Setup

Display the Setup dialog box for the communication method you selected in the Port field. This will be the Serial Port Setup, Modem Setup, LAT Setup, Telnet Setup , KEAlink MSU Port Setup, or NetWare for LAT Setup dialog box.

If the button is dimmed, support for that port type has not been installed.


Serial	Access the COM ports on your personal computer. The Serial Setup dialog box lets you select the particular COM port, and set the port parameters.


Modem	Use the Windows 95 built-in modem management facility to configure and dial a modem. Modem is available only if you are using KEA! with Windows 95 or Windows NT version 4.0 or later.


LAT	Use DIGITAL's Local Area Transport network protocol for terminal access over Ethernet.. KEA! supports DEC's PATHWORKS for Windows 95, Meridian Technology Corporation's SuperLAT for Windows 95 or Windows NT, and KEAlink LAT. If you want to use a LAT connection, you must install LAT network software on your personal computer.


Telnet	Use for terminal access to hosts using Windows Sockets TCP/IP. Select the host to which you want to connect under Host in the Telnet Setup dialog box.


KEAlink-MSU	Use a protocol which allows multiple sessions on a single serial port. The MSU Serial Port Setup dialog box lets you select the port, and set parameters.


NetWare for DEC Access   Use NetWare for DEC Access (or NetWare for LAT), a Novell gateway product that lets you connect to a LAT host (typically a VAX) without having a LAT protocol stack on your personal computer.


Serial Port Setup dialog box

Use the Serial Port Setup dialog box to specify the parameters for a serial port. To display the Serial Port Setup dialog box, choose Communications from the Options menu, and select Serial under Port. Then choose Setup.

In order to use serial communication, you need to know which of your PC COM ports to use, your communication speed (bit rate), and the best flow control method to use. Although there are default values provided for all serial connection options, you must configure your serial port to the appropriate settings for your environment.

By default, KEA! displays COM1 through COM4 in the Port drop-down list box. You can limit the ports to choose from. To limit the number of COM ports displayed, add an option in your Windows Registry.

Dialog Box Options

Port

Select the COM port to use.  Details

Baud Rate

Specify the rate, measured in bits per second, at which the terminal communicates with the host system.  Details

Data Bits

Specify the number of data bits for each character.  Details

Stop Bits

Specify the time interval between each transmitted character. Select from 1, 1.5 or 2.

Parity

Select the type of error checking. If you set Data Bits to 8, specify None. Select from:

none   even   odd   mark   space

Check Parity

Check incoming parity.

Flow Control

Specify how to control the flow of data.  Details

Receive Xoff Point

Specify how much data can accumulate in the receive buffer before sending an Xoff.  Details

Modem Disconnect

Select whether to disconnect the session by lowering the DTR signal if no DSR or DCD activity occurs for a specified period of time.  Details

Disconnect on Exit

Select this option to drop the modem DTR signal when you exit (the default).  Details


Port

Select the COM port to use. KEA! uses the Windows supplied serial communications port driver.


Baud Rate

Specify the rate, measured in bits per second, at which the terminal communicates with the host system. The default rate is 9600. Select from:

300   1200   2400   4800   9600   19200   38400   57600   115200

To avoid losing received data at speeds greater than 19200, you may need to upgrade your serial I/O hardware chip with a 16550A compatible device.


Data Bits

Specify the number of data bits for each character. Use 8 if you set Parity to None, or 7 if you set Parity to a value other than None. The default is 8 data bits.


Flow Control

None	No action taken. This can result in loss of transmitted data.

Xon/Xoff	(Default) Pause when buffer fills, then send signal to remote computer when ready to receive more data. Generally, the best selection for communicating with most host computers.

Hardware	Remote system controls flow of data. Often applicable to situations where the baud rate between your computer and a communications device, such as a modem, differ from the baud rate between the modems. Usually encountered when using modems that use compression and error correction techniques such as V32bis, V42, or V42bis standards.


Receive Xoff Point

Specify how much data can accumulate in the receive buffer before sending an Xoff requesting the host to stop sending data. The default is 1024 (the maximum). You may want to reduce this value if KEA! appears to react slowly to a hold screen, or an interrupt to your host.


Modem Disconnect

Disconnect the session by lowering the DTR signal for about two seconds if no DSR or DCD activity occurs for the specified period. This generally disconnects the session as most modems hang up the line when this happens. However, refer to your modem documentation if you have any questions about this effect. If your modem cannot drop DSR or DCD, or your serial cable does not present the signals to KEA!, it may not recognize the line drop. Choose from:

60 ms   2 sec   Never


Disconnect on Exit

Drop the modem DTR signal when you exit (the default). Normally, the modem disconnects. If you do not select this option, the DTR signal remains high after you exit, and the modem stays connected. The Windows 3.1 serial communications driver causes a very short pulse in the DTR signal on both connect and disconnect. Depending on your modem, this can cause it to disconnect even though KEA! keeps the DTR state high. Fortunately, many modems do not disconnect on such a short pulse. You later can start KEA!, or another communications program, and continue communication without logging in to your host again.


Modem Setup dialog box

You can use the options in the Modem Setup dialog box to configure a modem. To display the Modem Setup dialog box, choose Communications from the Options menu, and select Modem under Port. Then choose Setup.

You can also display the Modem Setup dialog box by choosing Configure in the Dialing Directory dialog box, after selecting Modem as your communication type.

Dialog Box Options

Modem

Select a modem type from the drop-down list.

Configure Modem

Choose this button to display the Windows 95 Modem Properties dialog box and configure your modem and serial port.

Where to Call

Country Code

Select a country code prefix from the drop-down list.

Area Code

Type the area code for the number you want to dial.

Phone number

Type the telephone number you want to dial.

Use Country Code and Area Code

Clear this check box to ignore the information selected in the Country Code and Area Code fields.

Maximum redials on busy or no answer

Type the maximum number of times you want to automatically redial the number.

Time between redials

Select from the drop-down list the amount of time to wait between redials.

Receive Xoff Point

Specify how much data can accumulate in the receive buffer before sending an Xoff requesting the host to stop sending data. The default is 1024.


LAT Setup dialog box

Use the LAT Setup dialog box to set the parameters for the LAT service.

To display the LAT Setup dialog box, choose Communications from the Options menu, and select LAT under Port. Then choose Setup.

Dialog Box Options

Service name

Select the name of the LAT service you want to use.

The LAT protocol provides the list of services. If you examine this list soon after starting your system, all the services you expect might not appear. This happens because LAT needs a few minutes to learn all of the available services. Wait a few moments, then examine the list again. Your expected service should appear.
If you request connection to a password protected LAT service, another dialog box will prompt you for the password.

Service Info

This area displays a short service information notice describing the Service (or node if you select a node). This information is supplied by the LAT service.

Display nodes in service name list

If this option is selected, LAT Node names and the LAT service names are listed in the service name drop-down list.  Details

Prompt for service during connect

Select to be asked for a host name when connecting. If you enter a host system name under Service name, you do not need to select this option.

Prompt on Disconnect

Select to be asked if you want to reconnect when the connection is lost.


Display Nodes in service name list

If this option is selected, LAT Node names and the LAT service names are listed in the service name drop-down list. The LAT Node names are displayed left justified and terminated with a colon. LAT service names are indented. When a node name is displayed, all the LAT services that node offers are displayed (in alphabetical order ) after the node name. You can connect only to services, not nodes.


Telnet Setup dialog box

Use the Telnet Setup dialog box to set the software parameters for terminal access to hosts using TCP/IP.

To display the Telnet Setup dialog box, choose Communications from the Options menu, and select Telnet. Then choose Setup.

Note  If you use a Telnet or FTP proxy, Host name lookup for the remote host is performed by the proxy. The proxy might use a different Domain Name Server than you would use locally. In order to be sure that Host names are resolved correctly, do not use abbreviated names for hosts outside your local area network.

Dialog Box Options

Host

Enter the name or Internet Address of the host to which you want to connect.  Details

Prompt for host during connect

Select this option if you want to be asked for a host name when attempting a connection. If you enter a host system name under Host, you do not need to select this option.

Prompt on Disconnect

Select this option to be asked if you want to reconnect when the connection is lost.

TCP Type

Specify Windows Sockets. You can use any TCP/IP package that supports the Windows Sockets API V1.1 definition.

Hosts File

Specify a file containing host names to be used in the hosts drop-down list.  Details

Terminal Type

KEA! performs terminal type negotiation according to RFC 1091.  Details

Custom

Enter the custom terminal type KEA! will respond with during negotiation. See the value Custom in the preceding Terminal Type option.

Show Hex Network Data

Display, in hexadecimal, all data sent to or received from the network.  Details

Show Negotiations

Display all Telnet option negotiations for debugging purposes.  Details

Advanced

Display more Telnet options in the Advanced dialog box.

Proxies

Display the Proxies dialog box where you can configure your FTP, Telnet, and SOCKS proxy server options.


Host

Enter the name of the host to which you want to connect. You can enter an Internet Address directly (for example, 100.201.160.3), or you can enter the name of the host if your network software supports either a local hosts file or a name server. If your personal computer network software supports a local hosts file, the host name configured in this local file is displayed in the drop-down list box. Then you can select the host directly.


Hosts File

Specify a file containing host names to be used in the hosts drop-down list. The file is formatted similarly to a standard hosts file with one host name per line. In a real hosts file the address is the first entry on the line and the host name is separated from it with white space (tab or blank(s)), but the address field is not required, only the white space. The names will show in the drop-down list but name resolution is the responsibility of the TCP/IP stack or domain name server. If your TCP/IP stack is set up to use a hosts file, then specify the same one to KEA! unless you want to limit the displayed list.


Terminal Type

KEA! performs terminal type negotiation according to RFC 1091. If the host has not implemented this option, the negotiation may change your terminal type to some unsuitable value. Select from:

All	Default. This lets KEA! offer all the terminal types it emulates, and negotiate with the host for the most suitable type. KEA! Telnet fully supports the latest terminal type RFC (1091). When first asked, it responds with the type of terminal currently set. On subsequent requests, it cycles through the complete list, and restarts after sending the last type twice. The terminal types it responds with are: VT340, DEC-VT340, VT240, DEC-VT240, VT220, DEC-VT220, VT100, DEC-VT100, VT52, DEC-VT52, TEK4014, TEKTRONIX-4014.

Current	Restrict negotiating to only the terminal type selected in the Terminal General dialog box.

Custom	Lets KEA! negotiate a terminal type response applicable to your host, if your Telnet server does not support RFC1091. This option satisfies the host software, but does not affect the emulation.


Tracing

Show Hex Network Data

Display, in hexadecimal, all data sent to or received from the network. This display intrudes on the normal conversation, so it precludes using full-screen applications. This option is useful if you understand the Telnet protocol, or if you need to make a record to report a problem.

Show Negotiations

Display all Telnet option negotiations for debugging purposes. This option is less likely to intrude on full-screen applications than the hex data display, because Telnet usually does not negotiate options during a full-screen application.


(Telnet) Advanced dialog box

Use the Advanced dialog box to set more software parameters for a Telnet port.

To display the Advanced dialog box, choose Advanced in the Telnet Setup dialog box.

Dialog Box Options

Telnet Port

Specify the number of your host's Telnet port. The standard Telnet port is 23, the default value.

Pair CR with

Select how to send a new line signal. Select from:

LF	(Default) Append an LF to the CR

null	Append a NUL to the CR

Also see the option Tie Binary to 8-Bit in this dialog box.

Line Output Mode

Store typed characters until you type a line ending character, then send stored characters in one packet.  Details

Tie Output Mode to

Specify how to control output mode switching.  Details

Send synch with IP

Use a Telnet synch sequence to send signals that interrupt the host.  Details

Initiate Option Negotiation

Try to make the host Telnet match the KEA! Telnet setup when establishing a new connection.  Details

Tie Binary to 8 bit

If selected, attempt to negotiate binary interpretation with the host. The default is cleared.  Details

Local Special Char Processing

Interpret special characters locally, and send them to the Telnet server as Telnet sequences.  Details

Special Characters

Display the Special Characters dialog box.


Line Output Mode

Store typed characters until you type a line ending character, then send stored characters in one packet. Line output mode uses network bandwidth more efficiently than character output mode. It also gives a better response time on a large or slow networks. Normally, line output mode does not work with full-screen programs. However, you can choose line output mode if your system supports it. Character output mode is the default as it works well with every host.

When the Telnet driver uses line output mode, the line you type is echoed. This lets you see what you are typing. If you type an ASCII control character that is treated as data (either a non-special character, or one preceded by the literal next character), it is displayed in a printable format as ^c (c represents the non-control character). If you disable local echo when in line output mode, the remote host echoes the line when it receives it. This displays two copies of the line.


Tie Output Mode to

Specify how to control output mode switching. KEA! Telnet supports the common non-standard ways of switching the Telnet client output mode between character and line on a signal from the host. Only some Telnet servers support this mode. Select from:

None	Let you control output mode switching.

Echo	(Default) Run in character output mode when the host is echoing. Run in line output mode when KEA! Telnet is echoing. You can change the echo setting using the Local Echo option in the Terminal General dialog box.

SGA	Run in character output mode when the host requests Suppress Go Ahead. Run in line output mode when the host does not request Suppress Go Ahead.

Echo/SGA	Run in character output mode only if the host is echoing and requests Suppress Go Ahead. Otherwise, run in line output mode. This mode is compatible with some UNIX Telnet client implementations.


Send synch with IP

Use a Telnet synch sequence to send signals that interrupt the host. You can prevent the sending of synch sequences in case the host does not process them. By default, KEA! Telnet attempts to send synchs. However, KEA! Telnet does not send synch sequences if the TCP package it is running on does not support urgent (out-of-band) data.


Initiate Option Negotiation

Try to make the host Telnet match the KEA! Telnet setup when establishing a new connection. If the host Telnet cannot match its setup, KEA! Telnet changes to the host Telnet setup.

Normally, initiating option negotiation is the client Telnet's responsibility; however, some host Telnets do not let clients do this. This affects the following setup options: data bits (7 or 8, and binary if coupled), and echo (local or remote, and line mode if coupled).

Note:  Do not select this option if you use a Telnet proxy manually (that is, without configuring the proxy in the Proxies dialog box). If you do, KEA! will try to negotiate options with the proxy rather than with the remote host, and this might cause the connection to fail or the Telnet options to be set up incorrectly.


Tie Binary to 8 bit

If selected, attempt to negotiate binary interpretation with the host. The default is cleared.

Normally you can send 8-bit data without negotiating binary interpretation. However, your host or file transfer method might require binary for suppression of Telnet new line translation or full passage of 8-bit data from KEA! to the host.

Negotiating binary leaves the Telnet conversation behavior unspecified because the Telnet binary option does not work unless both ends agree on what binary means, and the Telnet protocol does not specify binary behavior. KEA! Telnet interprets binary as meaning that it can exchange 8-bit data with the host Telnet without new line translation. For example, if a CR is typed, only a CR, not a CR/LF, is sent to the host. However, all character interpretation is still performed. If this corresponds with your host's interpretation of binary, you might want to select this option.


Local Special Char Processing

Interpret special characters locally, and send them to the Telnet server as Telnet sequences. If you do not select this option, special characters are sent to the host and the host can interpret them. Host interpretation is the default unless the Telnet driver is running in line output mode. Local interpretation always occurs in line output mode.


(Telnet) Special Characters dialog box

Use the Special Characters dialog box to configure the special characters for a Telnet port.

To display the Special Characters dialog box, choose Special Characters in the Advanced dialog box.

Dialog Box Options

Local Editing

Define special function characters for line output mode or local processing of special characters.  Details

New Line

Send the Telnet new line sequence, and end the line in line output mode.CR is the default value.

Literal

Treat the character following this one as a normal character, even if normally treated as a special character. ^V is the default.

Erase

Delete the previous character. This line editing character has a destructive effect. DEL, the character the BACKSPACE key uses, is the default.

Erase Word

Delete the last word on the line. This works in line mode only as Telnet does not define an erase word sequence. ^J (LF) is the default.

Erase Line

Delete the entire input line. ^U is the default.

Reprint

Reprint the entire input line. ^R is the default.

Network Signals

Define the characters that send special network control sequences. You can enter values in these fields in the same way you do in the fields under Local Editing.

Synch

Send the Telnet synch sequence. ^A is the default.  Details

Interrupt

Send a Telnet interrupt process sequence. ^C is the default.

BreakExtra

Send a Telnet break sequence. ^Y is the default.

The Break-to-host signal, F5 on most personal computer keyboards, also sends a Telnet Break.

AbortOutput

Send the Telnet abort output sequence. ^O is the default.

AYT

Send the Telnet Are-You-There sequence. Requests that the host Telnet respond if it is still alive. The usual response is a bell or line of output. ^T is the default.


Local Editing

Define special function characters for line output mode or local processing of special characters. If you do not want to define a character for one of these functions, clear the item field. This disables special character recognition.

You can enter the value in various ways. For example, you could set the item Erase Word to linefeed by pressing ^J, the ASCII control character name LF, or the decimal value 013. You also can enter C1 code values in the range 128 through 159 (decimal). You should avoid codes which the terminal uses for special functions.


Synch

Send the Telnet synch sequence. ^A is the default. If you force the sending of a synch with this option, KEA! Telnet sends the synch even if the underlying network support does not send it as urgent data. Some hosts do accept a non-urgent synch.


MSU Serial Port Setup dialog box

Use the MSU Serial Port Setup dialog box to specify the parameters for a KEAlink MSU session.

To display the MSU Serial Port Setup dialog box, choose Communications from the Options menu, and select KEAlink-MSU under Port. Then choose Setup.

By default, KEA! displays COM1 through COM4 in the Port drop-down list box. You can limit the ports to choose from. To limit the number of COM ports displayed, add an option in your Windows Registry.

Note  If you have only one MSU session open, you can change options in the MSU Serial Port Setup dialog box during the session.
If you have two or more MSU sessions open at one time, all MSU sessions use the settings of the first MSU session you started. Although you can change the settings in any of the individual MSU sessions, the changes have no immediate effect. If you save changes to a session when you exit, the new settings will take effect the next time that session is opened, but only if it is the first MSU session.

Dialog Box Options

Port

Select the COM port to use.  Details

Baud Rate

Specify the rate, measured in bits per second, at which the terminal communicates with the host system.  Details

Data Bits

Specify the number of data bits for each character.  Details

Stop Bits

Specify the time interval between each transmitted character. Select from 1, 1.5 or 2.

Parity

Select the type of error checking. If you set Data Bits to 8, specify None. Select from:

none   even   odd   mark   space

Check Parity

Check incoming parity.

Flow Control

Specify how to control the flow of data.  Details

Receive Xoff Point

Specify how much data can accumulate in the receive buffer before sending an Xoff requesting the host to stop sending data.  Details

Modem Disconnect

Select whether to disconnect the session by lowering the DTR signal if no DSR or DCD activity occurs for a specified period of time.  Details

Start Multiple Sessions

Enter a macro command(s) that instructs the host to enable multiple sessions.


Port

Select the COM port to use. The Windows supplied serial communications port driver is used.


Baud Rate

Specify the rate, measured in bits per second, at which the terminal communicates with the host system. The default rate is 9600. Select from:

300   1200   2400   4800   9600   19200   38400   57600   115200


Data Bits

Specify the number of data bits for each character. Use 8 if you set Parity to None, or 7 if you set Parity to a value other than None. The default is 8 data bits.


Flow Control

None	No action taken. This can result in loss of transmitted data.

Xon/Xoff	(Default) Pause when buffer fills, then send signal to remote computer when ready to receive more data. Generally, the best selection for communicating with most host computers.

Hardware	Remote system controls flow of data. Often applicable to situations where the baud rate between your computer and a communications device, such as a modem, differs from the baud rate between the modems. Usually encountered when using modems that use compression and error correction techniques such as V32bis, V42, or V42bis standards.


Receive Xoff Point

Specify how much data can accumulate in the receive buffer before sending an Xoff requesting the host to stop sending data. The default is 2048 (the maximum). You may want to reduce this value if KEA! appears to react slowly to a hold screen, or an interrupt to your host.


Modem Disconnect

Disconnect the session by lowering the DTR signal for about two seconds if no DSR or DCD activity occurs for the specified period. This generally disconnects the session as most modems hang up the line when this happens. However, refer to your modem documentation if you have any questions about this effect. If your modem cannot drop DSR or DCD, or your serial cable does not present the signals to KEA!, it may not recognize the line drop. Choose from:

60 ms   2 sec   Never


NetWare for LAT Setup dialog box

Use the NetWare for LAT Setup dialog box to set parameters for the NetWare for DEC Access service.

To display the NetWare for LAT Setup dialog box, choose Communications from the Options menu, and select NetWare for LAT under Port. Then choose Setup.

Dialog Box Options

Use NetWare login name on primary server

If this option is selected, a user ID is automatically selected to login to the NetWare for DEC Access server.  Details

Userid

Enter the User ID to connect to the NetWare for DEC Access server.

Password

Enter the Password to login to the NetWare for DEC Access server. Leave blank if no password is required.

NetWare Server

Select the server you want to use as your LAT gateway.  Details

Port Pool

If the LAT Server has been configured to use port pools, enter the appropriate port pool name.  Details

Service Name

Select the service you want to connect to.  Details

Display Nodes in service name list

If this option is selected, LAT Node names and the LAT service names will be listed in the service name drop-down list.  Details

Prompt for service during Connect

Select this option if you want to be asked for a host name when attempting a connection. If you enter a host system name under Service Name, you do not need to select this option.  Details

Prompt on Disconnect

If this option is selected, you will be asked if you want to reconnect when the connection is lost.

Service Info

This area will display a short service information notice describing the Service (or node if you select a node). This information is supplied by the LAT service.


Use NetWare login name on primary server

If this option is selected, (as it is by default), a user ID is automatically selected to login to the NetWare for DEC Access Server. If a password is needed for this user ID, you will be prompted for one.

The default user ID selected is your current user ID. This is normally the same as your NetWare user ID.


NetWare Server

This drop-down list contains the names of the currently available communications servers on your network. Select the server you want to use as your LAT gateway. The first item in the list is the default.


Port Pool

If the LAT Server has been configured to use port pools (see your NetWare systems administrator), enter the appropriate port pool name. If Port Pools are not used, leave this field blank.


Service Name

After the LAT Server has been selected, the LAT services that are offered through that server are displayed in the Service Name drop-down list. Select the service to which you want to connect.


Display Nodes in service name list

If this option is selected, LAT Node names and the LAT service names are listed in the service name drop-down list. The LAT Node names are displayed left justified and terminated with a colon. LAT service names are indented. When a node name is displayed, all the LAT services that node offers are displayed (in alphabetical order ) after the node name. You can connect only to services, not nodes.


Prompt for service during connect

Select to be asked for a host name when attempting a connection. If you enter a host system name under Service Name, you do not need to select this option. If the Display Nodes in service name list option is selected, the dialog box shown by this option displays services in the form "node:service".


History command (Options menu)

The History command on the Options menu displays the History dialog box. The options in this dialog box let you specify the values for History buffer operations. You can specify a maximum size for the History buffer, whether to store data that scrolls off the screen, and whether to save the current session history in a file.

If you want to retain History from the current session to use in a future session, select Retain History and specify a filename in which to store the history information. When you start the session again, existing history is restored to the History buffer.

Dialog Box Options

Enable History

Activates History and stores information no longer displayed on the screen in the History buffer. This option performs the same function as the Enable History command on the Connection menu.

Retain History

Retains data stored in the History buffer when you exit. If you retain the history, it is available the next time you run KEA!. If you select this option, you must specify the file where history is to be saved.

Include Scrolling Region Data

Store data scrolled off or cleared from a scrolling region in the History buffer. If this option is not set, only store data scrolled from the top line of the page.

Maximum Size

Maximum size of the History buffer. You can limit the amount of history kept by setting this option to something other than Unlimited. Select from:

Unlimited	16K	32K	64K

128K	256K	512K	1024K

File Name

Filename for History buffer file. Although you can store the history in memory without specifying a filename, you cannot retain the history on disk until you specify a filename.

Browse

Search your disk for an existing history filename, and display it in the File Name box. This option displays a Windows dialog box listing all files with the default file type HIS.


Settings command (Options menu)

The Settings command on the Options menu displays the General Settings dialog box. If you have made changes in KEA!'s configuration, this dialog box controls whether changes are automatically saved in the current configuration file when you exit.

When you open a previously saved session, the exit options in its General Settings dialog box override the exit options of all other currently running sessions. In other words, the exit options of the most recently started session become global to all currently running sessions. If Yes is selected under Save Changes On Exit and you later choose Exit All, the exit options of the most recently opened session are saved for all sessions that were running.

Dialog Box Options

Save Changes on Exit

Choose whether configuration changes you have made will be saved when you exit.

Yes	Changes are always saved.

No	Changes are not saved.

Prompt	If you have changed the configuration, the Exit dialog box appears when you exit, asking if you want to save the changes.

Save Layout on Exit All

If this box is selected, save the current layout whenever you exit using the Exit All command on the File menu, and you have made changes to the layout.

Prompt on Exit All

Controls whether the Exit dialog box is displayed whenever you exit using the Exit All command on the File menu.

Yes	Always show it.

No	Do not show the Exit dialog box (unless the option Save Changes on Exit is set to Prompt).

If Connected	Show the Exit dialog box if one or more sessions are still connected.

Old KEAterm Menus

This option changes the organization of KEA! menus and commands to the older, pre-Version 4 style.

Note  If you select Old KEAterm Menus, and then want to restore the newer menu style, choose General from the Configure menu.


SmartPad command (Options menu)

The SmartPad command on the Options menu displays the SmartPad dialog box. Use the options in this box to define the layout and contents of a custom SmartPad. You can display the SmartPad in a separate window, or on the status bar.

You can display a VT keyboard layout along with the SmartPad dialog box by choosing Keyboard. You can click the keys on the keyboard layout. When you type information under Value, you can use the on-screen keyboard for including keys with special line-editing functions such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on, or keys you cannot access on your keyboard, or VT functions or combinations.

To switch to the on-screen keyboard, click your mouse in the keyboard window; to switch back to the SmartPad dialog box, click in that window.

Note  If you do not have a mouse, use the Keyboard button to switch to the on-screen Keyboard. Then, use the ARROW keys to highlight the key you want, and select that key by pressing the SPACEBAR. Press ENTER to switch back to the SmartPad dialog box.

Dialog Box Options

Caption

Type the characters you want to appear on the face of the button. If you want to use the keyboard to choose the button, place an ampersand (&) in front of the character you want to use. Details

Map To

Select the type of action you want the button to perform. Details

Value

Type a value for the Map To action. Details

List of Buttons

A display area that lists the currently assigned buttons in the order in which they appear on the SmartPad.

View Buttons

Display buttons on the SmartPad. Equivalent to the Show SmartPad command on the Options menu.

Buttons on Status Bar

Display one row of the SmartPad on the status bar, instead of displaying all the rows in a separate window.

Order by Row

Arrange the buttons in rows according to their order in the List of Buttons area.

Rows

Type the number of rows you want on your SmartPad. This option is not available if you selected Buttons on Status Bar.

Columns

Type the number of buttons in a row.

Button Width (in characters)

Type the size in number of characters for each button.

Up, Down

Move up or down the definitions in the List of Buttons area.

Move Up, Move Down

Change the placement of the buttons on the SmartPad by moving the selected button upward or downward in the list.

Insert

Insert a new button at the selected position.

Delete

Delete the selected button.

DeleteAll

Delete all button assignments.

Keyboard

Display the on-screen VT keyboard , or switches focus to the on-screen keyboard if it is already displayed. Alternatively, you can click in the keyboard window to switch focus to the on-screen keyboard..


Caption

Type the characters you want to appear on the face of the button. If you want to use the keyboard to choose the button, place an ampersand (&) in front of the character you want to use. This character appears underlined on the face of the button. You can underline either uppercase or lowercase characters. You can choose the button by holding down the SHIFT and ALT keys as you press the key corresponding to the underlined character.


Map To

Select the type of action you want the button to perform. Select from:

Nothing	Performs no action.

Sequence	Executes the sequence of characters and VT functions you type in the Value field.

Macro	Executes the macro statements you type in the Value field.

Label of Group	Marks a group of buttons. The name you enter is not displayed in the Caption field on the SmartPad. It is only used to signal the beginning of a named group of buttons.

Next Group	Displays the next group of buttons on the SmartPad.

Prev Group	Displays the previous group of buttons on the SmartPad.

Goto Group	Displays the group of buttons whose label you type in the Value field.


Value

Type a value for the Map To action. You can type up to 255 characters.

For Map To action	Type

Sequence	characters and VT function keys (or select keys from the on-screen VT keyboard) to send to the host.

Macro	macro filename to execute or the actual macro statements. You can put several macro statements on the same line. Note: a macro filename that starts with a number will not execute if you simply type its name in this field. Instead, use the Run function. For example, to execute the macro file 123NAME.KTM, type Run("123NAME").

Goto Group	label for the group of buttons to display when this button is selected.


Keyboard command (Options menu)

The Keyboard command on the Options menu displays the Keyboard Mapping dialog box.

Use this dialog box to assign strings of characters and VT functions, or KEA! macros or macro statements, to personal computer keys. This lets you rearrange the mapping of personal computer keyboard keys to VT functions.

KEA! also displays the on-screen VT keyboard when you select the Keyboard button in the Keyboard Mapping dialog box. You can use your mouse to click the keys on this keyboard. When you type information under Value, you can use the on-screen keyboard for including keys with special line-editing functions such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on, or keys you cannot access on your keyboard, or VT functions or combinations.

To switch to the on-screen keyboard, click your mouse in the keyboard window; to switch back to the Keyboard Mapping dialog box, click in that window.

Note  If you do not have a mouse, use the Keyboard button to switch to the on-screen Keyboard. Then, use the ARROW keys to highlight the key you want, and select that key by pressing the SPACEBAR. Press ENTER to switch back to the Keyboard Mapping dialog box.

Dialog Box Options

PC Key

Press the key or key combination to which you want to assign a sequence or macro. You can press the key with SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, and combinations of these. The name of the key combination is displayed in this field.

On a PowerStation keyboard, you cannot map F20.

Map To

Select what you want the key or combination to send when you press it. Select one of the following from the drop-down list:

Nothing	Send nothing. (This is not the same as resetting the key combination to its default VT function. See Delete, following.)

Sequence	Send the sequence of characters and VT functions entered in the Value field.

Macro	Send the macro statements entered in the Value field.

Value

Enter the value you want to assign to this key. You can enter up to 256 characters. Depending on the Map To selection, type one of the following:

Sequence	Enter the sequence to send including characters, VT function keys, and keys from the on-screen VT keyboard.

Macro	Type a macro filename to execute or the actual macro statements. You can put several macro statements on the same line. Note: a macro filename which starts with a number will not execute if you simply type its name in this field. Instead, use the Run function. For example, to execute the macro file 123NAME.KTM, type Run("123NAME").

Mapped Keys

This list box shows all the PC key combinations that you mapped to something other than their default VT functions. You can select a key combination from this box if you want to change or delete it.

Delete

This button resets the PC key combination highlighted in the Mapped Keys box to its default VT function.

DeleteAll

This button resets all the PC key combinations shown in the Mapped Keys box to their default VT functions.

Keyboard

This button displays the on-screen VT keyboard, if not displayed already, or switches you to the keyboard. If you have a mouse, just click in the keyboard window to switch to the on-screen keyboard.


Menus command (Options menu)

The Menus command on the Options menu displays the Menus dialog box. The options in this box let you customize the KEA! menus by adding and removing commands.

If your menu command is to perform a sequence, you can display a VT keyboard layout along with the Menus dialog box by choosing Keyboard. You can click the keys on the keyboard layout. When you enter information in the Value field, you can use the on-screen keyboard for including keys with special line-editing functions, such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on; or keys you cannot access on your keyboard; or VT functions or combinations.

To switch to the on-screen keyboard, click your mouse in the keyboard window; to switch back to the Menus dialog box, click in that window.

Note  If you do not have a mouse, use the Keyboard button to switch to the on-screen Keyboard. Then, use the ARROW keys to highlight the key you want, and select that key by pressing the SPACEBAR. Press ENTER to switch back to the Menus dialog box.

Dialog Box Options

Caption

Type the name of the item as you want it to appear on the menu. If you want to use a keyboard hotkey to choose this item, place an ampersand (&) in front of the character you want to use. This character appears underlined on the menu. You can underline either uppercase or lowercase characters. You can then choose the menu item by holding down the ALT key as you press the key corresponding to the underlined character.

Map To

Select the type of action you want the menu item to perform. Select from:

Menu	Displays a cascading menu.

Sequence	Transmits the sequence of characters and VT functions you type in the Value field.

Macro	Executes the macro statements you type in the Value field.

Separator	Places a line on the menu to separate sections of the menu.

Value

The value for the Map To action. You can type up to 256 characters.

For Sequence, type the characters, VT function keys, and keys from the on-screen VT keyboard you want the menu command to send to the host.

For Macro, type a macro filename to execute or the actual macro statements. You can put several macro statements on the same line.

Check

Place a checkmark beside the menu item when it is selected. You cannot place checkmarks beside Menu bar commands or standard menu commands.

Dim

Dim the item when it is not available. You cannot dim standard menu commands.

Hide

Do not display the menu item on the menu. Hiding a command does not delete it. A special flag is set, indicating not to display the command on the menu. Hiding a Menu bar command also hides the contents of the menu.

Menu Contents

List of all KEA! menu commands.

Up, Down

Move up or down the definitions in the Menu Contents box.

Insert

Insert a new menu item above the selected position.

Insert Menu

Insert a new menu above the selected position.

Delete

Delete the selected menu or item.

Reset All

Restore original menus.

Keyboard

Display the on-screen VT keyboard to program a menu command mapped to a sequence.


Mouse command (Options menu)

Use this dialog box to change default mouse functions and assign characters and VT functions or macros to mouse buttons.

To display the Mouse dialog box, choose Mouse from the Options menu.

Dialog Box Options

Action

Selects the action to which you want to assign a sequence or macro. There are three actions for each mouse button: Left, Middle, and Right. Choose from the following (nine actions in total):

Button Up

Button Down

Double-Click

Map To

In this list box, select what you want to send when the event shown in Action occurs.

Default Action	Mouse buttons perform normal selection. If one action of a button is set to Default Action, all actions for that button are set to Default Action. If you change the Map To value from Default Action to something else, the other two actions for that button will change to Nothing (because it is meaningless to perform only part of a default action).

Nothing	The action sends nothing at all.

Sequence	The action sends the sequence of characters and VT functions in the Value box.

Macro	The action executes the macro statements in the Value box.

Value

Enter the value you want to map to this action (255 characters maximum). Depending on the Map To option, type:

•	A sequence to be sent, including characters, VT function keys, and "keys" from the on-screen VT keyboard, or

•	The name of the macro file to execute, or the actual macro statements. You can put several macro statements on the same line.

Delete

This button resets all actions for the highlighted button in the Action list to their default actions.

DeleteAll

Resets all actions to default.

Keyboard

Displays the on screen VT keyboard for use in mapping.


Show Toolbar command (Options menu)

The Show Toolbar command on the Options menu displays the Toolbar at the top of the application window.


Show SmartPad command (Options menu)

The Show SmartPad command on the Options menu displays your SmartPad in a separate window on the desktop, or on the status bar.

If you choose this command before defining buttons, blank buttons are displayed.


Show Keyboard command (Options menu)

The Show Keyboard command displays an image of a VT keyboard on your Windows desktop. You can use your mouse to click the keys. The keys you click are sent to the host just as if you pressed the actual keys on your regular keyboard.

You can also use the VT Keyboard button on the toolbar.

  VT Keyboard button

The key labels can appear in French or German, according to the National Character Set you select in the Terminal General dialog box (Options Terminal menu).

When you want to remove the on-screen VT keyboard, choose the Show Keyboard command from the Options menu to clear the checkmark, or choose Close from the VT Keyboard Control menu (top left corner).


Connect command (Connection menu)

The Connect command on the Connection menu connects KEA! to the communications port you configured. This command is only available when KEA! is not already connected. You also can use the Connect button on the Status Bar.


Disconnect command (Connection menu)

The Disconnect command on the Connection menu disconnects KEA! from the current communications port. It also requests the modem to drop the telephone connection. A disconnect is always automatically performed when you exit.


Restore Sessions command (Connection menu)

The Restore Sessions command on the Connection menu restores KEAlink MSU sessions that were accidentally interrupted.

When sessions are interrupted by a power failure or similar problem, KEA! or the host may lose the context of the current session. After communication is regained, you can use this command to restore the context of interrupted sessions without cancelling the sessions and starting over again.

This command appears on the Connection menu only when you select KEAlink-MSU under Port in the Communications dialog box.


Auto Connect command (Connection menu)

Choose the Auto Connect command on the Connection menu to connect to the configured port when you start KEA!, or when you change the port type or network address.

When you change your network service or port, KEA! disconnects, then reconnects to the new selection.

If you do not have Auto Connect selected, you must use the Connect command to make a network connection to the configured port.


Phone command (Connection menu)

The Phone command on the Connection menu displays the Dialing Directory dialog box. The options in this dialog box let you create and maintain your personal dialing directory. When you choose Dial, KEA! uses your modem to dial the number associated with the selected item.

Note  This command runs the macro PHONEDIR.KTM which in turn calls DIALER.KTM.

Dialog Box Options

Directory

A drop-down box containing a list of available phone directories. The name of the current phone directory appears in the text field of the drop-down box. Phone directories are files with KTP extensions in the current DOS directory that store groups of Directory Listings. When you choose the entry [New Directory], you are asked to supply the name of a new directory.

Modem Config...

Displays the Modem Configuration dialog box so you can define how KEA! talks to the modem, how to dial long distance and local calls, and so forth. If Modem has been selected as the Communication Type, displays the Modem Setup dialog box.

Directory Listing

Shows all entries contained in the current phone directory.

Dial

Dials the selected phone entry.

New...

Displays the Dial Entry dialog box to add a new number to the dialing directory. Parameters can be set to override the default port settings and the terminal type.

Edit...

Displays the Dial Entry dialog box to edit the selected phone directory entry.

Delete

Deletes the selected entry.

Save

Saves all entries in the current phone directory.

Exit

Exits the Dialing Directory dialog box and returns to the emulation window.


Modem Configuration dialog box

Use the Modem Configuration dialog box to set the parameters for dialing numbers on your modem. To display this dialog box, choose Phone from the Connection menu, then choose the Modem Config button.

Dialog Box Options

Redial Configuration

Phone numbers can be redialed based on the following parameters.

Redial

How many times to redial a number before giving up.

Wait

How long to wait for a connection before hanging up the modem.

Pause

How long to wait between redials.

Modem Configuration

The following are commands used to communicate with the modem.

Reset string

How the modem is reset to its defaults.

Initialization string

Any special initialization settings that are not handled by the reset string.

Dialing prefix

The string needed to start dialing a modem.

Dialing suffix

A string that should be sent to the modem after it has dialed a number.

Communications

Shows the currently selected communications port.

Configure...

Displays the Setup dialog box for the selected communications port.

Access

There are two groups, one for local and one for long-distance dialing.

Dialing prefix

String to send to the modem before the phone number. This is often a code to get an outside line (for example 9,,).

Dialing suffix

String to send after the phone number. This is often an access code to the host system or a long-distance calling card number.


Dial Entry dialog box

Use the Dial Entry dialog box to add or edit directory listings in your Phone directory. To display this dialog box, choose Phone from the Connection menu, then choose the New button or select an entry and choose the Edit button.

Dialog Box Options

Name

Name to appear in the phone directory list.

Number

Number to dial.

Long Distance

Whether to use Local or Long Distance dialing prefix/suffix as defined in the Modem Configuration dialog box.

AutoScript

The name of a macro which will be called before dialing starts.

Initialization string

Special modem initialization commands. If you put a string in this text box, it will be used instead of the initialization string from the Modem Configuration dialog box.

Terminal

Which terminal mode to use when connecting to a host. To use the value from the Terminal General dialog box, select Default.

Baud

The speed at which KEA! talks to the modem. The Default setting uses the baud rate from the port's setup dialog box.

Data bits

The number of data bits in a character.

Stop bits

The number of stop bits used to terminate the character.

Parity

Method of parity checking to use in data verification.


Local command (Connection menu)

The Local command on the Connection menu sets an operating mode in which KEA! sends data you enter from the keyboard to the screen, but not to the host. In this mode, data received from the host is buffered until you return the terminal to the on-line state by removing the check mark next to Local on the Connection menu.


Clear command (Connection menu)

The Clear command on the Connection menu clears the screen and resets all character attributes and line attributes to normal.


Clear Comm command (Connection menu)

The Clear Comm command on the Connection menu empties the communications buffers, and clears any outstanding conditions that could prevent transmitting or receiving data. It also cancels any escape sequence processing. This command is useful for correcting the effect of a communication line problem.


Reset command (Connection menu)

The Reset command on the Connection menu returns the display to its power-up state. This affects ANSI states only, not communications, screen, character set modes, UDKs, or terminal type.


Enable History command (Connection menu)

The Enable History command on the Connection menu activates History, and stores information in the History buffer. History stores data no longer displayed in the emulation window.

This command performs the same function as the Enable History option in the History dialog box (Options menu).


Clear History command (Connection menu)

The Clear History command on the Connection menu removes all information from the History buffer.


Record command (Macro menu)

The Record command on the Macro menu displays the Record dialog box, in which you supply the name of the macro file you want to create. When you choose OK, your following exchange with the host is recorded in this file as a macro program.

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type a macro filename.

List Files of Type

Select the filename extension for the file you want to create in the File Name list. The default file extension is .KTM.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory in which to create the macro file.


...Recording commands (Macro menu)

When the record feature is enabled, additional commands appear on the Macro menu. These let you pause, continue, end, or cancel the recording.


Insert command (Macro menu)

When the record feature is enabled, the Insert command appears on the Macro menu. It offers two dialog boxes that let you insert a delay, or insert a user prompt into the macro being recorded.

Insert Wait command

Lets you insert a Wait function into the recorded macro. In the dialog box, enter a value for the wait in tenths of a second.

Insert Prompt command

Lets you insert an Input function into the recorded macro, using the values you enter in this dialog box as arguments. When the macro is run, this will be presented to the user as a prompt for text. In the dialog box, enter the prompt message and a default response.

Hide user input

If this option is checked, the user's response is not displayed. This is typically used to enter a password.

Prompt message

Type the prompt message you want to present to the user.

Default response

If you type in this box, the text will be presented as the default response.

Add CR to response

If this option is checked, a return character is sent to the host at the end of the user's response. In most cases, this option is required. Without this option, when the user presses ENTER, it only exits the Prompt dialog box; no line terminator is sent to the host.

So that you can continue recording the actual exchange with the host, the Input function is immediately executed. KEA! displays the prompt you have just defined. Enter the appropriate response next to your prompt and choose OK.


Stop command (Macro menu)

The Stop command on the Macro menu terminates suspended macros. Macros become suspended when they execute a Suspend function. If no macros are suspended, the command is unavailable.

In general, you can cancel a running macro with the Cancel button on the Toolbar. However, if a macro is suspended, you must use the Stop command on the Macro menu.


Run command (Macro menu)

The Run command on the Macro menu displays the Run dialog box. The options in this box let you specify the macro you want to run. You also can change the drive and directory in which to search for the macro, and the filename extension for files displayed in the File Name list.

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type a macro filename, or select a name from the list.

List Files of Type

Select the filename extension for the files you want to appear in the File Name list. The default is .KTM. Encoded files are listed with a .KTE extension.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory to search for the macro file.


Edit command (Macro menu)

The Edit command on the Macro menu starts KEA! Edit, and displays the Open File dialog box. The options in this box let you specify the macro you want to edit or create. You also can change the drive and directory in which to search for an existing macro, and the filename extension for files displayed in the File Name list.

You use KEA! Edit to create, edit, and debug macro files.

Dialog Box Options

File Name

Type or select the name of the macro file you want to create or edit.

List Files of Type

Select the filename extension for the files you want to display in the File Name list. The default is .KTM.

Drives and Directories

Select the drive and directory to search for the macro file.


Options command (Macro menu)

The Options command on the Macro menu displays the Macro Options dialog box. The options in this box let you choose the macro file you want to execute whenever it starts. You also can prevent the host from executing macros in KEA!.

Dialog Box Options

Lock Remote Macros

Do not execute remote macros. If KEA! receives the control sequence

DCS 4.z datastring ST

where datastring is a string of macro instructions up to 8K long, it executes these macro instructions. This gives the host a high degree of control over KEA!'s operation. Selecting this option will block these host requested functions.

Note  The host also can invoke a macro by sending the control sequence CSI 4;nn.z that executes the macro file REMOTEnn.KTM. You cannot turn off this feature.

Search Path

Specify a search path to the directories where macros can be found. The path you enter is saved in the Windows Registry database and used in subsequent sessions. You enter the search path using the DOS path statement format, a list of paths separated by semicolons.

KEA! searches for macros in the following order:

(1) The Parent directory (the directory that contains the configuration file.) If KEA! does not have a configuration file loaded, the Parent directory is the working directory. When a macro runs, the directory where it is stored becomes the Parent directory.

(2) The path specified in the Search Path option in the Macro Options dialog box.

(3) The standard Windows directories.

Startup

Type the filename of the macro you want run whenever KEA! starts. Three predefined variables are available to the startup macro you write. HotlinkStart is true if KEA! was started by a hotlink from another application. LinkHostname, valid if HotlinkStart is true, is the name of the host KEA! should connect to. NewSession is true if KEA! was started with the  /n option on the command line which forces KEA! on starting to display the New Session dialog box, ignoring any previously-created sessions.

Browse

Find a filename to put in the Startup field. Displays the Browse dialog box from which you can select the extension for files displayed in the File Name list, and change the drive and directory to search for those files.


Next Session command (Window menu)

The Next Session command on the Window menu switches to the next application window from the list at the bottom of the Window menu.


Open Layout command (Window menu)

The Open Layout command on the Window menu (and on the Control menu) starts all application windows in the specified layout file, and connects to individual hosts.

If a session described in the layout file is already running (as identified by its host connection) that session is not re-started, its window is only moved on the desktop to the position it held in the saved layout. Any existing sessions that are not part of the layout file are not changed.

Dialog Box Options

Existing Layouts

Select a layout file from the list.


Save Layout command (Window menu)

The Save Layout command on the Window menu (and on the Control menu) displays the Save Layout dialog box. The options in this dialog box let you specify a name for the layout file.

You also can create an icon and program group for the layout file. Choosing that icon starts all the application windows saved in the layout and connects to the respective hosts.

Dialog Box Options

Name

Type a layout name in which the current layout will be saved, or select one from the Existing Layouts list. The default is the current layout, if a layout was previously saved.

Existing Layouts

Shows previously saved layouts.

Create Icon

Create a new icon in the currently active group, or any specified group.The name of the layout file is assigned to the icon.

Program Group

Specify the group in which you want to put the icon. The currently active group is the default. You can use this option only if you select Create Icon.

Save

Save the current layout in the layout file that appears in Name.

Delete

Delete the layout file in the Name box.


list of sessions (Window menu)

The list of sessions at the bottom of the Window menu shows all the currently running KEA! sessions. The names given are the names that appear in the title bar of each window. To switch to any of these windows, select its name on this list.


Contents command (Help menu)

The Contents command on the Help menu starts online Help, and displays the main Help screen.

You can also display the contents of online Help by clicking the Help Contents button on the toolbar.

  Help Contents button


How to Use Help command (Help menu)

The How to Use Help command on the Help menu displays a list of topics on using Help. These topics include an introduction to using Help, and specific information on how to do things in Help, such as copying to the clipboard.


Keyboard Map command (Help menu)

The Keyboard Map command on the Help menu displays a list of Keyboard topics. These topics include detailed keyboard layout diagrams for the PowerStation, Enhanced, LK250, and LK450 keyboards.


About KEA! command (Help menu)
About command (Help menu)

The About command on the Help menu displays the KEA! product name, version number, serial number, and licensing information. If you choose the More button, you can obtain the following additional information. The Copy button places that information (or just the selected portion) into the Clipboard.

•	U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

•	Windows Environment


Restore command (Control menu)

The Restore command on the Control menu restores the application window to its former size after you have enlarged it (by using the Maximize command) or reduced it to an icon (by using the Minimize command).


Move command (Control menu)

The Move command on the Control menu lets you use the keyboard to move the KEA! window to another position.


Size command (Control menu)

The Size command on the Control menu lets you use the keyboard to change the size of the KEA! window.


Minimize command (Control menu)

The Minimize command on the Control menu reduces the application window to an icon, and displays the icon on your desktop. You also can minimize the application window with the minimize button in the top right corner of the window.

When minimized, KEA! continues running. If KEA!, or a macro, requires interaction with you, it displays a message or dialog box. To redisplay the application window, double-click the icon.

You can also minimize KEA! during a file transfer, with the minimize button on the file transfer Shuttle, Transmit, or Receive dialog box.


Maximize command (Control menu)

The Maximize command on the Control menu changes the size of the application window to display as much of the full VT screen as your physical screen allows using the current font size. You also can maximize the application window with the maximize button in the top right corner of the window, or by double-clicking in the Title bar. If you set Font Width to Auto, the Maximize command makes the application window the full size of the display screen.


Close command (Control menu)

The Close command on the Control menu exits the active KEA! session. If you made changes to your configuration, you may be prompted to save the configuration. This depends on your selection for the option Save Changes on Exit in the General Settings dialog box (Options menu).


Show Menu Bar command (Control menu)

The Show Menu Bar command on the Control menu displays the Menu bar. If you clear the check mark from this item, a Menu bar is not displayed.


Definition of PRODNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of SHORTNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of EDITNAME bookmark:KEA! Edit


Attachmate PowerStation Keyboard

The PowerStation keyboard is Attachmate's VT200/300 layout keyboard for the personal computer. With DOS and Windows, the PowerStation functions as an Enhanced keyboard; with KEA!, each key is positioned exactly as a real VT terminal. The PowerStation keyboard clearly marks both VT and personal computer functions on the keys for easy use with KEA!, ZSTEM, and other personal computer programs. WPS gold key labeling is optional.

Using KEA!, the layout of your keyboard is a nearly perfect match to a VT keyboard. You can enter multinational characters using DIGITAL compose sequences.

Using the PowerStation keyboard with Windows 95 or Windows NT, you will notice the following restrictions:

•	To generate a VT PF4 sequence, press CTRL+MINUS on the numeric keypad, not the PF4 key.

•	The PRINTSCREEN key at the top left of the keyboard and the key marked PF4 both produce the Windows copy-to-Clipboard function, whether or not the KEA! window is active. If you want a VT420 print function, you must use the Print command on the File menu.

•	The key marked ESC at the top left of the keyboard generates a VT PF1 sequence.

•	You must select PowerStation in the Layout option (Keyboard dialog box, Options Terminal menu).

•	The F1 Key, F2 Key, F3 Key, and F4 Key fields in the Keyboard dialog box do not affect the HOLDSCREEN, PRINTSCREEN, (RIGHT)ALT, and ESC keys.

•	If you are using serial hardware flow control, the HOLDSCREEN key does not do hold-screen; instead it sends XOFF and XON to the host.

•	PowerStation keyboards with National keycaps, other than North American, may have some keys marked with both black and blue legends. The character shown in blue are the ones KEA! and all other Windows applications generate.

Indicators

KEA! displays the Hold Screen status on the Toolbar. You should use this Holdscreen button as the Hold Screen indicator, ignoring the keyboard indicator marked Hold Screen.

The PowerStation has an indicator labeled Compose (in black) and NumLock (in blue). When you run KEA!, this indicator is unlit, and does not toggle when you press PF2 (NUMLOCK) or COMPOSE. When you run other Windows applications, the application controls this indicator; it usually toggles when you press NUMLOCK.

When you run KEA!, the indicator labeled ScrollLock is unlit, and does not toggle when you press PF3 (SCRLLOCK). When you run other Windows applications, the application controls this indicator; it usually toggles when you press SCRLLOCK.


IBM Enhanced Keyboard

Using KEA!, the layout of your IBM Enhanced keyboard is as close as possible to a DIGITAL VT. Most keys are where you expect to find them. You can enter multinational characters using DIGITAL compose sequences.


DIGITAL LK250 Keyboard

Using KEA!, the layout of your DIGITAL LK250, LK450, or LK411/412 keyboard is a nearly perfect match to a VT keyboard. You can enter multinational characters using DIGITAL compose sequences.

However, when using the LK250, LK450, or LK411/412 keyboard with Windows 95 or Windows NT, you might notice that the function keys greater than F10 do not function reliably. For example, on an LK250 keyboard, F20 incorrectly sends the PF4 control sequence. This is because of the limitations of Windows' interpretation of LK250 and LK450 keypresses.

Indicators

With the LK250 keyboard, when you run KEA!, the indicator labeled NumLock is unlit, and does not toggle when you press PF2 (NUMLOCK). When you run other Windows applications, the application controls this indicator; it usually toggles when you press PF2(NUMLOCK).

The LK250 uses the Wait/Hold indicator as a Scroll Lock indicator. When you run KEA!, this indicator is unlit, and does not toggle when you press PF3 (SCROLL LOCK). When you run other Windows applications, the indicator usually toggles when you press PF3 (SCROLL LOCK).


DIGITAL LK450 Keyboard

Using KEA!, the layout of your DIGITAL LK450 or LK411/412 keyboard is a nearly perfect match to a VT keyboard. You can enter multinational characters using DIGITAL compose sequences.

However, when using the LK450 or LK411/412 keyboard with Windows 95 or Windows NT, you might notice that the function keys greater than F10 do not function reliably. This is because of the limitations of Windows' interpretation of LK450 keypresses.


Composing Characters

Compose is a VT feature that lets you enter more international characters than those marked on your keyboard. A compose sequence combines two or three keystrokes to form one character. KEA! provides compose functions similar to a real VT terminal.

Note  If you try to compose a character that is not in the currently selected character set (Options menu, Terminal General dialog box), that character is ignored.

To compose a character using a three stroke sequence

1	Press then release the key(s) on your main keyboard that perform the Compose function.

On this keyboard	Press then release

PowerStation	CTRL+COMPOSE (COMPOSE alone generates Alt.)

Digital LK250/LK450	COMPOSE

Enhanced	CTRL+ALT (You must press the ALT key on the left side.)

2	Press the characters specified in the Table of International Characters, or Table of Special Characters, to produce the desired character.

To cancel a compose sequence

Press BACKSPACE.


Table of International Compose Characters
Table of "International" Compose Characters

The following table shows international characters you can Compose in uppercase and lowercase. For uppercase characters, hold down SHIFT as you press the other keys. Except where "in order" is noted, the order in which you press the keys does not matter.

To produce	Press	To produce	Press

À	à	a  `	Ñ	ñ	n  ~
Á	á	a  '	Ò	ò	o  `
Â	â	a  ^	Ó	ó	o  '
Ã	ã	a  ~	Ô	ô	o  ^
Å	å	a  *	Õ	õ	o  ~
Ä	ä	a  "	Ö	ö	o  "
Æ	æ	a  e   (in order)	Ø	ø	o  /
Ç	ç	c  ,	Ù	ù	u  `
È	è	e  `	Ú	ú	u  '
É	é	e  '	Û	û	u  ^
Ê	ê	e  ^	Ü	ü	u  "
Ë	ë	e  "		ÿ	y  "
Ì	ì	I  `	Ý	ý	y  '
Í	í	I  '		ß	s  s
Î	î	I  ^	Þ	þ	t  h  (in order)
Ï	ï	I  "	Ð	ð	d  -
Note  If you try to compose a character that is not in the currently selected character set (Options menu, Terminal General dialog box), that character is ignored.


Table of Special Compose Characters
Table of "Special" Compose Characters

The following table shows other special characters you can Compose. Except where "in order" is noted, the order in which you press the keys does not matter.

To produce	Press	To produce	Press

#	number	+  +	£	pound	L  - or L  =
@	at	A  A	¥	yen	Y  - or Y  =
®	registered	R  O	±	plus or minus	+  -
©	copyright	C  O	÷	division	-  :
[	opening bracket	(  (	×	multiplication	X  X
]	closing bracket	)  )	¼	fraction	1  4 (in order)
{	opening brace	(  -	½	fraction	1  2 (in order)
}	closing brace	)  -	¾	fraction	3  4 (in order)
"	opening angle	<  <	¹	superscript	1  ^
"	closing angle	>  >	²	superscript	2  ^
\	backslash	/  / or <	³	superscript	3  ^
|	vertical bar	/  ^	°	degree	0  ^
¦	broken bar	|  |	¤	currency	X  O or X  0
¦	broken bar	!  ^	·	middle dot	.  ^
"	quotation	"  sp	µ	micro	/  U
'	apostrophe	'  sp	¯	macron	_  ^
­	soft hyphen	-  -	¯	macron	-  ^
	no-break space	sp  sp	¬	logical not	-  ,
^	circumflex	^  sp	¶	paragraph	P  !
`	grave	`  sp	¡	inverted !	!  !
´	acute	'  '	¿	inverted ?	?  ?
~	tilde	~  sp	§	section	S  O or S  0 or S  !
¨	diaeresis	"  "	¸	cedilla	,  ,
ª	feminine ordinal	A  _	º	masculine ordinal	O  _
¢	cent	C  / or C  |
Note  If you try to compose a character that is not in the currently selected character set (Options menu, Terminal General dialog box), that character is ignored.


User-defined Keys

The VT user-defined keys (UDKs) let you store and recall text and commands that you use often with applications. You can define the function of 15 of the top row keys on the keyboard using the UDKs dialog box. You use these keys as SHIFT+F6 through SHIFT+F20. Normally, the host configures any UDKs that the application uses.

KEA! additionally provides the ability to map any key to strings, macros, or other terminal functions.


Mapping the Mouse

You can change default mouse functions and assign characters and VT functions or macros to mouse buttons in the Mouse dialog box.

If you map a macro to a button, you can put several macro statements on the same line. The pre-defined local variables Page, Row, Col and Adjustment are provided, which you can use in the macro statements. The variable Col tells the position between which characters the user clicked. In most cases, this is what you need. But if you want to know exactly on which character the user clicked, add the variable Adjustment to Col. Note that the selection cursor, always located between characters, might not be visible on the screen. The variables Page and Row contain the vertical position where the user clicked. If you want to use these variables in a macro file that you name under Value in the Mouse dialog box, include them as arguments.

To assign characters and VT functions or macros to mouse buttons

1	To display the Mouse dialog box, choose Mouse from the Options menu.

Along with the Mouse dialog box, the on-screen VT keyboard is displayed.

2	In the Action drop-down list, select the action to which you want to assign a sequence or macro.

3	In the Map To drop-down list, select what you want to send when the event shown in Action occurs.

4	Type the Value you want to map to this action (255 characters maximum).

5	Repeat steps 2 to 4 to map additional mouse button actions.

6	To exit the Mouse dialog box, choose Done.

Note  A macro filename that starts with a number will not execute if you simply type its name under Value. Instead, use the Run function. For example, to execute the macro file 123NAME.KTM, type Run("123NAME").
Whe you type information under Value, you can also select keys from the on-screen keyboard. To display the on-screen keyboard, choose the Keyboard button. To change focus to the on-screen keyboard, simply click in the keyboard window.
If you do not have a mouse, use the Keyboard button to switch to the on-screen Keyboard. Then, use the ARROW keys to highlight the key you want, and select that key by pressing the SPACEBAR. Press ENTER to switch back to the Mouse dialog box.
To include keys with special line-editing functions, such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on; or keys you cannot access on your keyboard; or VT functions or combinations, you must select them in the on-screen keyboard.

Example

If MapTo is set to Macro, and Value contains the following line:

MyMacro( PAGE, ROW, COL, ADJUSTMENT )

Then the called macro MyMacro can access Page as ARG[1], Row as ARG[2], and so forth.

Assume the following line appears on the screen, with A in the leftmost column of the screen:

ABCDEFG

If the user clicks the right part of the letter B, or the left part of the letter C, the cursor moves between B and C, and Col will have the value 3. Alternatively, the sum of Col plus Adjustment will be 2 if the user clicks anywhere on B (the second character), and 3 if the user clicks anywhere on C.


Mapping the Keyboard

You can customize your keyboard map by mapping character sequences, macros, macro statements, and terminal functions to almost any keyboard key or combination. You can use the options in the Keyboard Mapping dialog box to change the usual mapping of up to 100 personal computer keyboard keys to DIGITAL VT functions.

Note  You also can map mouse actions, user-defined SmartPads, and menus.

To assign a sequence of characters and VT functions or a macro to any personal computer key

1	From the Options menu, choose Keyboard. The Keyboard Mapping dialog box is displayed, with the PC Key field highlighted.

2	Press any keyboard key alone or combined with SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, or any combination of these.

The name of the key or combination is displayed in the PC Key field, and the Map To field is highlighted.

3	From the Map To drop-down list, select Sequence or Macro. Then, press TAB to move to the Value field.

4	If under Map To you selected Sequence, type the string you want to assign to this key sequence.
-or-
If you selected Macro, type the macro filename or the actual macro statements to execute. You can put several macro statements on the same line.

You can use the ARROW and BACKSPACE keys to edit what you type. You also can select keys from the on-screen keyboard.

5	Choose Done.

Note  A macro filename that starts with a number will not execute if you simply type its name under Value. Instead, use the Run function. For example, to execute the macro file 123NAME.KTM, type Run("123NAME").
Whe you type information under Value, you can also select keys from the on-screen keyboard. To display the on-screen keyboard, choose the Keyboard button. To change focus to the on-screen keyboard, simply click in the keyboard window.
If you do not have a mouse, use the Keyboard button to switch to the on-screen Keyboard. Then, use the ARROW keys to highlight the key you want, and select that key by pressing the SPACEBAR. Press ENTER to switch back to the Mouse dialog box.
To include keys with special line-editing functions, such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on; or keys you cannot access on your keyboard; or VT functions or combinations, you must select them in the on-screen keyboard.

To remove custom mapping or string assignment from a personal computer key and restore its default mapping

1	Choose the Keyboard command from the Options menu.

2	Select the mapping you want to remove from the Mapped Keys list.

3	Choose Delete.

Note  Selecting Nothing under Map To does not have the same effect as resetting the key combination to its default VT function by choosing Delete.


NumLock Key

KEA! normally forces the keypad to be in Numlock mode and uses the NUMLOCK key as the special VT PF1 key. The emulation does not require the personal computer NumLock function.

However on some machines, particularly laptops like the IBM PS/2 ThinkPad 700, the NUMLOCK key is needed to turn on and off the embedded numeric keypad. If you are using a laptop with an embedded numeric keypad, to prevent KEA! from capturing NUMLOCK, you can add a value to your Windows Registry.

If this line is present, KEA! does not control NUMLOCK. Instead it maps the SCROLLOCK key to PF1.


Attachmate PowerStation keyboard map

To locate VT420 functions on your Attachmate PowerStation keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

Ensure that the Layout field in the Keyboard dialog box indicates "PowerStation."


Attachmate PowerStation - Function Keys 1-5
Attachmate PowerStation keyboard: Function Keys  F1-F5

To locate VT420 functions on your Attachmate PowerStation keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the VT420 print function, use the Print command on the File menu.

F3 can optionally be used as a Set-Up key, selecting the KEA! menu bar.

F4 can optionally send Esc.

Because CTRL+HOLDSCREEN is the local keyboard change mode command, it is not available to the application.


Attachmate PowerStation - Function Keys 6-20
Attachmate PowerStation keyboard: Function Keys  F6-F20

To locate VT420 functions on your Attachmate PowerStation keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

Context-sensitive help is provided when you press the key marked F6 in this diagram (the blue F1 key) or the key marked HOLDSCREEN. You may find that sometimes you have to press F6/F1, and at other times HOLDSCREEN. This is because the keyboard sometimes appears as a dedicated KEA! device, and at other times (including whenever a dialog box is active) it appears as a Windows device.

The black F key markings on the PowerStation keyboard (also in this diagram) are used in KEA!. In other Windows functions, the blue DOS markings are used.


Attachmate PowerStation - Main Keypad
Attachmate PowerStation keyboard: Main Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your Attachmate PowerStation keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the Compose Character function, press CTRL+COMPOSE (the left ALT key.)

PowerStation Keyboards with National keycaps (other than North American) may have some keys marked with both black and blue legends. The character generated in KEA!, and all other Windows applications, is the one shown in blue.


Attachmate PowerStation - Editing Keypad
Attachmate PowerStation keyboard: Editing Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your Attachmate PowerStation keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

You can force a VT-like arrangement of the six editing keys as shown, or let the driver determine whether the layout is VT-like or PC-like. Use the Editpad Arrangement field in the Keyboard dialog box on the Options Terminal menu.


Attachmate PowerStation - Numeric Keypad
Attachmate PowerStation keyboard: Numeric Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your Attachmate PowerStation keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

To send a PF4 sequence, press CTRL+MINUS on the keypad (the key below the one marked "PF4" on your keyboard).


Attachmate PowerStation - Local Editing keys
Attachmate PowerStation: Local Editing Keys

The following list describes keys that have special functions in local edit mode.

SHIFT+EDIT	Press SHIFT with the EDIT key to enter or leave local edit mode. The VT status line shows "Edit." You can also enter or leave local edit mode by selecting "Interactive" or "Enabled" in the "Edit Mode" field of the Local Edit dialog box.

HOMECURSOR	Moves the cursor to the top left position on a page in page memory.

INSERT/OVERSTRIKE	Selects whether new characters you type displace existing characters to the right, or replace existing characters. The current state is shown in the VT status line.

CLEAR	Pressing this key clears an unprotected field of all characters

SHIFT+CLEAR	Pressing SHIFT with the CLEAR key clears all unprotected fields in the scrolling region.

PREVPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous page.

NEXTPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next page.

TAB	Advances the cursor to the first occurrence of: (1) a tab stop at the beginning of an unprotected field, (2) an unprotected field, (3) the end of the scrolling region.

SHIFT+TAB	Pressing SHIFT with TAB moves the cursor back to the first occurrence of: (1) the previous tab stop, (2) the beginning of the current unprotected field, (3) the beginning of the previous unprotected field, (4) the beginning of the scrolling region.

INSERTLINE	Adds a blank line on the screen; the following lines move down. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETELINE	Deletes a line from the screen; the following lines move up. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETECHAR	Deletes the unprotected character at the cursor.

TRANSMIT	Sends a block of edited text to the host.

RETURN	If the check box "Line Transmit" in the Local Edit dialog box is selected, the main keypad RETURN key works like the TRANSMIT key.

< x ] (DELETE)	The DELETE key on the main keypad deletes one character to the left of the cursor.


IBM Enhanced keyboard map

To locate VT420 functions on your IBM Enhanced keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

Ensure that the Layout field in the Keyboard dialog box indicates "Enhanced."


IBM Enhanced - Function Keys
IBM Enhanced keyboard: Function Keys

To locate VT420 functions on your IBM Enhanced keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the VT420 print function, press the key labeled "VT Print" or use the Print command on the File menu.

To toggle auto print mode, press SHIFT+"VT-Print" or use the Mode field in the Printer dialog box.

For the Windows copy-to-Clipboard function, press PRINTSCREEN (labeled Windows Copy in this diagram) to copy the entire screen. Press ALT+PRINTSCREEN to copy the active window.

The F1 key (marked HoldScreen in this diagram) provides context-sensitive help.

F3 can optionally be used as a Set-Up key, selecting the KEA! menu bar.

F4 can optionally send Esc.

VT420 function	IBM keyboard

F11.. F20	CTRL+F1 .. CTRL+F10

Help	CTRL+F5

Do	CTRL+F6

SHIFT+F6 .. SHIFT+F20	Add SHIFT to above combinations.


IBM Enhanced - Main Keypad
IBM Enhanced keyboard: Main Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your IBM Enhanced keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the Compose Character function, press CTRL+ALT.


IBM Enhanced - Editing Keypad
IBM Enhanced keyboard: Editing Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your IBM Enhanced keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

You can force a VT-like arrangement of the six editing keys as shown, or let the driver determine whether the layout is VT-like or PC-like. Use the Editpad Arrangement field in the Keyboard dialog box on the Options Terminal menu.


IBM Enhanced - Numeric Keypad
IBM Enhanced keyboard: Numeric Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your IBM Enhanced keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

Comma and Minus are distinguished by the CTRL key.


IBM Enhanced - Local Editing keys
IBM Enhanced: Local Editing Keys

The following list describes keys that have special functions in local edit mode.

SHIFT+EDIT	Press SHIFT with the EDIT key to enter or leave local edit mode. The VT status line shows "Edit." You can also enter or leave local edit mode by selecting "Interactive" or "Enabled" in the "Edit Mode" field of the Local Edit dialog box.

HOMECURSOR	Moves the cursor to the top left position on a page in page memory.

INSERT/OVERSTRIKE	Selects whether new characters you type displace existing characters to the right, or replace existing characters. The current state is shown in the VT status line.

CLEAR	Pressing this key clears an unprotected field of all characters

SHIFT+CLEAR	Pressing SHIFT with the CLEAR key clears all unprotected fields in the scrolling region.

PREVPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous page.

NEXTPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next page.

TAB	Advances the cursor to the first occurrence of: (1) a tab stop at the beginning of an unprotected field, (2) an unprotected field, (3) the end of the scrolling region.

SHIFT+TAB	Pressing SHIFT with TAB moves the cursor back to the first occurrence of: (1) the previous tab stop, (2) the beginning of the current unprotected field, (3) the beginning of the previous unprotected field, (4) the beginning of the scrolling region.

INSERTLINE	Adds a blank line on the screen; the following lines move down. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETELINE	Deletes a line from the screen; the following lines move up. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETECHAR	Deletes the unprotected character at the cursor.

TRANSMIT	Sends a block of edited text to the host.

RETURN	If the check box "Line Transmit" in the Local Edit dialog box is selected, the main keypad RETURN key works like the TRANSMIT key.

< x ] (DELETE)	The DELETE key on the main keypad deletes one character to the left of the cursor.


DEC LK250 keyboard map

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK250 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

Ensure that the Layout field in the Keyboard dialog box indicates "LK250."


DEC LK250 - Function Keys 1-5
DEC LK250 keyboard: Function Keys  F1-F5

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK250 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the VT420 print function, press the key labeled "VT Print" or use the Print command on the File menu.

To toggle auto print mode, press CTRL+"VT-Print" or use the Mode field in the Printer dialog box.

F3 can optionally be used as a Set-Up key, selecting the KEA! menu bar.

F4 can optionally send Esc.

Context-sensitive help is provided when you press F1.


DEC LK250 - Function Keys 6-20
DEC LK250 keyboard: Function Keys  F6-F20

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK250 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

Note  The F20 key sends the PF4 control sequence. This will be corrected in a future release.


DEC LK250 - Main Keypad
DEC LK250 keyboard: Main Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK250 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the Compose Character function, press the key labeled COMPOSE.


DEC LK250 - Editing Keypad
DEC LK250 keyboard: Editing Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK250 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

You can force a VT-like arrangement of the six editing keys as shown, or let the driver determine whether the layout is VT-like or PC-like. Use the Editpad Arrangement field in the Keyboard dialog box on the Options Terminal menu.


DEC LK250 - Numeric Keypad
DEC LK250 keyboard: Numeric Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK250 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the Windows copy-to-Clipboard function: press SHIFT+PF4 to copy the entire screen; press ALT+PF4 to copy the active window.


DEC LK250 - Local Editing keys
DEC LK250: Local Editing Keys

The following list describes keys that have special functions in local edit mode.

SHIFT+EDIT	Press SHIFT with the EDIT key to enter or leave local edit mode. The VT status line shows "Edit." You can also enter or leave local edit mode by selecting "Interactive" or "Enabled" in the "Edit Mode" field of the Local Edit dialog box.

HOMECURSOR	Moves the cursor to the top left position on a page in page memory.

INSERT/OVERSTRIKE	Selects whether new characters you type displace existing characters to the right, or replace existing characters. The current state is shown in the VT status line.

CLEAR	Pressing this key clears an unprotected field of all characters.

SHIFT+CLEAR	Pressing SHIFT with the CLEAR key clears all unprotected fields in the scrolling region.

PREVPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous page.

NEXTPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next page.

TAB	Advances the cursor to the first occurrence of: (1) a tab stop at the beginning of an unprotected field, (2) an unprotected field, (3) the end of the scrolling region.

SHIFT+TAB	Pressing SHIFT with TAB moves the cursor back to the first occurrence of: (1) the previous tab stop, (2) the beginning of the current unprotected field, (3) the beginning of the previous unprotected field, (4) the beginning of the scrolling region.

INSERTLINE	Adds a blank line on the screen; the following lines move down. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETELINE	Deletes a line from the screen; the following lines move up. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETECHAR	Deletes the unprotected character at the cursor.

TRANSMIT	Sends a block of edited text to the host.

RETURN	If the check box "Line Transmit" in the Local Edit dialog box is selected, the main keypad RETURN key works like the TRANSMIT key.

< x ] (DELETE)	The DELETE key on the main keypad deletes one character to the left of the cursor.


DEC LK450 keyboard map

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK450 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

Ensure that the Layout field in the Keyboard dialog box indicates "LK450."


DEC LK450 - Function Keys 1-5
DEC LK450 keyboard: Function Keys  F1-F5

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK450 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the VT420 print function, press the key labeled "VT Print" or use the Print command on the File menu.

To toggle auto print mode, press CTRL+"VT-Print" or use the Mode field in the Printer dialog box.

F3 can optionally be used as a Set-Up key, selecting the KEA! menu bar.

F4 can optionally send Esc.

Context-sensitive help is provided when you press F1.


DEC LK450 - Function Keys 6-20
DEC LK450 keyboard: Function Keys  F6-F20

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK450 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the Windows copy-to-Clipboard function: press F18 to copy the entire desktop; press ALT+F18 to copy the active window.

You can map ALT+F15 to some function or string, but it will also retain its original function of changing the keyclick volume.

Note  ALT+F17 with or without SHIFT and CTRL is not available.  CTRL+F18 sends no control sequence. This will be corrected in a future release.


DEC LK450 - Main Keypad
DEC LK450 keyboard: Main Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK450 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

For the Compose Character function, press the key labeled COMPOSE.


DEC LK450 - Editing Keypad
DEC LK450 keyboard: Editing Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK450 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.

You can force a VT-like arrangement of the six editing keys as shown, or let the driver determine whether the layout is VT-like or PC-like. Use the Editpad Arrangement field in the Keyboard dialog box on the Options Terminal menu.


DEC LK450 - Numeric Keypad
DEC LK450 keyboard: Numeric Keypad

To locate VT420 functions on your DEC LK450 keyboard, click a segment of the following diagram.


DEC LK450 - Local Editing keys
DEC LK450: Local Editing Keys

The following list describes keys that have special functions in local edit mode.

SHIFT+EDIT	Press SHIFT with the EDIT key to enter or leave local edit mode. The VT status line shows "Edit." You can also enter or leave local edit mode by selecting "Interactive" or "Enabled" in the "Edit Mode" field of the Local Edit dialog box.

HOMECURSOR	Moves the cursor to the top left position on a page in page memory.

INSERT/OVERSTRIKE	Selects whether new characters you type displace existing characters to the right, or replace existing characters. The current state is shown in the VT status line.

CLEAR	Pressing this key clears an unprotected field of all characters

SHIFT+CLEAR	Pressing SHIFT with the CLEAR key clears all unprotected fields in the scrolling region.

PREVPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous page.

NEXTPAGE	Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next page.

TAB	Advances the cursor to the first occurrence of: (1) a tab stop at the beginning of an unprotected field, (2) an unprotected field, (3) the end of the scrolling region.

SHIFT+TAB	Pressing SHIFT with TAB moves the cursor back to the first occurrence of: (1) the previous tab stop, (2) the beginning of the current unprotected field, (3) the beginning of the previous unprotected field, (4) the beginning of the scrolling region.

INSERTLINE	Adds a blank line on the screen; the following lines move down. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETELINE	Deletes a line from the screen; the following lines move up. You cannot press this key on a line containing a protected field.

DELETECHAR	Deletes the unprotected character at the cursor.

TRANSMIT	Sends a block of edited text to the host.

RETURN	If the check box "Line Transmit" in the Local Edit dialog box is selected, the main keypad RETURN key works like the Transmit key.

< x ] (DELETE)	The DELETE key on the main keypad deletes one character to the left of the cursor.


Entering and Exiting Local Edit Mode

The host computer normally causes KEA! to enter and exit local edit mode. However, you can control this action manually.

To Enter and Exit Local Edit Mode

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose Local Edit.

3	In the Local Edit dialog box under Edit mode, select Enabled to enter local edit mode or Interactive to exit local edit mode.

Note  You can also enter or exit Local Edit mode by pressing SHIFT+SELECT. However, if you select Unavailable under Edit Mode in the Local Edit dialog box, SHIFT+SELECT has no effect.


Clipboard Overview

The Clipboard, a special Windows application, temporarily stores data for transfer between Windows applications. You can copy data from the emulation window to the Clipboard by selecting the data and using the Copy command (Edit menu). You can send data from the Clipboard to the host with the Paste command (Edit menu).

Tip  Alternatively, to send text to the host, you can drag-and-drop selected text from another application to an active KEA! window.

  Selecting with the Mouse

  Selecting with the Keyboard

  Copying Data to the Clipboard

  Sending Selected or Clipboard Data to the Host

  Windows Copying

  Slowing the Transmission Rate


Copying Data to the Clipboard

To copy a selection to the Clipboard

1	Select the area you want to copy.

2	Click the Copy button on the toolbar.

  Copy button

-or-
Press CTRL+INSERTHERE
-or-
From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

A carriage return and a linefeed are added to the end of each line of text. If you need a different line terminator, use the following procedure.

To copy a selection to the Clipboard with a special format for use with a word processor, spreadsheet, or command line application

1	Select the area you want to copy.

2	From the Edit menu, choose Copy Special.

3	Under Copy Type, select an option.

Select	To copy text...

Data	without any formatting. This is most useful when the text is being pasted back to the host as command line data.

Lines	with carriage return and linefeed added to the end of each line. This is the same as selecting Copy from the Edit menu.

Paragraph	for use in a word processing application. To prevent words from running together, a space is inserted at the end of a line. A carriage return and a linefeed are inserted only before a blank line.

Table	for use in a spreadsheet or word processing table. If there is more than one space between words, the space is changed to a single tab character. Most spreadsheets and word processor tables interpret tab characters as cell separators. A single space remains a space when you copy the data, unless it is immediately followed by a numeric character (0-9, +, -, or .).

4	Choose Copy.

Note  KEA! 340 copies graphics as a bitmap, and as a Windows Metafile. It does not add a line terminator when copying graphics.


Sending Selected or Clipboard Data to the Host

Using the Paste command, you can send selected text to the host without first copying it to the Clipboard. Whether or not line terminators are sent with the data depends on the type of selection you perform. (If no text is selected, Paste sends the text in the Clipboard, if any.)

If you use the left mouse button (stream select), the selection is sent with the "Data" formatting—without line terminators. If you use the right mouse button (block select) the selection is pasted with the "Lines" formatting—a terminator at the end of each line.

The Newline As option (in the ASCII Options dialog box) is used to determine how to translate line terminators for the host: as CR, CR+LF, or LF. KEA! always translates data you paste from the clipboard to your host character set.

To paste selected text to the host

1	If you want to send the selection with "Data" formatting (no line terminators), use the left mouse button to select the text.
-or-
If you want to send the selection with "Lines" formatting (terminator at the end of each line), use the right mouse button to select the text.

2	Click the Paste button on the toolbar.

  Paste button

-or-
-Press SHIFT+INSERTHERE
-or-
From the Edit Menu, choose Paste.

To paste Clipboard text to the host

Ensure there is nothing selected on your screen. Then, from the Edit menu, choose Paste.

You might need to control the data flow to your host. For example, on a VAX/VMS host, you need to give the SET TERMINAL /HOSTSYNC command before pasting data.

Graphics cannot be Pasted.

Tip  Alternatively, to send text to the host, you can drag-and-drop selected text from another application to an active KEA! window.


Linking KEA! Data to Other Applications
Linking Data to Other Applications

Hotlinks are special Copy and Paste operations that use DDE to update the information copied from KEA! and pasted with links whenever the information on the screen changes. The KEA! DDE server name is KEAVT.

To establish a Hotlink

1	Select the area of the KEA! screen you want to link.

2	To copy the selection to the Clipboard, choose Copy or Copy Special from the Edit menu.

3	Switch to the other Windows application. Then, use that application's Paste Link or Paste Special command to establish the Hotlink.

The Hotlink remains until you disconnect or exit, or the other application exits. You can establish several simultaneous links between different areas of the same screen, different KEA!s, and different Windows applications. KEA! can have up to 20 links, although your system resources and memory might lower this limit.

You can save the established hotlink in the linked application if that application provides that capability.

The linked application controls the updating of hotlinks. Generally, there are two methods of updating: automatic and manual.

Automatic means the linked application keeps an open DDE conversation with an outstanding DDE Advise to KEA!. This means that linked data is updated whenever there is a change. If anything in the linked area of the screen changes, the linked data is updated after that area remains static for a specified time. The delay is normally one second, but is configurable in the Links dialog box (Edit menu).

You can temporarily disable automatic updating in the Links dialog box. This can be useful because both the screen and the host application must be ready to interact before data can be accurately updated. The Links Dialog box is also used to set options that determine when the linked data is updated. The "No change for" option is used to configure the time period the linked data must remain static after there has been a change before sending the data to the linked application. This option value can range from 100 to 2000 msec. and is initially set to 1000 msec. The Max delay option sets an upper limit on how long to wait for the linked area to become static before sending the data anyway.

Manual means the linked application does not keep the DDE conversation open. Each time you manually request an update (usually with an Update Now button in the linked application), the DDE conversation starts, requests the data for the update, and ends.

To create a link from Microsoft Word to KEA!

1	Select and copy the area of the KEA! screen you want to link.

2	Switch to Microsoft Word for Windows. From Word's Edit menu, choose Paste Special .

3	In the Paste Special dialog box, choose Paste Link.

Word activates the Links dialog box whenever a link exists. You can use it to control the link. For more information, see your Word for Windows documentation.

To create a link from Microsoft Excel to KEA!

1	Select and copy the area of the KEA! screen you want to link.

2	Switch to Excel. From Excel's Edit menu, choose Paste Special or Paste Link.

You control the Link with the Links command on Excel's Edit menu. For more information, see your Excel documentation.


Selecting with the Mouse

You can use the mouse to select lines or blocks of text, and graphics (KEA! 340 only) in the emulation window. Emulation stops when you select text.

Position the cursor (insertion point) at the beginning of the text you want to select. Then, use one of the following procedures to select the desired text.

To select a portion of a line or lines

Hold down the LEFT mouse button, and drag the cursor to the end of the desired text.

To select complete words

Double-click and hold down the LEFT mouse button, and drag to include all desired words.

To select a complete line

Double-click the RIGHT mouse button. Drag the cursor to select additional complete lines.

To select any rectangular portion of the viewed page

Hold down the RIGHT mouse button, and drag the cursor to the end of the desired portion.

To cancel a selection

Click Cancel on the Toobar

-or-

Remove the checkmark from Select or Block Select on the Edit menu.

-or-

Click a mouse button outside of the selected area.


Selecting with the Keyboard

You can use the keyboard to select lines or blocks of text, and graphics (KEA! 340 only) in the emulation window. Emulation stops when you select text.

To select lines

1	From the Edit menu, choose Select.

2	Select a beginning and ending using the keys in the following tables.

To select a rectangular block of text and graphics

1	From the Edit menu, choose Block Select.

2	Select a beginning and ending using the keys in the following tables.

Use the keys in the first table to move the cursor to the beginning of the text you want to select. Then use the keys in the second table to move the cursor to the end of the text you want to select.

To move the beginning	Press

one character	RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW

one word	CTRL+RIGHT ARROW or CTRL+LEFT ARROW

up one line	UP ARROW (or CTRL+UP ARROW to move to word boundary)

down one line	DOWN ARROW (or CTRL+DOWN ARROW to move to word boundary)

beginning of current line	PREVSCRN

end of current line	NEXTSCRN

To move the end and select   Press

one character	SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW or SHIFT+LEFT ARROW

one word	SHIFT+CTRL+RIGHT ARROW or SHIFT+CTRL+LEFT ARROW

up one line	SHIFT+UP ARROW (or SHIFT+CTRL+UP ARROW to move to word boundary)

down one line	SHIFT+DOWN ARROW (or SHIFT+CTRL+DOWN ARROW to move to word boundary)

to beginning of current line	SHIFT+PREVSCRN

to end of current line	SHIFT+NEXTSCRN

to beginning of viewed page   SHIFT+CTRL+PREVSCRN

to end of viewed page	SHIFT+CTRL+NEXTSCRN

To cancel a selection

Press ESC

or

On the Edit menu, remove the checkmark next to Select or Block Select.


Tektronix: Special Keys

The 4014 keyboard has many special keys and switches. Most of these have equivalent keys on the personal computer keyboard. Dialog box options imitate others.

Personal Computer Key	Description

SHIFT+BACKSPACE	Sends ASCII BS. Equivalent to BACKSPACE on a 4014 keyboard.

PRINTSCREEN	Produces a hardcopy of the screen from the PowerStation or LK250 keyboard. Equivalent to MAKECOPY on a 4014 keyboard.

F2	Produces a hardcopy of the screen from an LK450 or IBM Enhanced keyboard. Equivalent to MAKECOPY on a 4014 keyboard.

NEXT SCRN	Erases the screen, selects Alpha mode, homes the cursor, sets Margin 1, cancels bypass, and clears a Page Full Condition. You also can use the Clear command from the Connection menu. Equivalent to PAGE on a 4014 keyboard.

PREV SCRN	Releases a Page Full Condition, erases the screen, and positions the cursor home. Equivalent to RELEASE on a 4014 keyboard.

SHIFT+NEXT SCRN	Resets the terminal to its initial state, but does not erase the screen. It selects Alpha mode, homes the cursor, and selects the default character size. You also can use the Reset command from the Connection menu. Equivalent to RESET on a 4014 keyboard.

BACKSPACE or DEL	Sends ASCII DEL. You can use either key. Equivalent to RUBOUT on a 4014 keyboard.


Definition of PRODNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of SHORTNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of EDITNAME bookmark:KEA! Edit


Online Help

KEA! Help uses the Microsoft Windows Help facility. Along with sections that describe KEA! commands and procedures, Help contains a keyword search function. Help also contains a full text search function. To access the full text search function, choose the Find tab in the Help Topics window.

You can get Help by choosing Contents from the Help menu. Choosing a button displays a list of topics for that section. You can display information on a topic by selecting its title from the list, or by jumping to it from a related topic.

You can also display the contents of online Help by clicking the Help Contents button on the toolbar.

  Help Contents button

KEA! also provides context-sensitive Help. This gives you direct access to much of the Help information. You can choose the Help button in any dialog box to get help on the options. Alternatively, you can press F1 to get help on a displayed dialog box.

You can obtain instructions about Help itself by pressing F1 while Help is active.

Note  On a PowerStation keyboard, the F1-help key for a highlighted menu command is the F1 key on the VT layout, the key labeled "HoldScreen." This is because the KEA! application controls the window. However, the F1-help key for a dialog box is the F1 key on the Enhanced layout, the key labeled "F6/F1." This is because Windows itself controls the dialog box window.


Overview of Sessions

Each active connection between KEA! and a host system is called a session. A variety of communication methods are supported, and you can run multiple sessions simultaneously, each in its own window.

Before you can begin your first session, you must know the communciation method you should use. There might be more than one communication method available to you. If you are unsure of what your selection should be, contact your system administrator before you proceed.

The options to be selected vary for each communication method, and there are default values provided for each. These defaults might already have been modified to suit your environment by your system administrator.

Other options, such as selection of file transfer method and terminal type, can be bypassed at startup and changed later, during your session.

You can customize your session at any time; your selections do not have to be made prior to starting your first session. Aspects of KEA!'s operation that you can control include color, window size, and font.The changes you make to an individual session can be saved before you exit from that session, so you can easily start the same session at a later time.

You can also store information about your preferred arrangement of KEA! sessions on the desktop, and their host connections. Then you can restart all the sessions in the layout at a later time.


Starting a Session from Windows

If you have saved only one session, that session is automatically opened when you start KEA! from the KEA! Program group on the Windows Start menu. If you have saved more than one session or a combination of sessions and layouts, choosing the KEA! icon displays the Open Session dialog box.

To start a previously saved session from Windows

1	To start the application, choose the KEA! icon. If you have saved more than one session or a combination of sessions and layouts, the Open Session dialog box is displayed.

2	In the Open Session dialog box, type or select the name of the session or layout of sessions that you want to open.

3	To start the selected session, choose OK.

As you continue to use KEA!, the Save As command lets you create more icons which start different sessions directly from the Program group of your choice. Choosing one of these icons starts a session in a new window, using the configuration that you associated with this icon.

In addition, the Save Layout command lets you create an icon that starts several sessions at once, in the same arrangement they had when you saved the layout.


Starting Your First Session

When you start KEA! for the first time, your first task is to name your session in the New KEA! Session dialog box.

To start your first session

1	To start the application, choose KEA! from the KEA! Program group. The New KEA! Session dialog box is displayed.

2	Type the name you want to give to your session.

3	Choose OK to display the Session Setup dialog box.

4	Select a communication method from the Communications Port list.

5	Choose Configure. The Setup dialog box for the selected communication method is displayed.

6	Select your configuration options, or use the defaults provided.

7	To return to the Session Setup dialog box, choose OK.

8	In the Session Setup dialog box, you can select a File Transfer Protocol and Terminal Mode, or choose OK to begin your session.

Note  To avoid having to select options every time you start a session, you should save changes to configuration and display options before exiting.
By default, KEA! prompts you to save your configuration options when you exit; however, options in the General Settings dialog box might defeat this prompt to save when you exit. Choose Settings on the Options menu. Or you can save the options of the current session right now. From the File menu, choose Save.


Changing the Host and Other Options

While you are running a session, you can change any of its parameters, including the port type. Before you select a network port, ensure that network software, including interface drivers, is installed. (Attempting to use a network without installing the necessary software has unpredictable effects.)

To change the port type in a running session

1	From the Options menu, choose Communications.

2	Select a port type from the Port list.

3	Choose the Setup button. If the button is unavailable, support for the selected communication method has not been installed.

For details, refer to topics about the particular network type: Serial (COM) ports, Modem, LAT, Telnet, KEAlink MSU, and NetWare for DEC Access.

4	Choose OK after making any necessary changes.

5	Choose OK in the Communications dialog box.


Creating a New Session

To create a new session

1	Choose the New Session command on the File menu.

2	In the New KEA! Session dialog box, type the name you want to give to your new session. This starts a new session, and displays the Session Setup dialog box.

3	In the Session Setup dialog box you can select a Communications Port, File Transfer Protocol, and Terminal Mode.

4	Select Connect from the Connection menu, or choose the Connect button on the status bar.

Note  If Auto Connect on the Connection menu is selected, you are automatically connected to the port and service you specified whenever you change the port type or network address.


Opening a Previous Session

After you have created and saved new sessions, you can recall these sessions with their saved parameters. You can retrieve them through the Open Session command, or a most-recently-used list on the File menu.

When you open a session, the exit options in its General Settings dialog box override the exit options of all other currently running sessions. In other words, the exit options of the most recently started session become global to all currently running sessions. If, in its General Settings dialog box, Yes is selected under Save Changes On Exit and you later choose Exit All, the exit options of the most recently opened session are saved for all sessions that were running.

To start a previously created session

1	Choose the Open Session command on the File menu to display the Open dialog box. Or you can use the Open Session button on the toolbar.

  Open Session button

2	Select a session from the Existing Sessions list, or type a session name in the Name box.

3	If the New Window option appears in the dialog box, you can select whether the opened session starts in a new window, or the opened session replaces the session in the current window.

To start a session that was used recently

A list at the bottom of the File menu shows the four most recently used sessions. Choose any one of these to re-start that session. If the session is already running, the window containing that session becomes the active window.


Switching Between Open Sessions

If you have more than one session open, you can switch between them using any of the following methods.

To switch between open sessions

Choose the Next Session button on the toolbar, equivalent to the Next Session command on the Window menu. These switch to the next session in the list at the bottom of the Window menu.

  Next Session button

-Or-

Select an item from the list at the bottom of the Window menu.

-Or-

Click anywhere in the window of the session that you want to be active.


Saving the Current Session

After you have configured a session to your liking, you will probably want to save its settings. The easiest way is to wait until you exit from the session (Exit All on the File menu) and let KEA! prompt you about saving. If you do, all aspects of the current session are saved: various options from the Options menu, including the current mapping of keys, buttons, menus, mouse events, and colors.

Note that options in the General Settings dialog box might defeat this prompt to save when you exit. Choose Settings on the Options menu.

Or you can save the options of the current session right now. From the File menu, choose Save.

As you continue to use KEA!, you can create additional icons which will start sessions with different configurations, as follows.

To save the options of the current session, giving them a name and icon

1	From the File menu, choose Save As.

2	Supply a name for the session.

3	Under Components, select Configuration and other components you want.

4	If you want to be able to later start this session from an icon, select Create Icon and select the program group where you want the icon to appear.

If you save only some of the components listed in the Save As command, and Configuration is not one of them, KEA! produces a components file. While you cannot open a session using a components file, you can run it as a macro to apply only those saved components to the current session.

To save a component file and apply it to an existing session

1	In an open session, define any user-mapped keys, buttons, menus, mouse events, or colors that you would like to save.

2	From the File menu, choose Save As.

3	In the Save As dialog box, type a name for your component file. Ensure that the Configuration option under Components is cleared, and that any user mappings you want to save are selected.

4	Choose OK to save your component file. The component filename will be the session name you selected, with a .KTU extension.

5	Open the session to which you want to apply your component file.

6	From the Macro menu, choose Run.

7	In the Run dialog box under File Name, type the component filename, or select the name from the list displayed.


Saving & Restoring a Layout of Sessions

By saving a layout file, you can later re-start all the KEA! sessions on your desktop in the same position they occupied when you made the layout file. A layout (.KTL) file saves the following information about each application window:

•	Name and location of the .EXE file,

•	Configuration file being used,

•	Host connection,

•	Position and size (maximized or not) of the window on your desktop,

•	Various other options including font size, position of the On-screen VT Keyboard, and position of the SmartPad.

To save a layout of one or more sessions

From the Window menu, choose Save Layout and type a name in the Name box. If you want to be able to re-start this layout directly from an icon, select the Create Icon option, and specify a Program Group name. The icon is given the name you supply in Name.

While KEA! is running, you can re-start all the sessions of a saved layout, and connect to individual hosts.

To re-start all the sessions in a previously-saved layout

From the Windows menu, choose Open Layout and choose one of the listed layouts.

If a session described in the layout file is already running (as identified by its host connection) that session is not re-started, it is only moved on the desktop to its position in the previously saved layout. Any existing sessions that are not part of the layout file are not changed.


Exiting

There are several ways to quit a KEA! session or disconnect from a port. The Disconnect and Clear Comm commands are not normally used.

To close the current window

Choose Close Session from the File menu or from the Control menu, or double-click the Control menu button.

To close the current window and any other session windows

Choose Exit All from the File menu.

To disconnect from the port

Use Disconnect from the Connection menu. If you attempt to exit KEA! with a session still connected, you are asked if you want to disconnect first.

To clear the port

Select Clear Comm from the Connection menu. This command empties the communications buffers, clears any conditions that could prevent transmitting or receiving data (for example, Xoff received), and cancels any current escape sequence processing.


Language of Menus

If you have the International version of KEA!, you can select the language in which all menus, commands, dialog boxes, and system messages are displayed. You can choose English, French (Français), German (Deutsch), Spanish (Español), Italian (Italiano), or Portuguese (Português). This feature is not available in the U.S. version.

To change the language of KEA!'s user interface

1	From the Options menu, choose View.

2	In the Language option, select the language you want to use.


Character Sets

A character set is a group of graphic and control characters stored as a unit in the terminal. You can display graphic characters on the screen. You use control characters to perform special functions.

KEA! supports all the VT340 and VT420 character sets. These include ASCII, DEC-MCS, ISO Latin-1, DEC Technical, DEC Special Graphics, National Replacement Character sets, and DRCS (downloadable). KEA! also supports the standard IBM character set. It includes special fonts for all the characters normally not available in Windows. Each character set contains various sizes including 80 and 132 column styles.

The character set determines which characters are displayed for each received code.

You select the character set you want to use in the Terminal General dialog box (Options Terminal menu). You can select the Character Set Mode, User Preferred Character Set, and National Character Set.

You can display received control codes. To see these codes, select the Transparent option in the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu).


National Replacement Character Sets

KEA! uses the Character Set Mode, User Preferred Character Set, and National Character Set options in the Terminal General dialog box (Options Terminal menu) to determine the character to display for each code received from the host. The National Character Set option has no effect in Multinational mode.

For Character Set Mode, you can select either Multinational or National. For User Preferred Character Set, you can select DEC-MCS, IBM-PC, or ISO Latin-1. For National Character Set, you can select from a drop-down list of National Replacement Character Sets including N. American, Fr. Canadian, Dutch, Swedish, and more.


Changing the Size of Displayed Characters

You can make the characters on the screen larger or smaller by choosing a character size from the Font Width option in the View dialog box (Options menu) or clicking the Reduce Font and Enlarge Font buttons on the toolbar. The font width you select can affect the size of the displayed window, and the amount of the VT screen visible in the window.

  Reduce Font button

  Enlarge Font button

If you set the Font Width option in the View dialog box to Auto, and do not maximize the window, font width and window size are adjusted to always display 80 columns of text. If you use the toolbar buttons to change the font width, KEA! changes the window size. If you change the window size by dragging its borders, KEA! changes the font width.

If you set Font Width to something other than Auto, and do not maximize the window, you can change the window size and font width independently. You can make the application window contain any integral number of columns up to 80. If necessary, use the scroll bars to view the full VT screen.

If you maximize the emulation window, and set Font Width to something other than Auto, KEA! sizes the window to fit exactly 80 or 132 columns at the current font width. You can use the toolbar buttons to change the font width.

Note  The number of columns, 80 or 132, depends on your selection under Columns in the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu).

KEA! contains two font sets. The default font has an aspect ratio (width to height) of 1:2; the alternate font set has an aspect ratio of 1:1.5. The font sets have the same horizontal width selections. If you use the alternate font, you have a smaller vertical window and shorter characters.

You can force the use of the alternate font set by adding a value to your Windows Registry database.


Changing the Size of the Window
Changing the Size of the Emulation Window

You can make the characters on the screen appear larger or smaller. The window size, the character size, and the portion of the VT page that is displayed can all change with the font width you select.

Because KEA! emulates a VT terminal, resizing the window will never allow you to display a page wider than the defined number of columns (either 80 or 132).

To resize the window, keeping the full width of the VT page in view

1	From the Options menu, choose View. The View dialog box is displayed.

2	From the Font Width list, select Auto. Choose OK to exit the dialog box and return to your session.

3	Use your mouse to drag the window borders until the window is an appropriate size. Do not maximize the window. KEA! adjusts the character size to show exactly 80 (or 132) columns of text in the window.
-or-
If you want the application window to fill the entire desktop, click the maximize button in the upper right corner of the window, or double-click the title bar. The window fills the desktop, and the character size is automatically adjusted to fill the window.

To choose a character size that does not change with the window size

1	From the Options menu, choose View. The View dialog box will appear.

2	From the Font Width list, select a font width other than Auto. Choose OK to exit the dialog box and return to your session.

3	Use your mouse to drag the window borders until the window is the size you want. It will show an integral number of characters, up to a maximum of 80 (or 132). The character size does not change, but parts of the VT page might be hidden from view.

4	Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to view hidden areas of the VT page.

Note  The font size for a 132-column display is automatically selected, based on the selected 80-column font size.
You can eliminate any excess gray space that appears in the application window around the VT page by double-clicking anywhere in the gray space.


Colors and Character Attributes

KEA! emulates the color features of the VT340 terminal and displays all VT character attributes. Character attributes (bold, inverse, underline, and blink) change the way characters appear on the screen.These attributes, or combinations of these attributes, can be assigned to any displayed character. You can add color to your display by mapping character attributes and their combinations to colors.

KEA! also supports ISO Color sequences, with which the host controls the foreground and background colors independently of other visual attributes. Default colors are provided for each attribute, attribute combination, and the ISO colors. You can change these default colors to personalize your screen display.

Line Attributes are characteristics (formats) that are applied to a line to change the way it displays on the screen. KEA! supports the same line attributes as DIGITAL VT terminals: double-wide, double-high/double-wide, and normal.

To change the color of normal text in your emulation window

1	From the Options menu, choose Colors.
-or-
Click the Colors button on the toolbar.

  Colors button

2	In the Attribute Colors dialog box under Attribute, select Normal.

3	Select the Foreground color and Background colors you want to use for normal text.

4	Choose OK.

To map character attributes to color

You can add color variety to the text in your emulation window by assigning the character attributes and their combinations to various foreground and background colors.

1	From the Options menu, choose Colors.
-or-
Click the Colors button on the toolbar.

  Colors button

2	In the Attribute colors dialog boxunder Map To Colr, select one or more of the displayed character attributes (bold, inverse, underline, and blink). This makes characters with attributes appear in color.

3	From the list of Attributes, select an attribute or attribute combination.

4	Select the Foreground and Background colors to use for the Attribute you selected.

5	Choose OK.

Bold Background

When KEA! receives the VT control sequence CSI 1 m to give characters the bold attribute, and these characters are also assigned a foreground or background color, normally, only the character, and not its background, is made bold. If you want both the character and its background to be bold, add the Bold Background option to the Windows Registry:


Changing the Colors Displayed on Your Screen

You can change the value of any color index so that ISO and attribute mapping use a different shade for that color.

The DIGITAL VT340 can display 16 colors at a time selected from 4096 colors. Your personal computer running Windows might have a different color capability. KEA! provides options that let you obtain the best color match. The color features that are provided on your computer depend largely on whether or not your display adapter uses a palette.

Adapters Without a Palette

Display adapters without palettes include standard VGA and EGA. These have 16 fixed colors, which correspond closely (but not exactly) to the VT340's 16 default colors. KEA! must use the 16 pre-set Windows colors. When a color change is requested, it is matched to the closest available Windows color. True Color (or High Color) display adapters can display more than 256 colors simultaneously but they do not use a palette. These adapters can closely match any VT340 color.

Because none of these adapters has a palette, the colors on the screen can only be changed by redrawing the screen. As such, images that use the VT340 palette animation feature (changing a displayed color without redrawing the screen) cannot be fully emulated.

Adapters That Use a Palette

Display adapters such as the 8514 and many super VGAs can display 256 colors simultaneously out of a much larger palette. This type of Windows video system, called a palletized system, best matches the color capabilities of the DIGITAL VT340.

If you have this type of display, you can select the option Use Exact Colors in the Colors dialog box. When this option is selected, 16 of the 256 colors are used to exactly match the VT colors.

The host can also define colors using the appropriate ReGIS commands.


Changing the Values of Color Indexes

You can change the value of any color index so that ISO and attribute mapping use a different shade for that color.

The host can also define colors using the appropriate ReGIS commands.

To exactly match VT colors

1	From the Options Terminal menu, choose Colors.

2	In the Attribute Colors dialog box, choose Colors.

3	In the Colors dialog box, select Use Exact Colors.

Note  This option is available only if you have a 256 color display (that is, a display with a palette).
16 of the 256 available colors are used to exactly match the VT colors. You can change any of the 16, defining your own exact colors. You might notice that Windows reallocates KEA!'s palette entries when running in the background. When you switch between KEA! and other applications, the background application colors might change or flash, but the foreground application colors remain correct.

To change the RGB value of a particular color

1	From the Options menu, choose Colors.

2	In the Attribute Colors dialog box, choose Colors.

3	In the Colors dialog box, select the VT Color Index you want to change.

4	Type the value, or use the scroll bars to select values for Red, Green, and Blue.

5	Choose OK.

To reset a color to its previous RGB value

1	From the Options menu, choose Colors.

2	In the Attribute Colors dialog box, choose Colors.

3	In the Colors dialog box, select the VT Color Index you want to reset.

4	Choose Current Index to Saved.

5	Choose OK.


Vertical Scrolling

The box in the vertical scroll bar shows your relative position on the viewed page, and in the History Buffer if you enabled the history feature. You can display or hide the vertical scroll bar with the Vertical Scroll Bar option in the View dialog box (Options menu).

The vertical scroll bar contains Page-Up and Page-Down buttons. These buttons display the previous and next page.

To scroll up and down the page (and History Buffer, if enabled)

Use the vertical scroll bar and your mouse.
-or-
Press CTRL+UPARROW or CTRL+DOWNARROW to scroll a line at a time; press CTRL+SHIFT+UPARROW or CTRL+SHIFT+DOWNARROW to scroll a screen at a time.
-or-
Click the Page-Up or Page-Down button on the vertical scroll bar, or press CTRL+PGUP or CTRL+PGDN to switch the viewed page to the previous or next page.


Horizontal Scrolling

The box in the horizontal scroll bar shows your relative position on the viewed page, and in the History Buffer if you enabled the history feature. You can display or hide the horizontal scroll bar with the Horizontal Scroll Bar option in the View dialog box (Options menu). The scroll bar is dimmed if there is no additional data to view.

You can display the horizontal scroll bar above or below the VT status line. Select VT Status Line in the View dialog box (Options menu). Then select Above Scroll Bar or Below Scroll Bar.

To scroll across the page

Use the horizontal scroll bar and your mouse.
-or-
Press CTRL+LEFTARROW or CTRL+RIGHTARROW to move back and forth.


Saving Text in the History Buffer

You can store text no longer displayed in the emulation window in the History buffer. With History enabled, text that scrolls off the screen, or text that you clear from the screen using the Clear command, is stored in the History buffer.

To activate the History feature

Choose Enable History from the Connection menu.
-or-
Choose History from the Options menu, then select Enable History in the History dialog box.

The History dialog box options let you specify the values for History buffer operations. You can specify the Maximum Size of the History buffer. You can limit the amount of history kept by specifying a value other than Unlimited.

You can select whether History stores data scrolled off or cleared from the scrolling region. You can select to store the history from the current session for use in a new session. If you want to retain history information, you must specify a filename in which to store the history information.

  Recalling Text from the History Buffer


Recalling Text from the History Buffer

When you choose Enable History from the Connection menu, or from the History dialog box (Options menu), history information is stored in the history buffer.

To view the history buffer

Use the vertical scroll bar on the right side of the screen.
-or-
Press CTRL+UP ARROW and CTRL+DOWN ARROW to view the previous or next line.
-or-
Press CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW and CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN ARROW to view the previous or next screen.

To view an old history file

1	From the Options menu, choose History.

2	In the History dialog box, type the name of the History file in the File Name box.
-or-
Click the Browse button to display a list of history files.

3	Choose OK.

Then use the vertical scroll bar or ARROW keys to display the information from the history file.

Note  If you select Retain History in the History dialog box, the History buffer information is saved in the specified file when you exit. When you start the emulation again, existing history is restored to the History buffer.
To bring a history file into a text editor, you must view the history file in the emulation window. Then, select the sections you want and copy them to the Clipboard. You then can paste the information from the Clipboard into a document in the text editor.
You can only view an old history file if it is from the current session and it is the most recent history file for the session.


Keeping the Cursor In View

When you couple the cursor, KEA! scrolls the window keeping the cursor visible as it moves on the current page, or as the current VT page changes. For example, if you try to move the cursor beyond the right edge of the window, the window display moves to the left. This keeps the cursor visible, and displays the information formerly hidden beyond the right edge of the window.

You select the coupling options in the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu). KEA! provides three types of cursor coupling: Horizontal, Vertical, and Page. You can select any combination. When you select either Horizontal or Vertical coupling, the visible portion of the page is automatically scrolled to keep the text cursor visible. When you select Page coupling, and data arrives from the host, the viewed page is switched to the active page. In this way, you can see the data as it arrives from the host.


Hold Screen

When you activate Hold Screen mode, output to the emulation window stops. The Hold Screen button on the Toolbar indicates the current state.

To activate Hold Screen mode

1	Press the HOLDSCREEN key, or click the Hold Screen button on the toolbar. This stops output to the screen.

  Hold Screen button

2	To resume output, Press the HOLDSCREEN key or click the Hold Screen button again.


Window Elements

KEA!'s application window contains many parts. These include:

•	Title and menu bars at the top.

•	Toolbar buttons.

•	Emulation window.

•	VT Status Line and Status Bar at the bottom.

•	Horizontal scroll bar.

•	Vertical scroll bar with page-up and page-down buttons.

The main window also can contain user-defined buttons if you choose Show SmartPad from the Options menu, or select View Buttons in the SmartPad dialog box (Options menu).

KEA! displays as much of the current page as possible in the emulation window. How much of the current page is displayed depends on two things: the size of the window, and the character size.

You can configure KEA! to keep the cursor visible when the window scrolls automatically.

You can change the appearance of your KEA! window by adding values to your Windows Registry database. You can change the position of the emulation window, the pattern of the window border, the border color, and the bitmap used in the border.


Toolbar

You can click the KEA! Toolbar buttons at the top of the application window to choose frequently-used commands. Clicking the buttons has the same effect as choosing the equivalent command from the menu bar.

To remove the Toolbar, choose the Show Toolbar command on the Options menu.

Open Session  Starts the named session in a new window.

Print  Prints some or all of page memory. The amount printed depends on the selection you make under Extent in the Print dialog box.

Copy  Copies the selected area of the emulation window to the Clipboard.

Paste  Sends the selected area of the emulation window or the Clipboard contents to the host.

Shuttle  Select and transfer multiple files between the personal computer and the host.

Send  Sends a file to the host using the currently selected file transfer method. You select the file transfer method in the Options dialog box (Transfer menu).

Receive  Receives a file from the host using the currently selected file transfer method. You select the file transfer method in the Options dialog box (Transfer menu).

Colors  Displays the Attribute Colors dialog box where you can map colors to the various character attributes.

Reduce Font  Decreases the font size of the text in the emulation window by one increment.

Enlarge Font  Increases the font size of the text in the emulation window by one increment.

VT Keyboard  Displays the on-screen VT keyboard.

Next Session  Switches to the next KEA! application window from the list at the bottom of the Window menu.

Hold Screen  Stops and restarts output to the emulation window.

Cancel  Cancels a selection (equivalent to removing the checkmark from Select on the Edit menu) or stops a running macro.

Help Contents  Starts KEA! online help, and displays the main topics.


Hiding the Menu Bar

You can select whether or not the menu bar at the top of the emulation screen is visible. Because the menu bar takes up a significant portion of the screen, this might be useful if you shrink the window to a small size.

You hide the menu bar by clearing the check mark from the Show Menu Bar command on the Control menu.


User-defined Menus

KEA! provides a way for you to customize the Menu bar and menus. You can add menu items, and define them for ALT key access. You also can remove commands. Items can display a cascading menu, or perform an action. You can map items to a macro, sequence, or separator.

You can add a new menu to the menu bar, or add an item to an existing menu. You can even add a cascaded menu to an existing menu. New menu items can process a sequence or execute a macro. For example, you might add a command to the Connection menu which runs a macro that logs you into your host system.

To add a menu to the menu bar

1	To display the Menus dialog box, from the Options menu, choose Menus.

2	Select the existing menu that you want the new menu to appear before.

3	Select Insert Menu.

4	Type a name in the Caption field. If you want to use a keyboard hotkey to choose this item, place an ampersand (&) in front of the character you want to use. The character appears underlined on the menu.

5	Press ENTER.

6	If you want to add commands to the newly created menu, follow the steps "To add an item to a menu."

To add a cascaded menu to an existing menu

1	To display the Menus dialog box, from the Options menu, choose Menus.

2	Select the existing menu item that you want the new cascaded menu to appear before.

3	Select Insert Menu.

4	Type a name in the Caption field. If you want to use a keyboard hotkey to choose this item, place an ampersand (&) in front of the character you want to use. The character appears underlined on the menu.

5	Press ENTER.

6	If you want to add items to the new cascaded menu, follow the steps "To add an item to a menu."

To add an item to a menu

1	To display the Menus dialog box, from the Options menu, choose Menus.

2	Select the existing menu item that you want the new item to appear before.

3	Select Insert.

4	Type a name in the Caption field. If you want to use a keyboard hotkey to choose this item, place an ampersand (&) in front of the character you want to use. The character appears underlined on the menu.

5	Select the type of action in the Map To field.

6	Type the Value you want to map to this action. If you selected Separator under Map To, omit this step.

7	Choose Done, or repeat the previous steps to add another command.

Note  A macro filename that starts with a number will not execute if you simply type its name under Value. Instead, use the Run function. For example, to execute the macro file 123NAME.KTM, type Run("123NAME").
When you type information under Value, you can also select keys from the on-screen keyboard. To display the on-screen keyboard, choose the Keyboard button. To change focus to the on-screen keyboard, simply click in the keyboard window.
If you do not have a mouse, use the Keyboard button to switch to the on-screen Keyboard. Then, use the ARROW keys to highlight the key you want, and select that key by pressing the SPACEBAR. Press ENTER to switch back to the Menus dialog box.
To include keys with special line-editing functions, such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on; or keys you cannot access on your keyboard; or VT functions or combinations, you must select them in the on-screen keyboard.

To remove a command from a menu

1	From the Options menu, choose Menus.

2	Select the menu or command you want to remove.

3	Choose Delete.

Note  If you delete a menu, KEA! also deletes all commands on that menu. If you delete a menu command, that command is not deleted, it is only hidden (removed from the menu). You can add the command back at a later time.


Pages

The VT420 and VT340 terminals contain an area of memory called page memory. Page memory contains 144 lines that you can divide into equal pages. The most common configuration is 6 pages of 24 lines each. The host sends control sequences to KEA! defining a page containing any number of lines from 24 through 144. (On a real VT420, the host can select one of several discrete page sizes ranging from 24x80 to 144x132.) This is useful in UNIX environments where the application can accept any size terminal. Therefore, you can select the most appropriate window size considering the account screen space, window contents, and other applications.

You can select the number of lines per page (page size) from the Lines drop-down list in the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu). KEA! supports the standard VT sizes of 24, 25, 36, 48, 72, and 144 lines. However, you can enter any size from 24 to 144 in the Lines field. The 144 lines of page memory are divided into equal size pages. Each page contains the number of lines you selected. If any lines remain, they are not used. For example, if you selected 33 lines per page, page memory is divided into 4 pages of 33 lines each, and the remaining 12 lines are not used. Each page has left, right, top, and bottom margins.

If your page size is larger than your window size, you can use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to move on the page. You use the vertical scroll bar to move up and down on the current page, and the horizontal scroll bar to move left and right. The box in the scroll bars shows your relative position on the viewed page, and in the History Buffer, if you enabled the history feature.

To automatically keep in view the portion of the page where the cursor is located, you must couple the cursor to the direction of movement. You can couple the cursor to horizontal or vertical movement, or both. You can also couple the cursor to page movement.

You can enlarge the application window to view as much as possible of the current page. The amount of the page displayed depends on the currently selected character size. You can enlarge the window by dragging the borders with the mouse, or clicking the Maximize button.

The host generally selects the page size, active page, and viewed page. However, you can change the viewed page.

To view the next page

Press CTRL+PGDN, or click the Page-Down button at the bottom of the vertical scroll bar.

To view the preceding page

Press CTRL+PGUP, or click the Page-Up button at the bottom of the vertical scroll bar.

If you select Page under Coupling in the Display dialog box, and data arrives from the host, the viewed page is switched to the active page. This lets you view the page on which something is happening. Otherwise, you continue viewing the current page even though the incoming data may be written to an off-screen page.


VT Status Line

KEA! can display the standard DIGITAL VT status line. With the VT Status Line option in the View dialog box, you can display it above or below the horizontal scroll bar. You also can select not to display the VT status line.

In the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu), you can use the VT status line to display KEA! status, or to let the host display information. If you want to display information on the VT status line, select Indicator under Status Display. If you want the host to display information on the VT status line, select Host. Or, you can select None to disable display of the VT status line. Normally, the host software sets this option.

Note  The status bar is a KEA! feature. It is different from the VT Status Line.


KEA! Status Bar
Status Bar

KEA! uses a status bar at the bottom of the application window to display program status. You can use the Status Bar option in the View dialog box (Options menu) to display or hide this status bar.

During normal emulation, the status bar can contain user-defined buttons, if you selected Buttons on Status Bar in the SmartPad (Options menu) dialog box.

The status bar also displays a Setup button if you have not configured a communication type for the current session. Choosing this button displays the Setup dialog box for the communication type currently selected in the Port field of the Session Setup dialog box. Otherwise, it displays a Connect button if you are not currently connected to a host (equivalent to the Connect command on the Connection menu).

When you highlight a menu command, the status bar displays a short description of that command. While a macro is executing, the status bar displays the macro name. Also, the macro language contains commands you can use to display messages and input prompts on the status bar.

During lengthy operations, the status bar shows the state of an operation. For example, when you transfer a file to the host using the ASCII protocol, the status bar shows the name of the file. It also displays a visual indicator that shows the progress of the transfer.

Note  The status line is a VT feature that KEA! implements. It is different from the status bar.


On-screen VT Keyboard

KEA! provides an image of a VT keyboard on your Windows desktop. You can use your mouse to click these keys. The keys you click are sent to the host just as if you pressed the actual keys on your keyboard. You can use the VT keyboard and your normal keyboard at the same time.

You will find the on-screen VT keyboard useful to access keys you normally cannot easily access on your keyboard because:

•	Your keyboard does not have convenient access to the required functions (some laptops).

•	You have some keys mapped, preventing you from using the original key functions.

You will also find it useful if you want to include keys with special line-editing functions, such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on, when you map your keyboard or mouse, or define a SmartPad or menu.

Note  The key labels of the on-screen keyboard can be changed to French or German labels according to the National Character Set you select in the Terminal General dialog box (Options Terminal menu).

To use the on-screen VT keyboard with a mouse

1	If the keyboard is not already displayed, choose Show Keyboard from the Options menu.
-or-
Click the VT Keyboard button on the toolbar.

  VT Keyboard button

-or-
Choose the Keyboard button in the SmartPad dialog box, the Mouse dialog box, the Menus dialog box, or the Keyboard Mapping dialog box.

2	Click the keys you want sent to the host.

3	To remove the on-screen VT keyboard, choose Show Keyboard from the Options menu again, or choose Close from the on-screen keyboard's Control menu (top left corner of the keyboard), or use the toolbar button.

Note  If you display the on-screen keyboard using the Keyboard button in a dialog box, it is automatically removed when you close the dialog box.

To use the on-screen VT keyboard without a mouse

You can use the on-screen VT keyboard without a mouse if you display the keyboard from one of the mapping dialog boxes.

1	In the SmartPad dialog box, the Mouse dialog box, the Menus dialog box, or the Keyboard Mapping dialog box, select Keyboard to activate the on-screen VT keyboard.

2	Use the ARROW keys to select a key.

3	Press the SPACE BAR to insert the selected key.

4	Press ENTER to leave the on-screen VT keyboard.


SmartPad

A SmartPad is an area of the window that contains a display of user-defined buttons. You can display the SmartPad in a separate window, or on the status bar. The status bar can display only one line of the SmartPad.

You choose a button by clicking it with the mouse. If a button's caption contains an underlined character, you can also choose the button by holding down the SHIFT and ALT keys as you press the key that corresponds to the underlined character.

You can map the buttons to character strings, VT functions, and macros. You also can define a button so that it displays another SmartPad. You can configure the width of the buttons, their markings, and position of the SmartPad.

To define SmartPad dimensions

1	From the Options menu, choose SmartPad.

2	In the  SmartPad dialog box, ensure that the Buttons on Status Bar option is cleared.

3	Under Rows, type the number of rows you want to appear on your SmartPad.

4	Under Columns, type the number of buttons per row.

5	Under Button Width, type the size in number of characters for each button.

To define a button on the SmartPad

1	From the Options menu, choose SmartPad.

2	In the SmartPad dialog box under Caption, type the characters you want to appear on the face of the button. If you insert an ampersand (&) before one of the characters, that character appears underlined. You can choose that button by holding down the SHIFT and ALT keys as you press the key corresponding to the underlined character. For example, the caption D&ate would appear on the button as Date. You could choose the button by clicking it, or by pressing SHIFT+ALT+A.

3	From the Map To list, select either Sequence to map strings and VT functions to the button, or Macro to map macro statements.

4	Under Value, type the sequence or macro statements you want to map to this button (255 characters maximum). Use the ARROW and BACKSPACE keys to edit what you type.

5	Choose Down. Your button assignment is displayed in the List of Buttons box, and the cursor is placed in the Caption field. You can define more buttons.

6	Choose View Buttons.

7	Choose Done. The SmartPad dialog box is closed, and the buttons you defined are displayed in a separate window or, if you selected Buttons on Status Bar, on the status bar.

Note  A macro filename that starts with a number will not execute if you simply type its name under Value. Instead, use the Run function. For example, to execute the macro file 123NAME.KTM, type Run("123NAME").
Whe you type information under Value, you can also select keys from the on-screen keyboard. To display the on-screen keyboard, choose the Keyboard button. To change focus to the on-screen keyboard, simply click in the keyboard window.
If you do not have a mouse, use the Keyboard button to switch to the on-screen Keyboard. Then, use the ARROW keys to highlight the key you want, and select that key by pressing the SPACEBAR. Press ENTER to switch back to the SmartPad dialog box.
To include keys with special line-editing functions, such as ARROW keys, BACKSPACE, ENTER, and so on; or keys you cannot access on your keyboard; or VT functions or combinations, you must select them in the on-screen keyboard.
If you clear the Buttons on Status Bar option to display your SmartPad in its own window, you can change your SmartPad's location on the desktop by dragging it with your mouse to the desired location.

To delete a SmartPad button

1	From the Options menu, choose SmartPad.

2	In the SmartPad dialog box under List of Buttons, select the button you want to delete.

3	Choose Delete.


Creating Additional SmartPads

You can define a button to display another SmartPad. Before you do this, you must divide the buttons you defined into two or more groups. When you divide your button definitions into groups, only one group is displayed at a time. To display a different group, the displayed group must include a button that displays another SmartPad.

To divide buttons into groups

1	From the Options menu, choose SmartPad.

2	In the  SmartPad dialog box under Caption, type a label for the group.

3	Under Map To, select Label of Group.

4	Use Move Up and Move Down to move the group label to the start of the list of buttons you want to include in that group.

5	To label the next group, select choose Down until you have selected the blank line under List of Buttons. Repeat steps 2 - 4.

6	After you label all the groups, choose Done.

To define a button that displays another SmartPad

1	From the Options menu, choose SmartPad.

2	In the SmartPad dialog box under Caption, type a button name.

3	Under Map To, select Next Group, Prev Group, or Goto Group. If you select Goto Group, also type the destination group label under Value.

4	Choose Done.


132 Columns

Each character size has a narrow 132-column variant. When you change between 80 and 132 columns, the width of each character changes. You can use the horizontal scroll bar to see all the columns, if some are not visible.

You can select the 132-column character size under Columns in the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu).

Note  If you enable History before you change between 80 and 132 columns, any information on the VT page when you make the change will be retained in the History buffer, even though the page is cleared.


Cursor Style

You can change the characteristics of the text cursor using the Cursor checkboxes in the Display dialog box.

To change the properties of the text cursor

1	From the Options Terminal menu, select Display.

2	Select from Show, Block, and Blink under Cursor.

3	Choose OK.

To keep the text cursor in view

1	From the Options Terminal menu, select Display.

2	Select one or more of Horizontal, Vertical, and Page under Coupling. KEA! pans or changes the viewed page as necessary when you move the text cursor.


Overview of Communication Ports

KEA! supports many communications methods, from serial connections—as the DIGITAL VT terminal does, to network connections such as LAT and TCP/IP.

You must install the appropriate network software for your communication method on your personal computer. In some cases, special interface drivers are needed. Most of these are installed when you install KEA!.

When you create a new session (on the File menu, choose New Session), you select a Port type (communication method) in the Session Setup dialog box. Or, if you want to change the Port type in an existing session, the same list is offered in the Communications dialog box (on the Options menu, choose Communications). In both these dialog boxes, a button labeled Configure (or Setup) lets you select more setup options for that port type. If the button is unavailable, support for that port type has not been installed.

The following Port types are supported:

•	Serial:  Connection through your computer's COM port.

•	Modem:  Modem communication using Windows 95 built-in modem management facility.

•	LAT:  Digital Equipment Corporation's network protocol for terminal access using Ethernet.

•	Telnet:  Terminal access to hosts using TCP/IP.

•	KEAlink-MSU:  Allows multiple sessions to share a single serial line.

•	NetWare for DEC Access:  Connection to a LAT host without having a LAT protocol stack on your computer.

You can have more than one session on the screen at the same time. Your hardware or network software might restrict the maximum number of sessions of a particular type. You can set a maximum number of concurrent sessions by adding a value to your Registry.

For example, if you use a Serial port, you can run only one session at a time on each COM port. If you want to run multiple sessions, you could configure each one to a different COM port, or use the KEAlink-MSU method. However, if you use a LAT network connection, the network software lets you connect to the same or different host services with multiple KEA! sessions.


About Serial Ports

You can use your computer's serial (COM) port to communicate directly with a host using a modem or terminal server just like a standard DIGITAL VT terminal. You must configure the serial port to the appropriate settings for your environment.

Session Support Utility (SSU [image] Utility) is a DIGITAL-defined mechanism that provides multiple simultaneous sessions on a single serial connection. Using KEAlink MSU version 1.10 or later, and connected to a host computer or terminal server that has an SSU utility, you can run KEA! in up to six windows, all sharing the same serial port.

The actual number of simultaneous connections depends on the the maximum number KEAlink MSU supports (six) and the maximum number supported by the SSU utility you connect to.

You can use these multiple sessions as if each were separately and directly connected to the VAX. The performance of each session depends on the activity of the other sessions, because all the sessions are sharing the same physical link.

  Using a Serial Port

  Using an SSU Utility Port

  About Modem


Using a Serial Port

To make a Serial Port connection

1	If you want to create a new session, on the File menu choose New Session. After you name the new session, the Session Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Port list select Serial.
-or-
If you want to change the connection of the existing session, on the Options menu choose Communications. In the Communications dialog box select Serial.

2	If you want to change the Serial Port parameters, in either of the above dialog boxes choose the button labeled Configure (or Setup). The Serial Port Setup dialog box is displayed.

Windows Registry options

  Registry option for Limiting Serial Ports


About Modem

If you select Modem under Port in the Communications dialog box, you can use the Windows 95 built-in modem management facility to configure and dial a modem. This method is also available if you are using Windows NT version 4.0 or later. Alternatively, you can manually connect to a modem if you select Serial in the Communications dialog box.

  Using Modem


Using Modem

To make a Modem connection

1	If you want to create a new session, on the File menu choose New Session. After you name the new session, the Session Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Port list select Modem.
-or-
If you want to change the connection of the existing session, on the Options menu choose Communications. In the Communications dialog box select Modem.

2	To change the Modem settings, in either of the above dialog boxes choose the button labeled Configure (or Setup). The Modem Setup dialog box is displayed.

3	In the Modem Setup dialog box, supply the information for the number you want to dial.

4	From the Connection menu, choose Connect.

Note  Alternatively, you can use your Dialing Directory to select and dial the number you want to call.


About LAT

KEA! supports DEC's PATHWORKS for Windows 95, Meridian Technology Corporation's SuperLAT for Windows 95 or Windows NT, and KEAlink LAT for Windows 95 or Windows NT.

KEAlink LAT is a true 32-bit implementation of Digital Equipment Corporation's Local Area Transport (LAT) protocol that provides access to DEC hosts. Both the KEAlink LAT protocol service and the KEAlink LAT protocol driver must be started before you can make a LAT connection. For complete information on installing and starting KEAlink LAT, please refer to your KEAlink LAT documentation.

  Using LAT

  Troubleshooting LAT


Using LAT

To make a LAT connection

1	If you want to create a new session, on the File menu choose New Session. After you name the new session, the Session Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Port list select LAT.
-or-
If you want to change the connection of the existing session, on the Options menu choose Communications. In the Communications dialog box select LAT.

2	In either of the above dialog boxes, choose the button labeled Configure (or Setup). The LAT Setup dialog box is displayed. If the button is dimmed, support for LAT has not been installed.

3	In Service name, select the name of the LAT service you want to use.


Troubleshooting LAT

The Service Name you selected is not displayed under Service Name in the LAT Setup dialog box.

The LAT protocol provides the list of services. If you examine this list soon after starting your system, all the services you expect might not appear. This happens because LAT needs a few minutes to learn all of the available services. Wait a few moments, then examine the list again. Your expected service should appear. In some cases, the list is not large enough to display the names of all services available on the network. Thus the service you want might never appear in this list.

To correct this, you can increase the maximum number of learned services in the Service Table for your LAT procotol. For information on this procedure, refer to your network software documentation.

LAT and PATHWORKS Version 1.0 for Windows 95 and multiple sessions

PATHWORKS Version 1.0 for Windows 95 containing LAT 1.0 does not reliably support more than one session. Digital Equipment Corporation will be releasing a patch for LAT (1.0a) that supports more than one session. Contact Digital Equipment Corporation for more information on the patch.

LAT and PATHWORKS Version 1.0 for Windows 95 and file transfer

PATHWORKS LAT Version 1.0 for Windows 95 has difficulty continuously transmitting data to the host. If PATHWORKS runs low on data buffers, the session can permanently lose its ability to transmit to the host. To prevent this problem, KEA! will incorporate a delay into the transmitted data if it detects that PATHWORKS is running low on buffers.

The default value for the delay is three (3) seconds. You can change the value of the delay by adding the following value to the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\Compatibility key in your Windows Registry database:

LATTxDelay : DWORD : n

where n equals the number of milliseconds to delay (e.g., 3000 decimal = 3 seconds).

When the default three second delay is incorporated, all file transfers work satisfactorily but transfer more slowly. You can obtain improved throughput by adjusting specific file transfer parameters as follows:

Zmodem:  Set the Zmodem window size to two (2).

Kermit:  Set the following host parameters:

Window = 7

Receive Packet = 250

Block = 3

Contact Digital Equipment Corporation to find out whether this problem has been corrected in your PATHWORKS release. If it has, you can set the delay to zero (0).


About TCP/IP (Telnet)

Telnet provides terminal access to hosts using TCP/IP. In order to use this connection method, you must have a Windows Sockets compliant TCP/IP protocol installed on your personal computer. Both Windows 95 and Windows NT supply a TCP/IP protocol that complies with this standard.

Select Windows Sockets under TCP Type in the Telnet Setup dialog box.

  Using TCP/IP (Telnet)

  Troubleshooting Telnet


Using TCP/IP (Telnet)

To make a TCP/IP connection

1	If you want to create a new Telnet session, on the File menu choose New Session. After you name the new session, the Session Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Port list select Telnet.
-or-
If you want to change the existing session to Telnet, on the Options menu choose Communications. In the Communications dialog box select Telnet.

2	In either of the above dialog boxes, choose the button labeled Configure (or Setup). The Telnet Setup dialog box is displayed.

3	Under TCP Type select Windows Sockets.

4	Under Host, type the name or network address of the host to which you want to connect. If you type the path to your hosts file in the Hosts File box, a list of host names will be displayed.

5	If necessary, choose Advanced to display the Telnet Advanced dialog box and change other Telnet configuration options.

6	If necessary, choose Proxies to display the Proxies dialog box and configure your Telnet proxy.

Note  If you use a Telnet proxy manually (that is, without configuring the proxy in the Proxies dialog box), ensure that the Initiate Option Negotiation option in the Telnet Advanced dialog box is cleared. Otherwise, KEA! tries to negotiate options with the proxy rather than with the remote host, and this might cause the connection to fail or the Telnet options to be set up incorrectly.

7	Choose OK. When KEA! returns to the emulation window, it should be connected to the requested host.


Telnet Options Supported

KEA! implements the following Telnet options as described:

Binary (RFC 856)
Runs in binary mode in both directions if you request it.

Suppress Go Ahead (RFC 858)
Does not send Go Ahead signals, and ignores received ones. However, it lets the remote system negotiate whatever state of Go Ahead it wants. If you let KEA! Telnet initiate option negotiation, it asks the remote system to suppress sending Go Ahead signals.

Echo (RFC 857)
Supports either local or remote host echo of data you type at the keyboard. However, it does not echo network traffic back to the remote host. If you let KEA! Telnet initiate option negotiation, and disable Local Echo in the Terminal General dialog box, it asks the remote host to echo.

Timing mark (RFC 860)
Does not initiate timing marks, but it does respond to them.

Terminal type (RFC 1091)
Fully supports the latest terminal type RFC (1091). When first asked, it responds with the currently configured terminal type. On subsequent requests, it cycles through the complete list, restarting after sending the last type twice.

Window size (RFC 1073)
Uses the actual size (80x24 or 132x24) in VT modes.

Terminal speed (RFC 1079)
Always uses 9600 baud for transmit and receive.

Remote flow control (RFC 1080)
Lets you set this option, but ignores it. This option only applies when you use a terminal connected to a system running the client Telnet.

Linemode (RFC 1116)
Implements all the common non-standard ways of switching between line mode and character mode.


Troubleshooting Telnet

•	Is TCPIP.EXE loaded?

•	Can you do a DOS ping to a host IP address. If not, TCP is not configured correctly.

•	Can you do a DOS ping to a host name. If not, the Domain Name Server is not configured correctly, or the hosts file is not found.

•	If the .DLLs are not found, the Setup button in the Communications dialog box will be dimmed.

•	Examine the Registry Sockets option.

•	If you still have problems, contact Attachmate Customer Support.


Using a SSU Utility Port
Using an SSU Utility Port

Using KEAlink MSU version 1.10 or later, and connected to a host computer or terminal server that has an SSU utility, you can run KEA! in up to six windows, all sharing the same serial port.

There are a number of different SSU utility server implementations. Yours could be:

•	SSU utility software on the VAX/VMS system, or

•	SSU utility implemented within your terminal server.

In order to use KEAlink MSU, you must install KEA! before you install KEAlink MSU.

Note  When installing KEAlink MSU with Windows 95, you must run Setup from the WINDOWS subdirectory of the distribution disk. Do not run Setup from either the NT subdirectory or the root directory of the MSU installation disk.

SSU Utility Software on the VAX

Make sure the SSU utility has been installed on your VAX. Consult your VAX systems administrator to verify this.

To start multiple SSU utility sessions

1	If you want to create a new session, on the File menu choose New Session. After you name the new session, the Session Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Port list select KEAlink-MSU.
-or-
If you want to change the connection of the existing session, on the Options menu choose Communications. In the Communications dialog box select KEAlink-MSU.

2	In either of the above dialog boxes, choose the button labeled Configure (or Setup). The MSU Serial Port Setup dialog box is displayed. If the button is dimmed, support for KEAlink-MSU has not been installed on your personal computer.

3	Login to your VAX in the usual way.

4	When you reach a DCL command prompt ($), type the command

SSU ENABLE

Multiple sessions are now enabled and you should again see the DCL command prompt ($).

5	You can start additional KEA!s configured to the same SSU utility port and you will see the VAX/VMS login prompt as you start each one.

SSU Utility within Your Terminal Server

Many terminal servers implement the SSU utility within the server itself. You do not need an SSU utility installed on the host.

To start multiple SSU utility sessions

1	If you want to create a new session, on the File menu choose New Session. After you name the new session, the Session Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Port list select KEAlink-MSU.
-or-
If you want to change the connection of the existing session, on the Options menu choose Communications. In the Communications dialog box select KEAlink-MSU.

2	In either of the above dialog boxes, choose the button labeled Configure (or Setup). The MSU Serial Port Setup dialog box is displayed. If the button is dimmed, support for KEAlink-MSU has not been installed on your personal computer.

3	Login to your terminal server. Enter the command to enable multiple sessions. For example, on a Digital Equipment terminal server, the command is

SET PORTS MULTISESSION ENABLED

4	Login to your host in the usual way.

5	You can start additional KEA!s configured to the same SSU utility port and connect to the same or different hosts.

  Troubleshooting MSU Serial Communications

  Registry option for Limiting Serial Ports


Troubleshooting MSU Serial Communications

Restoring SSU Utility Sessions

Because the SSU utility does not use an error-correcting protocol, line interruptions can cause sessions to lose synchronization. If you notice a problem, try using the Restore Sessions command on the Connection menu to resynchronize the SSU utility sessions.

When sessions are interrupted by a power failure or similar problem, KEA! or the host might lose the context of the current session. After communication is regained, you can use the Restore Sessions command to restore the context of interrupted sessions without cancelling the sessions and starting over again.

  Using an SSU Utility Port

  Registry option for Limiting Serial Ports


About NetWare for LAT
About NetWare for DEC Access

KEA! supports NetWare for DEC Access (or NetWare for LAT), a Novell gateway product that lets you connect to a LAT host (typically a VAX) without having a LAT protocol stack on your personal computer. Currently only IPX/SPX connections to the NetWare for DEC Access server are supported.

Operation relies on parameters which are set by your system administrator. If you cannot connect as you expect, see your system administrator first.

KEA! supports NetWare for DEC Access with Windows 95 and Windows NT version 3.51 or later.

Before you can use NetWare for DEC Access with Windows 95, you must install the IPX/SPX compatible protocol, a component of Windows 95. This component is typically not installed unless you do so.

Before you can use NetWare for DEC Access with Windows NT, you must install NWLINK, a component of Windows NT. This component is typically not installed unless you do so.

SPX support must be loaded on the workstation. To avoid problems in a low-speed WAN environment, you might want to set the client parameters in the NET.CFG file on the workstation. Novell recommends that you set the protocol stack SPX parameters in the NET.CFG file as follows:

protocol stack spx

   abort timeout 1080

   listen timeout 216

   retry count 40

   verify timeout 108

For more information on this file, see the NetWare system administration guide for the version of NetWare that you have installed.

  Using NetWare for DEC Access

  Troubleshooting NetWare for DEC Access


Using NetWare for LAT
Using NetWare for DEC Access

To make a NetWare for DEC Access connection

1	If you want to create a new session, on the File menu choose New Session. After you name the new session, the Session Setup dialog box is displayed. In the Port list select NetWare for LAT.
-or-
If you want to change the connection of the existing session, on the Options menu choose Communications. In the Communications dialog box select NetWare for LAT.

2	In either of the above dialog boxes, choose the button labeled Configure (or Setup). The NetWare for LAT Setup dialog box is displayed. If the button is dimmed, NetWare for DEC Access support has not been installed.

3	In the respective boxes, enter your Userid and Password. Or you can select Use NetWare Login Name On Default Server.

4	Select the NetWare Server you want to use as your LAT gateway.

5	Optionally select a Port Pool. (These might not be used in your environment.)

6	Select Display Nodes In Service Name List. Otherwise, you will see only services, not nodes.

7	A list of nodes and the offered services appears in the Service Name box. Select the service to which you want to connect.

8	Choose OK.


Troubleshooting NetWare for LAT
Troubleshooting NetWare for DEC Access

To test your NetWare for DEC Access connection, you can run the DOS based program TTY, which provides a crude connection.

If security has been set up, you must have an account on the NetWare for DEC Access server.

SPX parameters might require adjustment at both server and client.


Using the Phone Feature

If you use a communication method with which you can use a modem, such as Serial, KEAlink MSU, or Modem, you can use the Phone feature to create and maintain one or more personal dialing directories.

In the Dialing Directory dialog box, you select a Listing from one of these Directories, and choose Dial, KEA! can use modem commands to dial the number associated with the selected item.

To create Phone directory listings

1	From the Connection menu, choose Phone.

2	In the Dialing Directory dialog box, choose the New button.

3	In the Dial Entry dialog box, enter a name and number pair you want in your Phone directory. The other options in this box affect only the current listing. Choose OK.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for additional listings.

5	In the Dialing Directory dialog box, choose Save and then Exit.

To dial a number from the Phone directory

1	From the Connection menu, choose Phone.

2	Choose a Dialing Directory from the drop-down list.

3	Under Directory Listing, select a listing.

4	Choose Dial. KEA! uses your modem to dial the number of this listing.

To edit or delete a listing in the Phone directory

1	From the Connection menu, choose Phone.

2	Under Directory Listing, select a listing.

3	Choose Edit or Delete.

To set parameters for dialing numbers on your modem

1	From the Connection menu, choose Phone.

2	In the Dialing Directory dialog box, choose Modem Config.

3	In the Modem Configuration dialog box, select the desired options.


Slowing the Transmission Rate

In many cases, hosts transmit data faster than they can receive data. Sending large amounts of data to the host with commands such as Paste can cause data loss. To avoid losing data, use the option Limit Transmit Rate in the Communications dialog box (Options menu).

This does not change the baud rate.

The rate of sending files by the ASCII method has its own transmit limit, in the ASCII Options dialog box.


ANSI-BBS Mode

ANSI-BBS mode, an operating mode that supports DOS ANSI.SYS functionality, is suitable for many BBS hosts. In this mode, your session works as it does in the VT400 modes, with some exceptions. These exceptions are as follows:

The sequence Esc [ s restores the cursor. (A VT420 uses this sequence to define a rectangular region.)

The sequence Esc J clears the entire screen. (A VT420 uses this sequence to provide several clearing options.)

This mode uses the 8-bit IBM character set instead of a DIGITAL character set. Therefore, DIGITAL VT 8-bit control functions are not available. To access control functions, the host must use the equivalent 7-bit sequences.

KEA! interprets keystrokes as ISO Latin-1 characters. It translates them to the equivalent IBM character before sending them to the host. This includes all 7-bit and 8-bit characters. This translation is performed even if you use the ALT+keypad method of generating special characters. Consequently, there are many IBM characters you cannot send from the keyboard because they have no ISO equivalents. This translation is not performed when you map strings to a key using KEA!'s mapping feature. If you need to send special IBM characters to your host, map the special character to a key on your keyboard.


Entering ANSI-BBS Mode

ANSI-BBS mode is suitable for many BBS hosts.

To enter ANSI-BBS mode

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose General to display the Terminal General dialog box.

3	From the Mode drop-down list, select ANSI-BBS.


ANSI Locator Mode

When the host enables ANSI Locator mode, you can specify screen locations and send locator position reports and locator device status reports (DSRs) back to the host.

After the host sends the control sequence to enable ANSI Locator mode, by default the cursor changes to a small crosshair, and the PC tracks the locator locally, without host intervention. You can override the crosshair cursor, and use your Windows system cursor instead, by adding a value to your Windows Registry.

You can use your mouse as a VT340 locator device to send position reports to the host. Both One Shot mode and Multiple mode are supported. KEA! exits One Shot mode after a single position report is sent to the host. In Multiple mode, many position reports can be sent to the host. Only the host can exit Multiple mode.


Sending an ANSI Locator Report to the Host

To move the ANSI Locator mode input cursor and send a locator report to the host

1	When the host activates ANSI Locator mode, use your mouse to move the cursor to the desired position.

2	Press a mouse button to send a locator report to the host.

Note  Locator reports to the host include the event that initiated the report, the current state of the locator keys, the page number, and the coordinates of the input cursor at the time of the event.
KEA! exits One Shot mode after a single position report is sent to the host. In Multiple mode you can send many position reports before the host exits Multiple mode.


Using your Mouse as a VT340 Locator Device

You normally use a mouse for text and graphics selection. However, when KEA! is in ANSI Locator mode or graphics input mode, the mouse emulates a VT340 locator device. You can use the mouse to move the input cursor. The mouse buttons imitate the VT340 mouse buttons as follows:

To imitate	Press

Button 1	Left mouse button

Button 2	Right mouse button

Button 3	CTRL with left mouse button

Button 4	CTRL with right mouse button


Printing Overview

KEA! provides all the VT printing functions: Print Screen, Auto Print mode, and Printer Controller mode.

In addition, you can copy selected text and graphics, the KEA! window, or the entire screen to the clipboard. Then, you can paste the clipboard contents to any application that can print the copied area.

  Configuring a Printer

  Printing Text with a Keypress

  Printing Graphics Overview

  Printing Graphics with a Keypress

  Printing Text and Graphics with a Command


Printing Graphics Overview

You can print the text and graphics displayed on the screen with a command, or by pressing a key.

The image is scaled to fill the printed page, maintaining the correct aspect ratio. You cannot directly control the size of the hardcopy. You can select portrait or landscape orientation in the Print Setup dialog box.

The options under Graphics Printing in the Printer dialog box let you select whether to print the background, whether to print in color, and whether to reverse the light/dark areas of the image.

Using KEA!, you can print graphics images from a bitmap of the screen, or from the saved display list. To allow printing, one or both of the Backing Store methods, Bitmap or Display List, must be selected in the Graphics dialog box. The Backing Store method must be selected before you display the images you want to print.

Note  This feature is only available in the graphics version of KEA!.

Printing from a Bitmap

Most printer drivers support bitmap printing. The screen image resolution limits the printed image's resolution. Text and graphics are scaled the same ratio to fill the output page, maintaining the alignment of text and graphics.

To select bitmap printing

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose Graphics.

3	Select either (or both) of the options under Backing Store in the Graphics dialog box.

4	If you selected Display List in the preceding step, from the Options menu, choose Terminal, and then Printer. In the Printer dialog box, under Graphics Printing, select Use Bitmap.

Printing from the Display List

When you select Display List printing, KEA! sends Windows graphics drawing commands from the Display List to the printer driver. This method of printing graphics usually produces a higher resolution than the Bitmap method. However, text and graphics might not be scaled exactly the same, causing some misalignment between text and graphics on the full-page output.

Windows expects that both video drivers and printer drivers support graphics drawing commands. Unfortunately, many printer drivers (including most PostScript drivers) do not fully support them. If Display List printing does not work for your printer, try the Bitmap method.

To select display list printing

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose Graphics.

3	Select the Display List option under Backing Store in the Graphics dialog box.

4	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

5	From the Terminal menu, choose Printer.

6	Clear the Use Bitmap option under Graphics Printing in the Printer dialog box.


Configuring a Printer

KEA! uses standard Windows printer support. That is, you can only use printers for which you installed a Windows driver.

DIGITAL supplies Windows drivers for its printers. Alternatively, many of these printers have industry-standard modes with which you can use a standard Windows-supplied driver.

To set up a printer

1	Install your printer using the Windows Control Panel, if you have not done so.

2	Choose Print Setup on KEA!'s File menu.

3	Select a printer from the list of installed printers. If required, choose Options to configure the printer with Windows setup.

4	Choose Printer on KEA!'s Options menu.

5	In the Printer dialog box, choose the specific options for printing, such as font, termination character, and so on.

6	Choose OK.

Note  The font you select here is used only for printing; it is not displayed on the screen.


Auto Print

The host controls Auto Print mode. In this mode, the data appears on the screen and the printer. KEA! prints each line of text from the screen when it receives a line feed, form feed, or vertical tab. Typically, you use this mode to log screen data.

Usually, KEA! enters Auto Print mode on a control sequence sent from the host. You can turn it on manually by selecting Auto Print in the Printer dialog box (Options Terminal menu).

To automatically print screen data (Auto Print)

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose Printer.

3	In the Printer dialog box under Mode, select Auto Print.


Printer Controller

In Printer Controller mode, data received from the host is printed without being displayed on the screen (pass-through mode). Normally, the host selects Printer Controller mode without any user action. However, you can switch to it manually by selecting the Controller option in the Printer dialog box (Options Terminal menu).

A host can cause KEA! to enter and exit Printer Controller mode several times during a print operation, even when printing on the same page. Under Close Print Job Idle Timer in the Printer dialog box, you can select a large interval of idle time to gather these small print jobs into one larger print job.

To print data without displaying it on the screen (Printer Controller Mode)

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose Printer.

3	In the Printer dialog box under Mode, select Controller.

4	If, under Controller Mode, you also select Emulate ANSI Printer, KEA! assumes the host sends LA210 ANSI printer sequences and translates them to equivalent Windows printer functions. This is useful if you print to a printer for which the host doesn't generate output (for example, a PostScript printer). Otherwise, KEA! assumes the host is configured for the specific printer attached, and sends all data to the printer without translation.


Printing Text with a Keypress

You can print the current page or the scrolling region by pressing just one key.

When you print with a keypress, the values you select in the Printer dialog box affect how the screen display is printed. The values in the Print dialog box have no effect when you print with a keypress.

To print text with a keypress

Press one of the following keys:

From Keyboard	Press

Enhanced 	F2

DIGITAL LK250	PRINTSCREEN (in the F2 position)

DIGITAL LK450	F2

You can cancel printing by choosing the Cancel button on the status bar.

This feature is not available on a PowerStation keyboard. To print text you must use the Print command on the File menu.


Printing Graphics with a Keypress

Printing graphics by pressing a key prints only the viewed portion of the image.

Options in the Printer dialog box control how the screen display is printed. Select None or Form Feed under Terminator.

Options under Graphics Printing in the Printer dialog box let you select whether to print the background, whether to print in color, and whether to reverse the light/dark areas of the image.

Note  This feature is only available in the graphics version of KEA!.

To print graphics with a keypress

Press one of the following keys:

From Keyboard	Press

Enhanced	SHIFT+F2

DIGITAL LK250	SHIFT+PRINTSCREEN (in the F2 position)

DIGITAL LK450	SHIFT+F2

You can cancel printing by choosing the Cancel button on the status bar.

This feature is not available on a PowerStation keyboard. To print graphics you must use the Print command on the File menu.


Printing Text or Graphics with a Command

You can print portions of the VT page(s) using the Print command on the File menu or by choosing the Print button on the Toolbar. You can choose to print a selected area of the screen, the viewed portion of the current page (window), or the entire current page, or all the pages.

The image is scaled to fill the printed page, maintaining the correct aspect ratio. You cannot directly control the size of the hardcopy, but you can select portrait or landscape orientation.

In the Printer dialog box under Terminator, you can select whether to send a Form Feed at the end of each print operation and force each print onto a separate page.

If you are printing graphics, you can use the options under Graphics Printing in the Printer dialog box to select whether to print the background, whether to print in color, and whether to reverse the light and dark areas of the image. The graphics feature is only available with KEA! 340.

To print the screen using the Print command

1	From the File menu, choose Print, or choose the Print button on the toolbar.

  Print button

2	In the Print dialog box, select one of the options under Extent.

Select	To
Selection	Print the selected area.
Window	Print what appears in the emulation window.
Page	Print the current VT page or, if in 401X mode, print the entire Tektronix image.
All Pages	Print all VT pages. The All Pages option does not apply to graphics.
3	Select Text or Graphics under Format.

4	Choose OK.

Note  To print the text only in a selected area of the screen, just select an area and click the Print button on the toolbar. A dialog box is not displayed.
When you print with a command, the value you select under Extent in the Print dialog box controls how much of the page is printed. When you print with a keypress, the value under Extent in the Printer dialog box controls how much of the page is printed.


Windows Copying

If you want to send text to the host, you can drag-and-drop selected text from another application to an active KEA! window, or you can use the Paste command on the Edit menu to send the text to the host.  You can also select text in the emulation window and drag-and-drop it on another OLE-enabled application.

Using the regular Windows procedures, you can copy an active window, or your entire desktop to the clipboard. Then, to print this bitmap image, you might paste the clipboard contents into a Windows application that can print it.

The key you press depends on whether or not KEA! is the active window. If your active window is a dialog box (even a KEA! dialog box), or a window in another application, KEA! is not active.

To copy the KEA! window to the Clipboard

1	Make your KEA! window your active window.

2	Press one of the following keys:

From Keyboard	Press

PowerStation	ALT+PRINTSCREEN  or  ALT+PF4/SYS

Enhanced	ALT+PRINTSCREEN

DIGITAL LK250	ALT+PF4

DIGITAL LK450	ALT+F18

To copy the active window to the Clipboard when KEA! is not active

Press ALT+PRINTSCREEN.

To copy the entire desktop to the Clipboard (KEA! is active)

Press one of the following keys:

From Keyboard	Press

PowerStation	PRINTSCREEN  or  PF4/SYS

Enhanced	PRINTSCREEN

DIGITAL LK250	SHIFT+PF4

DIGITAL LK450	F18

To copy the entire desktop to the Clipboard when KEA! is not active

Press PRINTSCREEN.


Flushing the Print Queue

KEA! and Windows buffer printer data. For most Windows printer drivers, closing the printer prints the buffered data, and might eject the page. You have two methods for closing the printer driver: the Close Print Job Idle Timer option in the Printer dialog box, (Options Terminal menu) and the Close Print Job command on the File menu.

The timer controls whether KEA! sends your print jobs to a printing device soon after you request printing, waits for a time-out, or waits until you force printer output. When the timer expires (printer data has been buffered and no further data is sent for the given timer interval), it performs the same function as the Close Print Job command. The exact effect depends on other factors such as spooler operations, network operation, and so on. In general, it prints all the buffered printer data.

To set the interval of idle time after which to print buffered data

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose Printer.

3	Under Close Print Job Idle Timer, select a value between 2 seconds and 5 minutes, or Manual.

Note  The selection you make under Close Print Job Idle Timer affects all modes of printing: print screen, auto print, and printer controller modes.
If, under Close Print Job Idle Timer you select Manual, the timer is disabled. When you want to send accumulated print data to the printer, choose Close Print Job from the File menu.
If you print to a shared or network printer, you can save all your print jobs and print them at the end of your session. Just set the idle time to a very large interval. Otherwise, you might find pages from other users intermingled with yours, or you might have excess banner pages. If you need to force output to the printer, choose Close Print Job, or exit from KEA!.
If you have a single use personal printer, set a small timer value. Each print job is sent quickly to the printer.


File Transfer Overview

You can send and receive information between your personal computer and host by transferring files. The Shuttle command on the Transfer menu lets you select multiple files to transfer in either or both directions.

If you want to transfer files individually, you can select the file transfer method you want to use with the Options command (Transfer menu) and then transfer each file using the Send and Receive commands (Transfer menu).

You can also send a file to the host using whichever transfer method you have selected by dragging the file from the Windows Explorer, My Computer, or the NT File Manager, and dropping it on an active KEA! session.

Note  You cannot transfer a file by dropping it on a KEA! icon. If you drop a file on a KEA! icon, KEA! attempts to open the file as a session.

KEA! supports six transfer protocols. They are:

ASCII	Send a file from the personal computer to the host as if you were typing the information. The Capture command writes data received from the host to the specified file.

Kermit	Transfer text and binary files using the Kermit error correcting file transfer protocol. The host must also run Kermit.

X/Y/ZModem	Transfer text and binary files using the Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem error correcting file transfer protocol. The host must also run the corresponding protocol.

FTP	Transfer text and binary files using the FTP file transfer protocol. An FTP connection is made outside of the current terminal connection. The host must have an FTP server.

To choose the file transfer method

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Options,

-or-

Choose Configure from the Transmit, Receive, or Shuttle dialog box.

2	In the File Transfer dialog box, under Protocol, select the file transfer method you want to use.

3	Select the other common options.

4	Choose Options to display the Options dialog box for the transfer protocol you selected, and configure options specific to that transfer method.

Copy and Paste can also be used to transfer data between KEA! (or other Windows applications) and a host. Or, you can drag-and-drop selected text from another application onto an active KEA! window to send the text to the host.

KEA! supports text data translation when you transfer text files.

  Transferring Files with Shuttle

  Controlling Host Behavior during File Transfer

  ASCII File Transfer Protocol

  About Kermit

  About X/Y/ZModem

  About FTP


Controlling Host Behavior during File Transfer

If you use the ASCII, X/Y/ZModem, or Kermit file transfer protocol, there are options available that you can use to instruct the host to start or end the host side of a file transfer.

You can use the Start Host Receiving and End Host Receiving options in the ASCII Options dialog box; or the Start Host Receiving and Start Host Sending options in the XModem Options, YModem Options, ZModem Options, or Kermit options dialog box; to type macro commands that instruct the host to start the host side of a file transfer. Macro statements can be typed directly in any of these fields; however, if you require a more complex macro, you can type the macro filename followed by paretheses. For example, to use a macro file called START.KTM, type START() in the appropriate Start Host field.

Predefined variables are provided for you to use in these macros. HostFileName contains the value in the Host File field. If this field is null, LocalFileList contains the specified local filename, if any. Server is True if remote Kermit is a Server (Kermit only). FileType contains one of the following values specifying the mode in which to transfer files: Xfer_Binary, Xfer_Automatic, Xfer_Text; only the Xfer_Text value is available for ASCII file transfer.


Transferring Files with Shuttle

Using Shuttle makes transferring files between your computer and a host remarkably easy. You can display directory listings of both personal computer and host directories. You can select individual files or groups of files on your computer that you want to transfer to the host. You can also select files in host directories to be transferred to your PC. You can enter file patterns to filter certain local or host files.

Files intended for transferring appear in a transfer list. When you have finished adding to this list, you begin transferring the files by choosing the Transfer button. Shuttle supports the Kermit, Xmodem, Ymodem or Zmodem, and FTP protocols. Your host must support the protocol you choose. If you are transferring files with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem, the host must be ready to send or receive files before you can use Shuttle. To use FTP for file transfers, you must be able to make a TCP/IP connection.

Before using Shuttle, you need to know the operating system your host uses (for example, UNIX or VMS) and the transfer protocols the host supports.

  Using Shuttle with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

  Using Shuttle with FTP

  Using Shuttle to transfer files between two KEA!'s


Using Shuttle with Kermit or XYZ Modem
Using Shuttle with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

Before using Shuttle, you must know which operating system your host uses (for example, UNIX or VMS) and which transfer protocols the host supports.

To transfer files with Shuttle, using Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

1	Ensure you are connected to a host. The host session should be currently inactive and waiting at a command prompt.

2	From the Transfer menu, choose Shuttle , or click the Shuttle button on the toolbar.

  Shuttle button

3	Select the host you are connected to from the Host list box.

4	To edit host commands used by Shuttle to communicate with the host, choose Options. This displays the VMS/UNIX Host Options dialog box. Choose OK to return to the File Shuttle dialog box.

If you need to select or change options for your file transfer protocol, choose Configure to display the File Transfer dialog box. Choose OK to return to the File Shuttle dialog box.

5	If you want to send files to the host, select them in the PC Files list and choose Add.

6	If you want to receive files from the host, first select Display Host Files/Directories, then select the files in the Host Files list and choose Add, or type a filename in the Host File Name box. If you choose to type a file name, you must include the path if the file is not in the current directory.

7	When you have added all the files you want to the Transfer List box, choose Transfer. The Transfer Status dialog box displays the progress of the transfer.

8	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer. Use the minimize button at the top right of the Transfer Status dialog box. The transfer continues with the icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer completes, the icon beeps and shows "Done" as the title.

Note  If you transfer files from a UNIX host to your PC using Shuttle and the Kermit protocol, the files might be incorrectly handled. For example, a binary file could be handled as if it were text and CR codes could be inserted after newline codes. This is because Shuttle uses the default mode of transfer to which your host kermit is configured. That is, Shuttle does not explicitly ask kermit to treat the file as binary or text.
If you want, you can change the command that Shuttle runs on the host to start the kermit send.

An alternative method is to change the host's kermit configuration.


Changing VMS or UNIX Host Options

To change VMS or UNIX host options

1	In the Shuttle dialog box, with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem selected under Protocol, choose Options.

2	In the Host Options dialog box, choose a command for which you want to change the value. The command's current value is displayed.

3	In the Current Value text box, change the value as required.

4	Choose Apply to save the new value, or choose OK to save the value and exit the dialog box.

Note  If you transfer files from a UNIX host to your PC using Shuttle and the Kermit protocol, the files might be incorrectly handled. For example, a binary file could be handled as if it were text and CR codes could be inserted after newline codes. This is because Shuttle uses the default mode of transfer to which your host kermit is configured. That is, Shuttle does not explicitly ask kermit to treat the file as binary or text.
If you want, you can change the command that Shuttle runs on the host to start the kermit send. In the File Shuttle dialog box, ensure Unix is selected in the Host box, and then choose Options. This displays the UNIX Host Options dialog box, in which you will see the Host Command "starting Kermit send" as
    kermit -s
This command can be altered according to your needs. Please refer to your kermit documentation for the options you might want to add. For example add "-i" (image, or binary) option to make the host always send files in binary mode. The command appears as
    kermit -s -i
Remember to change this command back if you later want to send a text file.

An alternative method is to change the host's kermit configuration.


Using Shuttle with FTP

In order to use FTP for file transfers, you must be able to make a TCP/IP connection and your host must have an FTP server. Before you begin, you must know the name of the host to which you want to connect.

To transfer files with Shuttle, using FTP

1	Ensure that FTP is selected as your transfer protocol in the File Transfer dialog box (Transfer Options menu). Or, choose Configure in the Shuttle dialog box to display the file transfer dialog box and select the FTP protocol.

2	From the Transfer menu, choose Shuttle, or click the Shuttle button on the toolbar.

  Shuttle button

3	To make an FTP connection, choose Connect or choose Display Host Files/Directories.

The FTP Connect dialog box is displayed and shows the default login information that you typed in the FTP Options dialog box. Make any changes to the login information that you require, or choose OK to accept the defaults. You must provide the Host Name and UserID before you can complete a connection.

4	If you want to send files to the host, select them in the PC Files list and choose Add.

5	If you want to receive files from the host, first select Display Host Files/Directories, then select the files in the Host Files list and choose Add, or type a filename in the Host File Name box. If you choose to type a file name, you must include the path if the file is not in the current directory.

6	When you have added all the files you want to the Transfer List box, choose Transfer. The Transfer Status dialog box displays the progress of the transfer.

7	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer. Use the minimize button at the top right of the Transfer Status dialog box. The transfer continues with the icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer completes, the icon will beep and show "Done" as the title.

8	Choose Exit.


Changing FTP Host Options

Although rarely necessary, if the information you receive when trying to display host files is not what you expect, you might need to make changes to your FTP host options. The FTP Host Options dialog box is automatically displayed when KEA! is unable to determine the host operating system type when connecting to a host. Or, you can display the FTP Host Options dialog box by choosing Options in the Shuttle dialog box.

To change FTP host options

1	In the Shuttle dialog box, with FTP selected under Protocol, choose Options.

2	In the FTP Host Options dialog box, select a Host Type from the drop-down list.

3	If you selected Other under Host Type, you can make changes to the Output of LIST Command options.
Select Directory Keyword is Part of Filename if the directory keyword is part of the displayed filename. For the following examples of VMS LIST output for a directory and a file:

TEST.DIR;1   1    3-FEB-1991   12:55:45.59

SETUP.DEF;1   0   24-OCT-1991   08:30:32.67

.DIR appears as part of the filename and indicates that the first line of output is a directory.
When listing the directory output from this host, the Directory Keyword is Part of Filename checkbox should be selected.

-or-

Type the column in which the directory keyword appears in a line of directory output. For the following examples of UNIX LIST output for a directory and a file:

drwxr-xr-x  2 root  other   144   Feb 22 1994    stand

-rw-r--r--  1 root   sys  271016  Jul 19 07:16 temp.1st

The letter 'd' in column one indicates that the first line of output is a directory. If you also selected Directory Keyword is Part of Filename, the information you type here is ignored.

By default, the FTP Host Type is automatically detected. You need only make changes in the FTP Host Options dialog box if the host directory output in the Shuttle dialog box is not what you expect. Any changes you make here are reflected in the directory output that is redisplayed after you choose OK.
Most FTP Servers use the UNIX operating system but, because some do not advertise this fact, Shuttle might be unable to determine that UNIX should be selected as the host type. If you need to make changes in the FTP Host Options dialog box, try changing the host to UNIX first; this might correct your problem.
If you want to define a new Host Type, choose Define.


Defining a New FTP Host Type

You can define Host types to display in the Host type drop-down list in the FTP Host Options dialog box. This is useful if KEA! fails to automatically detect your Host. After a new Host type has been defined, it is automatically detected by KEA! in subsequent sessions.

To define a new FTP Host Type

1	In the Shuttle dialog box with FTP selected as File Transfer protocol, choose Connect to display the FTP Connect dialog box and connect to a host.

2	After your connection is established, in the Shuttle dialog box choose Options.

3	In the FTP Host Options dialog box, choose Define.

4	In the New Host Type dialog box, type a Login keyword and Host type name. Use a keyword from the login message displayed. It should be unique for this host type, but common among hosts of this type. For example, if the Login Message displayed is:

220-QTCP at DEV400.ATM.COM.

220 Connection will close if idle more than 5 minutes.

you might use 400 for the Login keyword and AS/400 for the Host type name.

5	Choose OK to return to the FTP Host Options dialog box. Your new Host type should now be displayed in the Host Type drop-down list.

6	With your new Host type selected in the Host type drop-down list, make any required changes in the FTP Host Options dialog box.

7	When you have finished making changes, choose OK.


Using FTP to Transfer Files over the Internet

Many FTP sites maintain an "Anonymous" user account that you can use to log in and retrieve files.

If you attempt to connect to a remote host on the Internet using your internal User ID and Password, that information is no longer secure. For your protection, when you type a new Host Name in the FTP Connect dialog box, your login information is cleared. When you log in to the host as user Anonymous, your password is your internet mail address.

To transfer files over the Internet

1	When you set up your FTP options, include your Internet Mail Address. This is used as the default password when you log in to an FTP Host anonymously. If you use an FTP Proxy, select Passive Mode Transfers, then choose the Proxies button to configure your FTP Proxy.

2	From the Transfer menu, choose Shuttle, or click the Shuttle button on the Toolbar.

  Shuttle button

3	To make an FTP connection, in the Shuttle dialog box, choose Connect or choose Display Host Files/Directories.

The FTP Connect dialog box is displayed and shows your default login information.

4	Under Host Name, type the Host Name or IP Address to which you want to connect.

5	Select the Anonymous check box. Anonymous is displayed under UserID and your Internet Mail Address as it appears in the FTP Options dialog box is displayed under Password.

6	Choose OK to connect to the host and return to the Shuttle dialog box. After connecting, you can use Shuttle to navigate host directories and select the files you want to transfer.

Note  If you have not yet entered your Internet Mail Address, the password you use is saved as the default.


Using Shuttle to Transfer files between KEAs
Using Shuttle to Transfer Files between KEA!s

Typically, to transfer files between two KEA!'s, you are connected through a serial port. When KEA! is selected as host, Shuttle automatically uses ZModem as the transfer protocol.

To transfer files between two KEA!'s

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Shuttle, or click the Shuttle button on the toolbar.

  Shuttle button

2	Select KEA! from the Host drop-down list.

3	To display the File Transfer dialog box and make changes to your ZModem options, choose Configure.

4	Choose OK to record any changes you made in the File Transfer dialog box, or choose Cancel to exit without saving the changes.

5	If you want to send files to the host, select them in the PC Files list and choose Add.

6	If you want to receive files from the host, first select Display Host Files/Directories, then select the files in the Host Files list and choose Add, or type a filename in the Host File Name box. If you choose to type a file name, you must include the path if the file is not in the current directory.

7	When you have added all the files you want to the Transfer List box, choose Transfer. The Transfer Status dialog box displays the progress of the transfer.

8	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer. Use the minimize button at the top right of the Transfer Status dialog box. The transfer continues with the icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer completes, the icon beeps and show "Done" as the title.


Transferring Text Files

You can send text data using any of the file transfer methods supported:  ASCII, Kermit, Xmodem, Ymodem, and Zmodem, and FTP. You can receive text data using any of the file transfer methods except ASCII. You select the file transfer method under Protocol in the File Transfer dialog box (Options command, Transfer menu).

Additionally, KEA! supports text data translation when you transfer text files, and when you use Copy, Paste, Capture, and PlayBack.

When you send files with ASCII (without protocol), most hosts recognize CR (carriage return) as the end-of-line indicator because they expect to receive files in the same format as they would if you typed the information directly to the host.

With the other transfer methods, most hosts expect to receive files in the format in which they are stored on the host; many recognize LF (line feed) as the end-of-line indicator.

Most personal computer text files contain a CR and LF (line feed) at the end of lines. When you send a file with ASCII, you can send just a CR, just an LF, or both; the text file transfer options in the ASCII Options dialog box are used. When you send a file with protocol, you can select an LF or both; the text file transfer options in the Text File Options dialog box are used.

To select text file transfer options

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Options.

2	In the File Transfer dialog box under Protocol, select Kermit, X/Y/Zmodem, or FTP.

3	Choose Text File Options.

4	In the Text File Options dialog box, select your sending and receiving options.

5	If you need to select Translation options, choose Translation.

Note  If you select ASCII under Protocol, the Text File Options button is unavailable. Select Options to display the ASCII Options dialog box instead.


Viewing the File Transfer Log

The transfer log contains a record of file transfers made during the current session. All transfer protocols use the same log which has a length of 32K. The log is discarded when KEA! exits.

To view a log of transfers made during the session

Choose the Log button in any of the dialog boxes associated with the Shuttle, Send, Receive, or Options commands on the Transfer menu. The log window is also displayed in the Kermit Commands and FTP Commands dialog boxes.


About Kermit

Kermit, developed at Columbia University, is an error-correcting file transfer protocol. Kermit lets you transfer binary and text data between various types of computers. Your personal computer and host, or remote computer, must run compatible versions of Kermit.

There are two modes of Kermit operation: Server and Non-Server (also called Interactive). A Server Kermit is one that can be completely controlled by an Interactive (Non-Server) Kermit. An Interactive Kermit must be given commands manually. Most host Kermits can be either Server or Interactive. Most personal computer Kermits can only be Interactive.

KEA!'s Kermit is Interactive and supports host Kermits that are either Server or Interactive.

If your personal computer Kermit and the host Kermit are interactive versions, you must issue complementary commands to each computer to start a file transfer: a Receive command at one computer requires a Send command at the other. However, if the host is running Kermit as a server, it takes all its file transfer commands in packets from the your local Kermit. From your personal computer, you can control when files are sent and received.

KEA! implements the standard Kermit protocol, including the large packet and sliding windows options. (The sliding windows options significantly increase the transfer rate.)

  Kermit Setup

  Kermit Servers

  Controlling Host Behavior during File Transfer

  Using Shuttle with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

  Transmitting Files Using Kermit

  Receiving Files Using Kermit

  Getting Files Using Kermit


Kermit Setup

Before setting up KEA! to use Kermit for file transfers, you need to know if the host is running Kermit in Interactive or Server mode.

To setup KEA! for Kermit transfers

1	Choose Options from the Transfer menu, and select Kermit from the Protocol field drop-down list.

2	Choose Options to display the Kermit Options dialog box.

3	Select Interactive or Server under Remote Kermit, depending upon the mode of your host Kermit.

4	Optionally, in the Start Host Receiving and Start Host Sending fields, you can type macro commands to provide instructions for the host during file transfer.
For example, to start the host Kermit receiving you might type Send("kermit -r^M").

5	Change any other settings you need to in the Kermit Options dialog box.

6	Choose Advanced if you need to make changes to other Kermit settings such as Error Control.


Transmitting Files Using Kermit

To transmit files to a Kermit host (Interactive)

1	Select Interactive under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box (Transfer menu Options).

2	Ensure the host Kermit is running in Interactive mode.

3	Issue the Receive command on the host Kermit.

4	From the Transfer menu, choose Send, or click the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

5	Select the file(s) you want to send to the host in the Kermit Transmit dialog box.

6	Choose OK.

7	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the icon will beep and show "Done" as the title. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

If your host is running VMS or UNIX, you can use the Shuttle command on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 2 through 6.

Tip  Alternatively, to send a file to the host, you can drag-and-drop the file to an active KEA! session from the Windows Explorer, My Computer, or the NT File Manager. To ensure that the host Kermit is ready to receive files before you use this method, set the Start Host Receiving option in the Kermit Options dialog box.
You cannot transfer a file by dropping it on a KEA! icon. If you drop a file on a KEA! icon, KEA! attempts to open the file as a session.

To transmit files to a Kermit host (Server)

1	Select Server under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box (Transfer menu Options).

2	Ensure the host Kermit is running in Server mode.

3	Choose Send from the Transfer menu, or click the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

4	Select the file(s) you want to send to the host in the Kermit Transmit dialog box.

5	Choose OK.

6	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the icon will beep and show "Done" as the title. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

If your host is running VMS or UNIX, you can use the Shuttle command on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 2 through 5.

Tip  Alternatively, to send a file to the host, you can drag-and-drop the file to an active KEA! session from the Windows Explorer, My Computer, or the NT File Manager. To ensure that the host Kermit is ready to receive files before you use this method, set the Start Host Receiving option in the Kermit Options dialog box.
You cannot transfer a file by dropping it on a KEA! icon. If you drop a file on a KEA! icon, KEA! attempts to open the file as a session.


Receiving Files Using Kermit

To receive files from a Kermit host (Interactive)

1	Select Interactive under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box (Transfer menu Options).

2	Ensure the host Kermit is running in interactive mode.

3	Issue the Send command on the host Kermit.

4	From the Transfer menu, choose Receive, or click the Receive button on the toolbar.

  Receive button

5	Specify the local path and/or file name in which to receive the file in the Kermit Receive dialog box.

6	Choose OK.

7	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the Icon will beep and show "Done" as the title. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

Alternatively, if your host is running VMS or UNIX, you can use the Shuttle command on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 2 through 6.


Getting Files Using Kermit

To get files from a Kermit Server

1	Select Server under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box (Transfer menu Options).

2	Ensure the host Kermit is running in Server mode.

3	Choose Receive from the Transfer menu, or click the Receive button on the toolbar.

  Receive button

4	Specify the file(s) you want to get from the host in the Host File field in the Kermit Receive dialog box.

5	Choose OK.

6	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, the icon will beep and show "Done" as the title. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

7	After the transfer completes, select Finish from the Command field drop-down list in the Kermit Commands dialog box (Transfer menu Commands). This command is sent to the host Kermit to indicate the end of the transfer.

Alternatively, if your host is running VMS or UNIX, you can use the Shuttle command on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 2 through 7.


Kermit Servers

Commands let you specify commands to be used with either a Kermit or FTP server. You select Kermit server commands or FTP commands from the drop-down list in the Command field in the Kermit or FTP Commands dialog box. You can display this box by choosing Commands from the Transfer menu after selecting Kermit or FTP as your file transfer protocol. If you selected Kermit, you must also have selected Server under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box and you must be connected to your host. Otherwise, the Commands command is not available to you.

To issue a command to a Kermit server

1	Select Server under Remote Kermit in the Kermit Options dialog box (Transfer menu Options).

2	Ensure the host Kermit is running in Server mode.

3	Choose Commands from the Transfer menu.

4	Select the command you want to issue to the host Kermit from the Command field drop-down list.

5	Select Remote Set if you need to make changes to the settings for the remote Kermit.


About FTP

FTP is KEA!'s implementation of the Internet standard File Transfer Protocol. Using FTP with Shuttle or FTP Commands, you can copy or delete files and directories between your personal computer and a remote host. In addition, you can perform local and host directory and file operations, such as listing and changing directories. The host must have an FTP server. With FTP, it is not necessary to make a terminal connection to your host before attempting a file transfer. FTP always makes its own connection, outside of any active terminal session. This feature makes FTP the fastest method for transferring files with KEA!.

  FTP Setup

  Using FTP to Transfer Files over the Internet

  Proxies dialog box

  Using Shuttle with FTP

  Transmitting Files Using FTP

  Receiving Files Using FTP

  Issuing Commands to an FTP Server


FTP Setup

In order to use FTP for file transfers, you must be able to make a TCP/IP connection.

To setup KEA! for FTP transfers

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Options, and select FTP from the Protocol field drop-down list.

2	If you want to provide default login information for subsequent FTP transfers, choose Options. In the FTP Options dialog box, supply the required information.

3	If you use an FTP Proxy for file transfers, select Passive Mode Transfers. To configure your FTP Proxy, in the FTP Options dialog box, choose Proxies.

4	To exit the Options dialog box, choose OK.


Transmitting Files Using FTP

To transmit files to an FTP host

1	If you have not already done so, choose Options from the Transfer menu, and select FTP from the Protocol field drop-down list. To exit the Options dialog box, choose OK.

2	Choose Send from the Transfer menu, or click the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

3	Select the file(s) you want to send to the host in the FTP Transmit dialog box.

4	Choose OK. The FTP Connect dialog box is displayed. Make changes to the login information or choose OK to accept the defaults. The Transfer Status dialog box is displayed, and shows the progress of the file transfer.

5	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, you will be automatically disconnected from the host. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

You can use the Shuttle command on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 1 through 4. You can also both send and receive files from the FTP commands dialog box.

Tip  Alternatively, to send a file to the host, you can drag-and-drop the file to an active KEA! session from the Windows Explorer, My Computer, or the NT File Manager.
You cannot transfer a file by dropping it on a KEA! icon. If you drop a file on a KEA! icon, KEA! attempts to open the file as a session.


Receiving Files Using FTP

To receive files from an FTP host

1	If you have not already done so, choose Options from the Transfer menu, and select FTP from the Protocol field drop-down list. To exit the Options dialog box, choose OK.

2	Choose Receive from the Transfer menu, or click the Receive button on the toolbar.

  Receive button

3	Specify the file(s) you want to get from the host in the Host File field in the FTP Receive dialog box. You can use wildcard characters to specify the files to receive. For example, you can elect to receive all files of a specific type, *.TXT.

4	Choose OK. The FTP Connect dialog box is displayed. Make changes to the login information or choose OK to accept the defaults. The Transfer Status dialog box is displayed, and shows the progress of the file transfer.

5	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer is complete, you will be automatically disconnected from the host. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

Alternatively, you can use the Shuttle command on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 1 through 5. You can also both send and receive files from the FTP commands dialog box.


Issuing Commands to an FTP Server

You can use FTP commands to perform file manipulation on a remote host without having to know the host's command language. This is especially useful for users who are familiar with the FTP Command Line interface, or who require more sophisticated functionality than that provided with Shuttle. To display a list of available commands, type help at the command line.

To issue a command to an FTP server

1	Choose Commands from the Transfer menu to display the FTP Commands dialog box.

2	From the Command field drop-down list, select the command you want to issue to the host FTP, or type a command at the Command line.

3	Select Execute. If you are not already connected, the FTP Connect dialog box is displayed. Make changes to the login information or choose OK to accept the defaults.

4	To exit the dialog box, choose Close.


About X/Y/ZModem

Xmodem, Ymodem, and Zmodem are error-correcting file transfer protocols. You use these file transfer protocols to transfer binary and text data between various types of computers. Your personal computer and host, or remote computer, must run compatible versions of Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem.

  X/Y/ZModem Setup

  Controlling Host Behavior during File Transfer

  Using Shuttle with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

  Transmitting Files Using X/Y/ZModem

  Receiving Files Using X/Y/ZModem


X/Y/ZModem Setup

Before setting up KEA!, you must know if your host is running Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem.

To set up KEA! for Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem transfers

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Options.

2	Select Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem from the Protocol field drop-down list.

3	Choose Options to display the Options dialog box specific to the selected protocol.

4	Optionally, in the Start Host Receiving and Start Host Sending fields, you can type macro commands to provide instructions for the host during file transfer.
For example, if you are using Zmodem, you might type the following in the Start Host Sending field:

Send("sz "+HostFileName+"^m")

and the following in the Start Host Receiving field:

Send("rz^m") Wait(1)

5	Change any other settings you need.


Transmitting Files Using X/Y/Z Modem

In order to transfer files with Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem, you must first select your file transfer protocol in the File Transfer dialog box.

To transmit files using Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem

1	Ensure the host Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem protocol is running.

2	Issue the appropriate commands on the host to start the receive.

3	From the Transfer menu, choose Send, or click the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

4	Select the file(s) you want to send from the list box under the File Name field.

5	Choose OK.

6	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer completes, the Icon will beep and show "Done" as the title. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

If your host is running VMS or UNIX, you can use the  Shuttle on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 1 through 5.

Tip  Alternatively, to send a file to the host, you can drag-and-drop the file to an active KEA! session from the Windows Explorer, My Computer, or the NT File Manager.
You cannot transfer a file by dropping it on a KEA! icon. If you drop a file on a KEA! icon, KEA! attempts to open the file as a session.


Receiving Files Using X/Y/Z Modem

In order to transfer files with Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem, you must first select your file transfer protocol in the File Transfer dialog box.

To receive files using Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem

1	Ensure the host Xmodem, Ymodem, or Zmodem protocol is running.

2	Issue the appropriate command on the host to start it sending.

3	Choose Receive from the Transfer menu, or click the Receive button on the toolbar.

  Receive button

4	Type the local path and/or file name in which you want to put the file.

5	Choose OK.

6	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer (use the minimize button on the Transfer Status dialog box). The transfer will continue, with the Icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer completes, the Icon will beep and show "Done" as the title. You can then restore KEA! to view the log.

Alternatively, if your host is running VMS or UNIX, you can use the Shuttle command on the Transfer menu in place of the preceding steps 1 through 5.


ASCII File Transfer Protocol

You can send a file to the host without any special protocol. Use the Send command (Transfer menu) with ASCII selected in the File Transfer dialog box. This method does not require any special host software. However, it does not perform any error correction and is generally used only with text files.

In addition, to send a file to the host, you can drag-and-drop the file to an active KEA! session from the Windows Explorer, My Computer, or the NT File Manager.

Note  You cannot transfer a file by dropping it on a KEA! icon. If you drop a file on a KEA! icon, KEA! attempts to open the file as a session.

To capture text that the host sends without protocol, you can use the Capture command on the File menu.

To send ASCII data and record it on the host, you need to run a program on the host to capture the data. For example, you can use an editor in insert mode to record the data you send to the host.

You might need to control the data flow to your host. For example, on a VAX/VMS host, issue the command SET TERMINAL /HOSTSYNC. You also can affect the rate of data sent using the Limit Transmit Rate option in theASCII Options dialog box.

To configure KEA! to transmit ASCII

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Options,
-or-
From the Transmit dialog box, choose Configure.

2	Select ASCII from the drop-down list in the Protocol field.

3	Choose Options to display the ASCII Options dialog box.

4	Optionally, in the Start Host Receiving and End Host Receiving fields, you can type macro commands to provide instructions for the host during file transfer.
For example, if your host system is UNIX, you might type the following in the Start Host Receiving field:

Send( "cat >" + HostFileName + "^m" ) Wait( 2 )

and the following in the End Host Receiving field:

Send( "^d" )

To transmit a file

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Send , or click the Send button on the toolbar.

  Send button

2	Select a file in the ASCII Transmit dialog box.

3	Choose OK.

Note  Alternatively, to send a file to the host, you can drag-and-drop the file to an active KEA! session from the Windows Explorer, My Computer, or the NT File Manager.
You cannot transfer a file by dropping it on a KEA! icon. If you drop a file on a KEA! icon, KEA! attempts to open the file as a session.
During the transfer, the filename and a progress indicator are displayed on the status line.


Character Translation

Translation refers to converting text data from one character set to another. This is often necessary because personal computer and host character sets differ.

In most cases, the text is standard ASCII characters that are common between the host and personal computer character sets. However, if any characters are from the extended (multinational) character set, they generally are different codes on the personal computer and host. You can have characters from your local personal computer character set translated to the host character set during file transfer if you select Enable in the Translation dialog box.

The character set translation operates the same with all file transfer methods. You simply need to identify the personal computer and host character sets.

When you  copy text, it is always translated, providing OEM, ISO, and the current KEA! character set to the Clipboard. The ISO format is the standard Windows application character set. The OEM format is the original IBM character set. The application that eventually takes the data determines the character set used. Most windows applications only accept ISO character format. The internal character set is used to copy and paste data between different KEA!s.

When you paste text, it is always translated, determining the local character set from the Clipboard. Two Paste data formats are supported: ISO, and OEM. Most Windows applications provide only the ISO character set.

The standard Windows ISO character set does not contain line drawing (or other IBM or DEC character set symbols). Therefore, when you paste KEA! data into most Windows applications, it pastes only characters, not graphics formats, and translates line drawing characters to similar ASCII characters. The translation procedure approximates these line drawing symbols if you select Readability as the Translation method. If you select Exact, the translation procedure replaces them with a question mark (?).

The following table lists when translation occurs and the local and host character sets used.

Operation	Translation	Local	Host
Performed	Character Set	Character Set

Kermit text X/Y/Zmodem text FTP text	See Note 1.	See Note 5.	See Note 5.
ASCII Transmit	See Note 1.	See Note 5.	See Note 4.
File Capture	See Note 2.	See Note 5.	See Note 4.
Copy	Always	See Note 3.	See Note 4.
Paste	Always	See Note 3.	See Note 4.
Copy	Always	See Note 3.	See Note 4.

Notes:

1. Translation performed if you selected Enable in the Translation dialog box.

2. Translation performed if you selected Strip Escape Sequences in the Capture Setup dialog box.

3. KEA! copies and pastes data between other applications with ISO (normal Windows) and OEM (IBM) character formats. The internal character format is used to copy and paste data within KEA!.

4. The current terminal character set defines the host character set.

5. Selected in the Translation dialog box.

To set translation options

1	From the Transfer menu, choose Options.

2	In the File Transfer dialog box under Protocol, select Kermit, X/Y/Zmodem, or FTP.

3	Choose Text File Options.

4	In the Text File Options dialog box, choose Translation.

5	In the Translation dialog box, select Enable.

6	Under Method, select Exact to output an exact translation, or substitute a ? for characters that cannot be exactly matched.
-or-
Select Readability to output the best match found in the output character set, or a ? if there is no reasonable best match.

7	If you intend to move the data from the host to a DOS application rather than a Windows application, under Local Character Set, select a character set to use to store the data.

8	If you are transferring files with Capture/PlayBack, Copy/Paste, or Kermit, select a Host Character Set. Select Automatic (the default) to use the current KEA! configured character set.

Note  Use caution when using the Kermit, X/Y/Zmodem, and FTP protocols because translation is only performed on files transferred as text. If you use the default Automatic value under File Type in the Options dialog box and send a file containing 8-bit multinational codes, KEA! might incorrectly assume the file is binary, and not perform any character translation.
If you need to set your translation options for ASCII file transfer, to display the Translation dialog box, choose Translation in the ASCII Options dialog box.

To enable Translation during a file Capture

1	From the File menu, choose Capture.

2	In the Capture Setup dialog box, select Strip Escape Sequences.
This option strips all VT control functions from the data, leaving pure text. In effect, Strip Escape Sequences controls translation when you capture host data to a file.

Note  The Enable option in the Translation dialog box has no effect on translation during a Capture operation.


Capturing Incoming Data

You can use the Capture command from the File menu to receive text without any transfer protocol. This command writes all received data in a file. This is an easy way to transfer simple text files to your personal computer, or to record a session with your host. Because everything you type is normally displayed on your screen, you also can use the Capture command to record an entire exchange between your computer and the host.

To create a file and capture data as you receive it

1	From the File menu, choose Capture.

2	Under File Name, type the name of the file to create to store the captured data, or select a name from the list displayed.

3	Choose Append if you want to write new data at the end of an existing file; otherwise, existing data is overwritten by new data if the file you name already exists.

4	If you want to save the file as text only, select Strip Escape Sequences to remove any control sequences from the data.

5	Choose OK.

From this point on, everything displayed in your emulation window is placed into the file you named. The Capture command changes to End Capture, to indicate that it is active.

6	When you want to stop capturing, choose the End Capture command on the File menu.

Note  You also can use the history feature to record received data.
To capture data already displayed on your screen, from the Edit menu, choose Copy.


Playing Back Captured Data

You can use the Playback command to select a file and display its contents in the emulation window as if you just received the file from the host. This command is provided as a diagnostic aid.

To play back captured data

1	From the File menu, choose Playback.

2	In the Playback dialog box under File Name, type the name of the file whose contents you want to display on your screen.

3	Choose OK.


Inserting ASCII Codes

If you use features such as keyboard mapping, user-defined buttons, macros, DA responses, and so on, you might want to store a control code or string of characters and other codes. In some cases, such as macro strings, you must enclose the text in quotes. If you want to use a literal quote character within a quoted string, put a slash before the quote (\").

To enter	Do

Visible characters	Press the corresponding key.

Any code	Type a circumflex (^) followed by up to three decimal digits. For example, type ^27 for ESC or ^155 for CSI. You can use this method to store any code from the 7-bit or 8-bit character table.

Control codes 0 to 31	Type a circumflex (^) followed by a character. For example, for a carriage return, you can type ^M or ^13.

A literal ^	Type \^.


Options in the Registry

When you set up KEA!, various options appear as values in your Windows Registry database. Many of these options are additional to those found on the Options menu. If you are familiar with modifying the Windows Registry, you can add or change some of these values using the Windows Registry Editor. The options affect the following KEA! features.

In the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT

Value	Description
AsyncConnect : string : 0	include if KEA! fails to connect or resolve names   MORE
BoldBackground : string : n	n=0, default, only the foreground color is made bold n=1, both the foreground and background colors are made bold   MORE
CustomTekCharacterSizes : string : 1	enable additional Tektronix character sizes   MORE
ForceNumlock : string : 0	prevent KEA! from capturing NUMLOCK   MORE
NewLook : DWORD : n	n=0, suppress all 3D effects n=1, display only the contents with 3D effect n=2, default, display contents and borders of dialog boxes with 3D effect   MORE
In the key HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT

Value	Description
AlternateFont : string : 1	use alternate font   MORE
AutoCenter : string : 0	position the VT window in the top left corner of the application window   MORE
BorderBitmap : string : filename	specify the filename of a 16-bit bitmap to use for the border   MORE
BorderColor : string : xxx	xxx is specified using a number, RGB, or keyword   MORE
BorderPattern : string : pattern name	display named Windows pattern in border   MORE
MaxCommPorts : DWORD : n	n defines the number of ports   MORE
MaxSessions : DWORD : n	define maximum number of concurrent sessions allowed   MORE
NewScrollBars : String : 1	use Windows 95 scrollbars in Windows NT   MORE
SaveConfig : DWORD : n	n=0, changes not saved n=1, changes always saved n=2, default; prompt to save changes   MORE
ScrollPages : DWORD : n	n can range from 1 to a large number of pages   MORE
UseSystemCursor : string : 1	override KEA!'s default cursors   MORE


Editing the Windows Registry database

When you set up KEA!, various options appear as values in your Windows Registry database. If you are familiar with using the Windows Registry, you can add or change some of these values by editing your Registry.

To add a new value to the Windows Registry in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0

1	From the Start menu, choose Run.

2	To start the Registry Editor, type regedit. The Registry Editor window is displayed.

3	Navigate the keys in the registry until you can select the key where you want to add a value.

4	From the Edit menu, point to New, then choose String, Binary, orDWORD Value.

5	Type the value name and press ENTER.

6	Press ENTER to display the Editor dialog box for the Value you selected.

7	Type the new value in the Editor dialog box. The new value will appear in the key in hexadecimal format.

Example: To add the AlternateFont option to the Windows 95 or NT 4.0 Registry

AlternateFont : string : 1

1	Locate the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key in the Windows Registry.

2	From the Edit menu, point to New, and choose String.

3	In the box provided, type AlternateFont, and press ENTER twice.

4	In the Editor dialox box, type 1.

To add a new value to the Windows Registry in Windows NT 3.51

1	In the Windows NT Program Manager, from the File menu, choose Run.

2	To start the Registry Editor, type regedt32. The Registry Editor window is displayed.

3	Navigate the keys in the registry until you can select the key where you want to add a value.

4	From the Edit menu, choose Add Value.

5	In the Add Value dialog box, type the value name and select a Data Type from the drop-down list. In KEA!, this will be either REG_SZ for string and boolean values, or REG_DWORD for integer values. Choose OK. The Editor dialog box for the Data type you selected is displayed.

6	Type the new value in the Editor dialog box. If you add a REG_DWORD value, under Radix select the format that you use to type the value. Choose OK. The new value appears in the key in hexadecimal format.

Example: To add the AlternateFont option to the Windows NT 3.51 Registry

AlternateFont : string : 1

1	Locate the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key in the Windows Registry.

2	From the Edit menu, choose Add Value.

3	In the Add Value dialog box, type AlternateFont, and select REG_SZ from the Data Type drop-down list.

4	In the Editor dialox box, type 1.

To edit an existing value in the Windows or Windows NT Registry database

1	To display the value you want to edit, navigate the keys in the registry until the appropriate key is displayed. Double-click a key in the left pane to display its values in the right pane.

2	Double-click the value you want to change. Depending on the value's Data type, either the String Editor or the DWord Editor dialog box is displayed.

3	In the String Editor dialog box, type a new String. Or, in the DWord Editor dialog box, type new Data.

4	Choose OK to exit the dialog box.

For more information on working with the Registry database, please refer to your Windows documentation.


Registry Option for 3D Dialog Boxes
Registry Option for "3D" Dialog Boxes

Dialog boxes are displayed with a 3D look. In Windows NT, you can suppress this feature with an option in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database. Locate and change the following value:

NewLook : DWORD : n

The default n is 2; this displays the contents and borders of dialog boxes with a 3D effect. Setting n to 1 displays only the contents with a 3D effect. Setting n to 0 suppresses all 3D effects. For any 3D effects in Windows NT, the driver CTL3DV2.DLL must be in your system.


Registry Option for NumLock Key

If you are using a laptop with an embedded numeric keypad and need the NUMLOCK key to switch keyboard modes, add the following value to the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database to prevent KEA! from capturing NUMLOCK. The SCROLLOCK key will be mapped to PF1.

ForceNumlock : string : 0


Registry Option for Windows Sockets

Some implementations of Windows Sockets are not fully compatible with KEA!, and fail to connect or resolve names. If KEA! fails to connect, add the following value to the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database:

AsyncConnect : string : 0


Registry Option for Bold Background

When KEA! receives the VT control sequence CSI 1 m to give characters the bold attribute, and these characters are also assigned a foreground or background color, only the character, or the character and its background, is made bold.

You can set one of the following options in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database:

BoldBackground : string : 0

This is the default. Only the foreground color is made bold; the background is not.

BoldBackground : string : 1

Both the foreground and background colors are made bold. However, when black is made bold (whether in the foreground or background) it remains black, not index 8.


Registry Option for Window Position

The VT emulation window is centered within the application window, by default. You can position the VT window in the top left corner of the application window by adding this value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database:

AutoCenter : string : 0


Registry Option for Border Pattern

A border between the emulation and application windows is displayed when the emulation window is smaller. You can display any of the available Windows patterns in this border. Add this value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database. To determine the available patterns, in the Windows Control Panel, choose Desktop, then read the drop-down list in the Name box under Patterns.

BorderPattern : string : pattern name


Registry Option for Border Color

You can specify the color you want to use for the border between the emulation and application windows. Add this value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database.

BorderColor : string : xxx

You can specify the color xxx in one of the following three ways:

Number	Specify the number for a color used by another Windows object. For example, BorderColor=3 changes the border color to the color used for active titles. For xxx, substitute a number from 1 to 21 according to the following list:

1	Scrollbar	8	MenuText	15	HilightText
2	Background	9	WindowText	16	ButtonFace
3	ActiveTitle	10	TitleText	17	ButtonShadow
4	InactiveTitle	11	ActiveBorder	18	GrayText
5	Menu	12	InactiveBorder	19	ButtonText
6	Window	13	AppWorkspace	20	InactiveTitleText
7	WindowFrame	14	Hilight	21	ButtonHilight

RGB	Specify one or two sets of numbers. The first set specifies the color for the border; the second specifies the color for the pattern if you use one. For xxx, substitute three numbers, from 0 to 255, separated by spaces. These numbers represent the values of Red, Green and Blue. For example, BorderColor=34 125 255 displays the border in bright blue, and BorderColor=34 125 255 128 000 75 displays the border pattern in bright blue and magenta.

Keyword	Specify the name of the Windows object using the color you want to use for the border. You can specify a color by keyword only if that keyword appears in the [colors] section of your WIN.INI file. For example, to use the color of the Active Title bar, add the line BorderColor=ActiveTitle. For xxx, substitute a keyword from the following list:

Scrollbar	MenuText	HilightText
Background	WindowText	ButtonFace
ActiveTitle	TitleText	ButtonShadow
InactiveTitle	ActiveBorder	GrayText
Menu	InactiveBorder	ButtonText
Window	AppWorkspace	InactiveTitleText
WindowFrame	Hilight	ButtonHilight


Registry Option for Border Bitmap

You can specify the filename of a 16-bit bitmap to use for the border between the emulation and application windows. Add this value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database.

BorderBitmap : string : filename

If you specify a 256-bit bitmap, it is displayed as 16 bits.


Registry Option for Alternate Font

KEA! contains two font sets. The default font has an aspect ratio (width to height) of 1:2; the alternate font set has an aspect ratio of 1:1.5. The font sets have the same horizontal width selections. If you use the alternate font, you have a smaller vertical window and shorter characters.

You can use an alternate font set if you add the following value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key in your Windows Registry database:

AlternateFont : string : 1


Registry Option for New Scrollbars

If you are using Windows NT 3.51 without the New Shell, you can change the appearance of your KEA! scrollbars to the newer Windows 95 scrollbars by adding the following value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database.

NewScrollBars : String : 1


Registry Option for System Cursor

By default, KEA! uses its own I-beam and ANSI Locator Mode crosshair cursors. The size of the I-beam cursor is directly related to the font size selected. The ANSI Locator Mode cursor is a fixed size. You can override KEA!'s default cursors and use the Windows cursors you have selected by adding the following value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database.

UseSystemCursor : string : 1

Note  If you choose this option and do not customize your Windows system cursors, you will not see the ANSI Locator Mode crosshair cursor because both the Windows default crosshair cursor and KEA!'s default background color are black.


Registry Option for Paged Scroll Size

Large amounts of text arriving too quickly may have to wait while a slow machine scrolls text line-by-line. To avoid long waits, in the Display dialog box you can set the Scroll option to Paged. Then if data arrives faster than KEA! can display it, the window is re-written only after four pages are received. Whenever KEA! catches up to the incoming data, it re-writes the window to show the most recently received text.

If you want to change the default four pages, add this value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database.

ScrollPages : DWORD : n

The value n can range from 1 to a large number of pages.


Registry Option for Maximum Concurrent Sessions

By default, the maximum number of concurrent sessions that you can run is limited by the configuration of your machine, Windows, and network software, but is not limited by KEA!. You can define the maximum number of concurrent KEA! sessions allowed by adding the following value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows NT Registry database:

MaxSessions : DWORD : n

Where n defines the number of sessions (for example, 2).


Registry Option for Save on Exit

When you exit from KEA!, whether configuration changes you have made are automatically saved depends on your selection for the option Save Changes on Exit in the General Settings dialog box. However, if the application is running with no configuration file, as it is whenever you choose to create a new session, it uses instead the following value located in the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database. This will be the default, unless you base your new session on a template, or you already have at least one other session running when you start the new session, in which case the existing exit options are maintained:

SaveConfig : DWORD : n

The default value is 2; you are prompted to save a changed configuration when you exit. If the value is 1, changes are always saved. If the value is 0, the changes are not saved.


Registry Option for Tektronix Characters

KEA! provides two additional Tektronix character sizes which by default are not enabled: 51 x 127 tekpoints and 25 x 53 tekpoints. You can enable them by adding the following value to the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database. Then they can be selected using the sequences Esc= and Esc< respectively.

CustomTekCharacterSizes : string : 1


Registry Option for Limiting Serial Ports

By default, KEA! displays COM1 through COM4 in the Port drop-down list box. You can limit the ports to choose from by adding the following value to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key of the Windows Registry database:

MaxCommPorts : DWORD : n

Where n defines the number of ports (for example, 2).


Device Attributes

Device attributes, stored as control sequences, describe the terminal and its configuration. When the host requests it, the terminal sends a device attribute (DA) response. This DA response identifies the particular type of terminal.

You select the terminal type from the DA response drop-down list in the Terminal General dialog box (Options Terminal menu). This selection determines the device attribute response the display sends on a request from the host system. The report generally informs the host about particular attribute configurations and the current terminal state. Most of these reports are transparent to you. However, you can configure the Primary Device Attributes and Secondary Device Attributes reports if you select Custom under DA Response. Otherwise, these two reports assume a default based on the selected terminal type.

KEA! 340 uses the following as the default Custom Primary DA response:

CSI? 63;1;2;3;4;6;7;8;9;13;15;16;18;19;21;29c

The following table lists common primary DA responses:

Terminal	Identification Sequence

VT420	CSI? 64;1;2;6;7;8;9;15;18;19;21c

VT340	CSI? 63;1;2;3;4;6;7;8;9;13;15;16;18;19c

VT320	CSI? 63;1;2;6;7;8;9c

VT220	CSI? 62;1;2;6;7;8;9c

VT102	ESC[6c

VT101	ESC[1;0c

VT100	ESC[1;2c


Typical Modem Command Set

This section contains a short list of commands that work on most modems. For more information on these commands, refer to your modem documentation.

Command	Description

ATA	Force Answer Mode.

ATDTnnnnnnn	Dial the specified number using a touch-tone line. A comma in the number causes the modem to pause for 2 seconds at the comma.

ATDPnnnnnnn	Dial the specified number using a pulse (rotary) line.

ATE0	Turn off command mode Local Echo.

ATE1	Turn on command mode Local Echo.

ATH	Hang up.

ATO	Return on-line after executing a command.

ATQ0	Display modem result codes.

ATQ1	Do not display modem result codes.

ATSn=value	Set the specified modem register (n) to the given value. For a detailed description of these settings, refer to your modem documentation.

ATV0	Display result codes in numbers.

ATV1	Display result codes in words.

ATZ	Reset the modem.

A/	Execute the last command again.

To put the modem into online command mode, type +++ after waiting for one second of no data transmission. In one more second, the modem should respond with OK.


Private ESC Sequences

In addition to the standard ANSI control sequences, KEA! supports the following ANSI-compatible extensions.

DCS 4.z <datastring> ST

Execute the macro instructions {datastring}, maximum 8K. This function and the following one can be turned off with the Options command (Macro menu).

DCS 4;1.z <datastring><checksum> ST

Execute the macro instructions {datastring} as in the preceding command, only if the two-character {checksum} is correct. If the checksum is incorrect, the response is

DCS 4;1.y <checksum> ST

where this checksum is the correct one for the previously sent {datastring}. For more information, see Letting the Host Invoke a Macro.

CSI 4; <Pn> .z

Execute macro filename REMOTE{Pn}.KTM, where Pn is the character pair 00 to 99.

CSI 1; <Pr>; <Pc> .z

Define a rectangle and draw a border around it. The upper left corner is at the cursor, the size is Pr rows by Pc columns.

CSI E

Newline inside the rectangle.

CSI 4 J

Clear inside the rectangle.

CSI 1 .z

Undefine the rectangle, but leave its border and contents on the screen.

CSI 3; <Pn> .z

Stop processing for Pn/10 seconds.

CSI 5; <Pn>.z

Request a Device Attribute report from KEA!. The parameters Pn are optional. If all are omitted, the response will include parameters 1, 2, 3, and 4. The response is

DCS 5.y <values> ST

Values are separated by semicolons, in the same order as requested.

Pn	Value

1	Product	KEA!

2	Model	420 or 340

3	Version	n.n.nn

4	Beta	Rn.nnn or Rnn.nnn

10	Environment	DOS/Windows

12	Remote Macros	0=false, 1=true


Definition of PRODNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of SHORTNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of EDITNAME bookmark:KEA! Edit


Overview of Graphics

KEA! 340 emulates the ReGIS and Tektronix graphics features of the VT340. These features are not available in KEA! 420.

ReGIS is DIGITAL's Remote Graphics Instruction Set. This set of commands can describe a graphics image using geometric shapes (lines, curves, and circles), and actions (fills and patterns). KEA! provides all the ReGIS features, including GIN mode, 16 colors, and sixel graphics.

Tektronix 4010/4014 is a vector graphics terminal that uses direct-view storage tube technology. KEA! supports all of the Tektronix features available on VT terminals, including GIN mode using either the mouse, the ARROW keys, or any Windows positioning device.

For more information on ReGIS and Sixel or Tektronix graphics, choose the appropriate button following:

  About ReGIS and Sixel Graphics

  About Tektronix Graphics

  Zoom

  Re-displaying the Window

  Saving Graphic Images


Saving Graphic Images

You cannot directly save the screen image. If you want to save an image to display it again later, capture the data as you receive it with the Capture command (File menu) then replay it with the PlayBack command.

To save a ReGIS or Tektronix graphic image

1	From the File menu, choose Capture.

2	In the Capture dialog box, type a filename and select a location for the captured image.

3	Receive the image from the host.

4	After the image is displayed, from the File menu, choose End Capture.

5	To redisplay the image, from the File menu, choose PlayBack.

6	In the PlayBack dialog box, choose the file you want to redisplay from the list presented.

Note  You can also copy the image using the Copy command, then paste it into another application, such as a Paint program, where you can save it as a Windows bitmap.


Zoom

KEA! lets you zoom (change the size of) your ReGIS or Tektronix graphics image to take a closer look at a portion of it. In order to zoom a graphic image, you must select the Display List method of Backing Store (Graphics dialog box) before you display the image.

To zoom a graphic image

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	In the Graphics dialog box under Backing Store, select Display List.

3	Display the graphic image.

4	From the Options menu, choose View.

5	In the View dialog box, set Font Width to Auto.

6	To resize the graphic image, drag the side borders of the window.

Note  Alternatively, you can zoom the image by increasing and decreasing the Font Width in the View dialog box.
You can use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to view other parts of your zoomed image. Each time you zoom or scroll an image, the new portion is redisplayed. The time required to do this depends on the complexity of the image. If you issue another zoom during the redrawing of the viewed portion, the current redraw is interrupted, and only the final viewed portion is drawn.
If you select only the Bitmap method of Backing Store and you try to zoom the image, the image is cleared from your screen.


Re-displaying the Window

If you move another application window in front of your KEA! window, then uncover it, window contents are normally restored. In order to redisplay graphic images, you must have selected one of the methods of Backing Store in the Graphics dialog box. If you select neither, you cannot redisplay the screen. If you select both, the Display List method is used when necessary (for example, after a zoom), and the Bitmap method is used at other times.

The Display List method stores all received graphics commands in a list. KEA! redisplays the window by executing the entire list. The Display List method might not be suitable for an application that changes parts of the screen without ever clearing the screen (for example, a real-time monitor that displays the current state of a process).

The Bitmap method stores a copy of the current image in memory allowing the image to be quickly redisplayed. However, when you change the font size, KEA! clears the screen because it cannot redisplay the image at the new size.

To select a method for storing graphic images

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	In the Graphics dialog box under Backing Store, select either or both of Display List and Bitmap.


About ReGIS and Sixel Graphics

KEA! 340 emulates the ReGIS, and sixel graphics features of the VT340 terminal.

ReGIS is a set of commands that describes a graphics image using geometric shapes (lines, curves, and circles), and actions (fills and patterns). KEA! supports ReGIS graphics. ReGIS mode is entered and exited automatically under host control.

On a VT340, ReGIS creates a graphics image on an 800 by 480 pixel matrix. KEA!'s screen resolution depends on your hardware. The image is scaled to fit the size of the window you configure.

Many host applications create graphics specifically for the VT340 terminal resolution. Graphic images might not scale well in your display session, depending on how they were created by the application. You can view the image with the same resolution as the VT340 uses by selecting a Font Width of 10 Wide in the View dialog box.

ReGIS commands can specify text of any of 16 standard character sizes and can also specify any particular height and width.

To view a graphic image at the VT340 terminal resolution

1	From the Options menu, choose View.

2	In the View dialog box under Font Width, select 10 Wide.

Note  You might need to use the scroll bars to view portions of the image if your computer cannot display the entire image at this resolution.

To automatically change the size of a graphic image when you change the size of the window

1	From the Options menu, choose View.

2	In the View dialog box, select Auto from the Font Width list box.
The size of your graphic image changes with the window size when you resize the window.

Sixels

A sixel is a unit of graphics data transmitted as a character. One sixel represents six vertical pixels of an image.

The VT340 uses sixels to describe a graphics image as a bitmap. KEA! supports both monochrome and color sixel graphics.

  ReGIS: Graphics Input Mode

  Plane Writing

  ReGIS: Cursor

  Printing Graphics Overview

  Zoom

  Re-displaying the Window


Plane Writing

Accurate emulation of plane writing and logical pixel operations requires that your display adapter has a palette, or that you use the Bitmap method of backing store.

To emulate plane writing if your display adapter has a palette

1	From the Options menu, choose Colors.

2	In the Attributes Colors dialog box, choose Colors.

3	In the Colors dialog box, select Use Exact Colors.

To emulate plane writing if your display adapter does not have a palette

1	 From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	In the Graphics dialog box under Backing Store, select Bitmap.


ReGIS: Cursor

ReGIS defines two graphics cursors: one to indicate the output location, and one to indicate input location.

The output cursor, a diamond by default, indicates the position of the graphics being drawn. The host can change the cursor shape to a crosshair. You can turn off the graphics output cursor with the Graphics Cursor option in the Graphics dialog box.

The input cursor, a crosshair by default, identifies a screen location when using graphics input mode. The host can change the cursor shape to a diamond, rubber band line, or rubber band rectangle. The host also can download a custom cursor.

To turn off the graphics output cursor

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	In the Graphics dialog box, clear the Graphics Cursor check box.


ReGIS: Graphics Input Mode

When the host activates Graphics Input (GIN) mode, you can specify screen locations and send position reports to the host application. ReGIS has two graphics input modes: One Shot Graphics Input Mode, and Multiple Graphics Input Mode. You can move the graphics input cursor using the mouse or the ARROW keys.

One Shot Graphics Input Mode

When the host activates One Shot mode, the graphics input cursor displays, and processing of received data temporarily stops. After a single position report is sent to the host, KEA! exits One Shot mode.

Multiple Graphics Input Mode

When the host activates Multiple mode, the graphics input cursor displays, and processing of received data continues. Only the host can exit Multiple mode. Multiple mode lets you send many position reports to the host before leaving Multiple mode.

To move the graphics input cursor and send a position report to the host

1	When the host activates ReGIS GIN mode, use your mouse, ARROW keys (small movements), or SHIFT+ARROW keys (large movements) to move the cursor to the desired location.

2	Press a mouse button, or any key other than ARROW or SHIFT+ARROW, to send a position report to the host.


About Tektronix Graphics

KEA! supports all of the Tektronix 4010/4014 features available on VT terminals. It supports GIN mode using either the mouse, the ARROW keys, or any Windows positioning device. It also provides zoom, and several additional features.

A Tektronix terminal creates images on a matrix of 4096 by 4096 tekpoints. However, its screen only displays 3120 tekpoints vertically.

Normally, the host sends a control code to put KEA! into and out of Tektronix mode. However, you can switch modes manually.

To manually enter (or leave) Tektronix mode

1	Choose Terminal from the Options menu.

2	To enter Tektronix mode, in the Terminal General dialog box, set the Mode option to 401X,

-or-

To leave Tektronix mode, set the Mode option to another value.

There are several Tektronix modes:  Alpha, Graph, Point Plot, Incremental Plot, and GIN.
The Retrographics VT640 extended drawing modes and control codes to enter and exit Tektronix mode are also supported.
You can also use the DEC defined VT340 control sequence CSI ? 38 h to enter Tektronix mode.

  Tektronix: Characters.

  Tektronix: Color

  Tektronix: Graphics Input Mode

  Tektronix: Line Style

  Tektronix: Page Full Condition

  Tektronix: Printing

  Tektronix: Special Keys


Tektronix: Page Full Condition

When a Page Full Condition occurs, received characters are no longer displayed. The Page Full message appears and a Release button is displayed on the status bar. Pressing this button, which emulates the VT PREV SCRN key, or ESC erases the screen and clears the Page Full Condition. (On most personal computer keyboards, the PG UP key emulates PREV SCRN.)

To set the Page Full Condition

1.	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2.	In the Graphics dialog box, select one of the following values from the Margin Control drop-down list.

Select	To Set the Page Full Condition
1	When the cursor reaches the bottom of the first margin
2	When the cursor reaches the bottom of the second margin
None	Never
Note  The Margin Control option in the Graphics dialog box is equivalent to the MarginControl switch on a 4014.


Tektronix: Graphics Input Mode

Graphics Input (GIN) mode is activated by the host. While in GIN mode, the graphics input cursor displays, and processing of received data temporarily stops. A crosshair cursor displays.

In GIN mode, the host requests you to specify a screen location. You specify the location by moving the crosshair cursor to the desired position, and pressing a key or mouse button. You can move the graphics input cursor using the mouse or the ARROW keys.

While in GIN mode, you can zoom the image in the usual way (changing Font size, or window size with Font size set to Auto). The area containing the cursor is magnified. You can use the scroll bars to pan the image. If you hold down a mouse button while moving the cursor, the window pans the image, and keeps the cursor visible.

To send a position report to the host and exit Tektronix GIN mode

1	When the host activates GIN mode, use your mouse, ARROW keys (small movements), or SHIFT+ARROW keys (large movements) to move the cursor to the desired location.

2	Press then release a mouse button. On the release, the cursor position is reported to the host. (You remain in GIN mode while you hold down the button.)
-or-
Press any key that normally sends a character. The character is sent to the host, followed by the position report.

Note:  At the end of the position report, the default GIN terminator, CR, is sent. If your host requires a different GIN terminator, you can change the value under GIN Terminator in the Graphics dialog box.
The host can also send the control sequence ESC ENQ to exit GIN mode.


Tektronix: Aspect Ratio

A Tektronix terminal creates images on a matrix of 4096 by 4096 tekpoints. However, its screen only displays 3120 tekpoints vertically.

The height-to-width ratio of a personal computer screen differs from a Tektronix terminal. By default, your Tektronix image is displayed using only 64 of the 80 columns available on the VT page. This setting gives a true aspect ratio. You can control the size of the screen used to display the Tektronix image and make the image larger and easier to read.

The Display option in the  Graphics dialog box controls the size of the emulation screen used to display the Tektronix image. The normal emulation window contains 80 columns and 24 lines.

To make a Tektronix image larger and easier to read

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	To display the image using the full emulation window, in the Graphics dialog box under Display, select 80x24. This stretches the aspect ratio wider than a true Tektronix image.
-or-
To display the image using 80 columns and extend the image vertically to the equivalent of 30 VT lines, in the Graphics dialog box under Display, select 80x30. This keeps the aspect ratio correct.


Tektronix: Color

A 4014 terminal, a monochrome terminal, supports four line styles. The 4105 terminal supports color, and eight line styles. You can add color to your Tektronix images by mapping your 4014 line styles to color, or using the 4105 color indexes.

To map line style to color

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	In the  Graphics dialog box, select one of the following values from the Line Style Map drop-down list:

Select	To
Style	Use normal line styles. Do not perform color mapping.
Color	Map line styles to colors as shown. All lines are solid.
Both	Map line styles to colors as shown. Maintain original line styles.
Line Style	Color Index	Windows Color

solid	15	bold white
dot	2	bold red
dot-dash	3	bold green
short dash	1	bold blue
long dash	5	bold cyan
dot-dot-dash	4	bold magenta
long/short dash	6	bold yellow
medium dash	14	yellow
Note  Changing the line style map does not affect the images already drawn on the screen. You also can map characters to colors as they use the solid attribute.
You can change the actual colors displayed for the 4100 series color indexes in the Colors dialog box.


Tektronix: Characters

KEA! supports the four vector character sizes of the 4014 terminal:

56 (x) by 88 (y) tekpoints	34 (x) by 53 (y) tekpoints
51 (x) by 82 (y) tekpoints	31 (x) by 48 (y) tekpoints
and offers the following additional vector character sizes:

51 (x) by 127 (y) tekpoints*	103 (x) by 180 (y) tekpoints
25 (x) by 53 (y) tekpoints*	158 (x) by 270 (y) tekpoints
51 (x) by 90 (y) tekpoints	205 (x) by 360 (y) tekpoints
* These two sizes are only available if you include the CustomTekCharacterSizes option in your Windows Registry.

You can display characters in one of the 4014 vector-generated character sizes, or map the characters to larger, easier to read characters.

To change the size of displayed characters

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose  Graphics.

2	To display characters in one of the 4014 vector-generated character sizes, select Aligned from the Characters drop-down list in the Graphics dialog box.
-or-
To map the characters to larger, easier to read characters, select Enlarged from the Characters drop-down list in the Graphics dialog box.

Note  Because there are only two sizes of enlarged characters: 33 by 66 tekpoints and 60 by 133 tekpoints, the characters do not align exactly with the graphics. This is similar to a VT340 command.
You can also use the zoom feature to interactively enlarge small text, making it easier to read.
When the host changes the character size, the characters already displayed on the screen are not changed. Instead, the screen is cleared.

To select either vector or bitmap display characters

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	To generate characters like the 4014 characters, select Vector from the Font Type drop-down list in the Graphics dialog box.
-or-
To produce characters from KEA!'s built-in fonts, select Bitmap from the Font Type drop-down list in the Graphics dialog box.

Note  Bitmap characters usually look better, but Vector characters are more accurate in size.

To choose a character set that the host cannot change

1	From the Options menu, select Terminal, then choose Graphics.

2	In the Graphics dialog box, select either ASCII or APL from the Character Set drop-down list.

Note  The Character Set option in the Graphics dialog box is similar to the ASCII/Alt switch on a 4014 terminal.
The values ASCII and APL force the use of the named character set. The host cannot change either of these character sets. If, under Character Set, you select Prog, the host can change the character set with control codes.

Control Characters

You can change the effect of some control characters in the Graphics dialog box.

The option CR Effect lets you choose whether a linefeed is also performed when a CR is received.

The option LF Effect lets you choose whether a carriage return is also performed when a LF is received.

The option BS Effect lets you choose whether a received ASCII BS will merely backspace the cursor (default) or if a BS received in Alpha Mode will backspace the cursor and erase the character. This is a KEA! feature; the real 4014 uses storage-tube display and cannot erase individual characters.

The option DEL Effect lets you choose whether an ASCII DEL character is processed the same as any other received character (Low Y value) or whether a received DEL character is ignored. You should set this option to Ignore if your host sends DEL as a pad character.


Tektronix: Printing

When you print Tektronix images, you can select whether to print the currently viewed portion of the image or the entire 4096 x 3120 image. Your selection under Extent in the Print dialog box (File menu) determines what is printed. If you select Window, KEA! prints the currently viewed portion of the image. If you select Page, it prints the 4096 x 3120 image.

You cannot control the size of the printed image. The image is scaled to fill the output page while maintaining the correct aspect ratio. You can select portrait or landscape orientation in the Print Setup dialog box.

Note  This feature is only available in the graphics version of KEA!.

To print Tektronix hardcopies automatically

1	From the Options menu, choose Terminal.

2	From the Terminal menu, choose Graphics.

3	In the Graphics dialog box under Auto Print, select Enabled.

Note  If you enable the Tektronix Auto Print option, a hardcopy is produced whenever a Page Full Condition occurs. When the hardcopy finishes printing, the Page Full Condition and the screen are cleared. This is equivalent to the AutoPrint switch on a 4014 terminal.


Definition of PRODNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of SHORTNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of EDITNAME bookmark:KEA! Edit


KEA! Basics
Quick Overview of the Emulator

This section provides a brief overview of KEA! for the new user who wants to get started quickly. It can be read like a book by clicking the forward button in each topic.

Online Help and Customer Support

More detailed Help on these topics, and many others, is available to you at any time during your KEA! session. Just choose Contents from the Help menu or click the Help Contents button on the Toolbar.

Alternatively, you can get context sensitive Help by choosing the Help button in any dialog box.

Attachmate Customer Support is also available from 6 A.M. to 5 P.M. (Pacific Time) Monday through Friday.

Topics

  Overview of KEA!

  Before you begin...

  Starting your first session

  Configuring Communications

  Connecting and Logging in

  Resizing the KEA! Window

  Transferring Files

  Saving Layouts

  Saving and Exiting


Overview of KEA!

KEA!, one of Attachmate's family of emulation products, lets you use your personal computer to emulate a VT terminal and communicate with your VAX or UNIX host. While maintaining your connection to your host, you can also work with other Windows applications.

Each active connection between KEA! and a host system is called a display session. A variety of communication methods is supported, and you can run multiple sessions simultaneously. You can also copy and paste information between sessions and between KEA! and other applications.

Other KEA! features include:

•	The multiple page and cursor coupling features of the VT terminal, variable page lengths, and 80 or 132 columns.

•	Six different protocols for transferring files between your personal computer and a host.

•	A History feature that lets you scroll back through previously received data without recalling it from the host.

•	A comprehensive macro language that you can use to automate many processes. For example, a macro could be written to automatically log in to your host on startup.

•	An on-screen VT keyboard that gives you access to keys that might not be easily accessible on your actual keyboard.

•	All the VT character sets including the National Replacement sets, and the IBM graphics character set.

•	Variable font sizes and true representation of all character and line attributes: bold, blink, underline, inverse, and double-high/double-wide.

•	User-defined menus, dialog boxes, keys, and buttons.

•	A personal dialing directory that you can use with your modem.

•	All the VT printing functions, and some additional printing features.

•	The graphics version of KEA! emulates the ReGIS, Tektronix, and sixel graphics features of the VT340 terminal.


Before you begin...

Before you can begin your first KEA! session, you should know the communication method you will use.

There might be more than one communication method available to you. If you are unsure of what your selection should be, contact your system administrator before you proceed.

The options to be selected vary for each communication method, and there are defaults provided for each. These defaults might already have been modified to suit your environment by your system administrator.

Other options, such as transfer method and terminal type, can be bypassed at startup and changed later, during your session.

You can customize your display at any time; your selections don't have to be made prior to starting your first session. Aspects of KEA!'s operation that you can control include color, window size, and font. For more information on customizing your application window, refer to Help Contents.


Starting your first session

The first time you start KEA! you are presented with the New KEA! Session dialog box where you type a name for your session. There are no existing sessions displayed. Note  For additional or subsequent sessions, select New Session from the File menu to access the New KEA! Session dialog box and begin a new session. You can also use the template feature to base the new session on an existing (already configured) session in the displayed list.
After you have named your session, you should set up your communication protocol so that you can connect to a host.

To start your first session

1	To start the application, choose KEA! from the KEA! Program group. The New KEA! Session dialog box is displayed.

2	Type a Name for your session.

3	Choose OK. The Session Setup dialog box is displayed.


Configuring Communications

In the Session Setup dialog box, you must select and configure a Communications Port. In most cases, if you try to select a port type that is not available to you, the configure button is dimmed and the explanation box notes that this communication method is not available.

The configuration options to be selected vary for each communication type and there are defaults provided for each. These defaults may have already been modified to suit your environment by your system administrator. If the default options are not suitable, find out from your system administrator what you should select.

To find out more about configuration options for your communication type, click the appropriate selection below.

  About Serial Ports

  About Modem

  About LAT

  About TCP/IP (Telnet)

  About NetWare for DEC Access

Additional information on each type of communication is available through Help Contents.

The Session Setup dialog box also includes areas for selection of transfer method and terminal type. You can bypass these selections now, and make them later if needed.

To select and configure a communications port

1	In the Session Setup dialog box, select a communications port from the list displayed.

2	Choose Configure. The Setup dialog box for your selection is displayed.

3	Select your configuration options, or use the defaults presented.

4	Choose OK to return to the Session Setup dialog box.

5	In the Session Setup dialog box, choose OK to begin your session.


Connecting and Logging in

When you exit the Session Setup dialog box, a connection to your host will be established. (If Auto Connect on the Connection menu has been cleared, you can use Connect on the Connection menu.)

A typical login procedure may include one or both of the following steps:

•	Type your host name at the terminal server prompt:

DEC server>Connect Hostname

where Hostname=the name of your host.

•	Type a Username and password:

Username:Your user name

Password:Your password

The password you type will not be echoed back to the screen; that is, you won't see what you type.


Resizing the KEA! Window
Resizing the Window

You can make the characters on the screen appear larger or smaller. The window size, the character size, and the portion of the VT page that is displayed can all change with the font width you select.

Because KEA! emulates a VT terminal, resizing the window will never allow you to display a page wider than the defined number of columns (either 80 or 132).

To resize the window, keeping the full width of the VT page in view

1	From the Options menu, choose View. The View dialog box will appear.

2	From the Font Width list, select Auto. Click OK to exit the dialog box and return to your session.

3	Use your mouse to drag the window borders until the window is an appropriate size. Do not maximize the window. KEA! adjusts the character size to show exactly 80 (or 132) columns of text in the window.
-or-
If you want the application window to fill the entire desktop, click the maximize button in the upper right corner of the window, or double-click the title bar. The window will fill the desktop, and the character size will be automatically adjusted to fill the window.

To choose a character size that does not change with the window size

1	From the Options menu, choose View. The View dialog box will appear.

2	From the Font Width list, select a font width other than Auto. Click OK to exit the dialog box and return to your session.

3	Use your mouse to drag the window borders until the window is the size you want. It will show an integral number of characters, up to a maximum of 80 (or 132). The character size will not change, but parts of the VT page might be hidden from view.

4	Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to view hidden areas of the VT page.

Note  You can eliminate any excess gray space that appears in the application window around the VT page by double-clicking anywhere in the gray space.


Transferring Files

You can transfer individual or multiple files between your personal computer and your host with the Shuttle command. Using Shuttle, you can navigate the local and host directory trees to view files in the current directories, and build a list of files to transfer in either or both directions.

Shuttle supports FTP for transferring either binary or text files. In order to use FTP for file transfers, you must be able to make a TCP/IP connection.

Shuttle also supports the X/Y/ZModem and Kermit file transfer protocols, which are used to transfer both binary and text files over the current VT terminal connection. Your host must support the protocol you choose.

A record of file transfers made during the current session is kept in the Transfer Log. To view the log, choose Log in the Shuttle dialog box. The log is also accessible through other Transfer menu dialog boxes. It is discarded when you exit.

  Transferring Files with FTP

  Transferring Files with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

There are additional methods available for transferring individual files. For more information, refer to Help Contents.


Transferring Files with Kermit or XYZ Modem
Transferring Files with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

To use Shuttle with Kermit or X/Y/ZModem

Before you begin, you must know the operating system your host uses and the transfer protocols your host supports.

1	Ensure that you are connected to a host. Then, from the Transfer menu, choose Shuttle. Or, choose the Shuttle button on the Toolbar. Either action will display the File Shuttle dialog box.

2	Select a host type from the Host list box.

3	To display the File Transfer dialog box and select a file transfer protocol from the drop-down list, choose Configure. Choose OK to return to the File Shuttle dialog box.

4	To transfer PC files to the host, select a drive and directory in the upper left corner of the File Shuttle dialog box. Click the double dots (..) to move back one level in the directory tree. Double-click a file in the PC Files box to add it to the Transfer List. You can select multiple files.

To transfer files from the Host, select the box marked Display Host Files/Directories. Select a directory in the upper right corner of the File Shuttle dialog box. Double-click a file in the Host Files box to add it to the Transfer List. You can select multiple files.

5	To initiate the file transfer, choose Transfer. The Transfer Status dialog box is displayed.

Note  It is not necessary to monitor the file transfer. If you like, you can minimize KEA! during file transfer by clicking the minimize button at the top right of the Transfer Status dialog box. When the transfer is complete, the icon will beep and show 'Done' as the title.

6	When the transfer is complete, choose Exit to exit the File Shuttle dialog box.


Transferring Files with FTP

In order to use FTP for file transfers, you must be able to make a TCP/IP connection, and the host must have an FTP server.

To use Shuttle with FTP

Before you begin, you must know the name of the host to which you want to connect.

1	Ensure that FTP is selected as your transfer protocol in the File Transfer dialog box (Transfer Options menu).

2	From the Transfer menu, choose Shuttle, or click the Shuttle button on the toolbar.

3	To make an FTP connection, choose Connect or choose Display Host Files/Directories.

The FTP Connect dialog box is displayed and shows your default login information. Make any changes that you require, or choose OK to accept the defaults. You must fill in at least the Host Name and UserID fields before you can complete a connection.

4	To transfer PC files to the host, select a drive and directory in the upper left corner of the File Shuttle dialog box. Click the double dots (..) to move back one level in the directory tree. Double-click a file in the PC Files box to add it to the Transfer List. You can select multiple files.

To transfer files from the Host, select the box marked Display Host Files/Directories. Select a directory in the upper right corner of the File Shuttle dialog box. Double-click a file in the Host Files box to add it to the Transfer List. You can select multiple files.

5	To initiate the file transfer, choose Transfer. The Transfer Status dialog box is displayed.

6	You can optionally minimize KEA! during the file transfer. Use the minimize button at the top right of the Transfer Status dialog box. The transfer continues with the icon showing the progress of the transfer. When the transfer completes, the icon will beep and show "Done" as the title.

7	Choose Exit.


Saving Layouts

You can run KEA! in multiple application windows, with each window containing a session with the same or a different host. You can even have multiple sessions connected through the same port if your network hardware and software support multiple sessions.

If you create and save a layout of all the sessions you run simultaneously, you can later restart all the KEA! sessions with their various options (such as host connection, position and size of the window, and font size) already configured. If you want to restart this layout directly from an icon, you can create an icon for it.

When you open a previously saved layout, all the included KEA! sessions are started and host connections made automatically.

For more information, refer to Help Contents.

To save a layout

1	From the Window menu, choose Save Layout. The Save Layout dialog box is displayed.

2	Type a name for the layout.

3	Optionally, to create an icon for the layout, select the Create Icon check box and specify a Program Group name.

4	Choose OK to exit the dialog box.

To start a previously saved layout

1	From the Window menu, choose Open Layout. The Open Layout dialog box is displayed.

2	Select a name from the list, or type a layout name.

3	Choose OK to exit the dialog box and open the layout.


Saving and Exiting

Saving

You can change your configured options, such as communication or transfer protocol, terminal type, font, or colors, whenever you like. Just choose the appropriate command from Options or another menu, and change the desired dialog box option.

To avoid having to select the same options every time you open a session, you should save your changes before exiting. This ensures that you will not have to reconfigure communications every time you start. Although you can save your changes by choosing Save from the File menu, you are generally prompted to save your changes when you exit.

Exiting

There are several ways to exit KEA!. You can choose Close Session from the File menu or from the Control menu, or double-click the Control menu button. To quit all open sessions and exit the application, choose Exit All from the File menu. If you exit KEA! with a network connection open, you may be asked if you want to close the connection first.

You may or may not be prompted to save changes when you exit KEA!. It depends on your selection for the option Save changes on Exit in the General Settings dialog box (Options menu, Settings command).

For more information, refer to Help Contents.


Definition of PRODNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of SHORTNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of EDITNAME bookmark:KEA! Edit


Glossary of terms
Glossary

A - B

Active Page

Active Position

Active Window

Alias Response

ANSI

ANSI Character Types

ANSI Terminal Specification

Application Software

Application Window

Argument

Array

ASCII

Attribute

Autoprint

Backing Store

Baud Rate

Bitmap

Bottom Margin

Buffer

C

C0 and C1 Codes

Capture

CCITT

Character Attribute

Character Set

Character-coding Format

Client

Clipboard

Code Table

Columns

Configuration File

Configure

Constant

Control Codes

Control Functions

Coupling

CSI Code

Current Page

Cursor

D

Data Bits

DDE

Debug

DEC Multinational Character Set

DEC Special Graphics Character Set

DEC Supplemental Graphic Character Set

DEC Technical Character Set

Desktop

Device Attributes

Device Driver

Dialog Box

Display Controls Mode

Display List

Download

Dynamically Redefinable Character Set (DRCS)

E - F

Echo

Emulation

Emulation Window

Ethernet

Expression

Firewall

Flow Control

Font Set

Font Size

Font Styles

FTP

Full-Duplex

Function

Function Keys

G - K

Gateway

Global Variable

Graphic Table

Half-Duplex

History

History Buffer

History File

HoldScreen Key

Host System

Hotlink

Internet Address

ISO

ISO Latin-1 Supplemental Set

L - N

LAN

LAT

Layout File

Line Attributes

Line Drop

Local Mode

Local Edit

Local Variable

Macro

Map

Margins

Menu Bar

Modem

MSU

National Replacement Character Sets (NRCS)

O - Q

Online

Operator

Page

Page Format

Page Memory

Pan

Parallel Port

Parity

PATHWORKS

Ping

Pixel

PlayBack

Port

PowerStation

Print Buffer

Printer Controller Mode

Protocol

Proxy

R - S

ReGIS

Resolution

Scrolling

Scrolling Region

Select

Serial Port

Server

Session

7-Bit and 8-Bit Codes

Sixel

SmartPad

Spooler

SSU

Statement

Stop Bit

String

Subscript

Supplemental Character Set

T - Z

TCP/IP

Tektronix, 4014

Telnet

Terminator

Token Ring

Transparent Mode

Upload

User-Defined Function

User-Defined Keys (UDKs)

Variable

VT Status Line

XON/XOFF

Zoom


Active Page

The page that receives data from the host system; the host selects the active page. The text cursor appears on the active page only. The VT terminal has up to six pages of display, depending on the selected number of lines per page.

Whether the active page is the current (displayed) page depends on the page you select to display, and whether you enabled page coupling.


Active Position

The location, indicated by the cursor, where the next typed character will appear.


Active Window

Window currently in use.


Alias Response

A sequence the terminal uses to identify itself to the host as some other type of terminal. You can configure these responses. Each response corresponds to a certain operating level.


ANSI

The American National Standards Institute.


ANSI Character Types

The American National Standards Institute graphic (alphanumeric), and control character type definitions.

You can display graphic characters on the screen. These include letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and any other displayable character.

Usually, you do not display control characters. You use them to make the terminal perform specific functions in data communication and text processing. Control characters include carriage return (CR), form feed (FF), and escape (ESC).


ANSI Terminal Specification

The American National Standards Institute specification for terminal functionality. DIGITAL VT terminals implement many of the functions, and extensions to the functions, defined in this specification. KEA! implements the VT ANSI features and extensions, and numerous extensions of its own.


Application Software

A program that performs a specific function, such as word processing.


Application Window

The screen area (window) containing the work area, and associated information displays, such as a menu bar. The application window contains the title bar and menu bar on the top, the emulation window in the center, and the status bar on the bottom.


Argument

Numbers, text, or graphics that refine the action or result of a macro function.


Array

Table of related variables.


ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is an 8-bit code developed by the American National Standards Institute for the exchange of information between communications devices, and their associated equipment. The ASCII character set contains both control and graphics characters.


Attribute

Font style you can assign to a character such as bold or italic; a size (height or width) you can assign to a line.


Autoprint

Mode, controlled by the host, in which data appears on the screen and the printer.


Baud Rate

The speed, measured in bits per second, at which the terminal communicates with the host system, or a printer.


Bottom Margin

The last line of the scrolling region.


Buffer

Temporary storage area in memory used to hold information.


C0 and C1 Codes

Control characters in the 256 character set used by VT terminals. The set consists of two halves, lower and upper, each containing 128 characters. The first 32 characters of the lower part are the C0 codes; the first 32 characters of the upper part are the C1 codes.


Capture

KEA! command used to record all incoming data in a file. You can use it to transfer simple text files, or record an entire exchange between your computer and the host.


CCITT

Comité Consultatif Internationale de Telegraphie et Telephonie. An international organization that defines standards for communications equipment such as telephones and telegraphs.


Character Attribute

A characteristic (format) you can assign to a character that determines how the character appears on the screen. Character attributes include bold, italic, underline, and so on.


Character Set

A group of graphic and control characters stored as a unit in the terminal. You can display graphic characters on the screen. You use control characters to perform special functions.


Character-coding Format

Coding formats for characters; 7-bit coding uses 7 bits to send each character to the host system, 8-bit coding uses 8 bits. The ASCII character set uses 7-bit coding; the DEC Multinational and ISO character sets use 8-bit coding.


Client

Application or system that requests services or resources from another application or system.


Clipboard

Temporary storage area in Windows used to transfer information. You can cut or copy information onto the Clipboard, and paste it into another document or application.


Code Table

A list of all characters in a character set and their codes. Most standard character sets put similar characters into groups, so they have similar codes.


Columns

A vertical row of character positions on the screen. You can display lines containing 80 or 132 columns.


Configuration File

A file that describes a particular set of KEA! options.


Configure

Select options that determine the characteristics and appearance of the application and emulation windows, and features such as Communications.


Constant

Fixed value that does not change during macro execution.


Control Codes

Specify terminal commands or formatting instructions such as LF (line feed) or CR (carriage return); usually, preceded by a caret (^).


Control Functions

Commands an application uses to make KEA! perform special functions. These include control characters, device control strings, control sequences, and escape sequences.


Coupling

Keeps the cursor visible when you pan beyond the window edges in a particular direction. You can couple the cursor to horizontal or vertical movement, or to display a different page when the cursor moves to it in memory.


CSI Code

Control Sequence Introducer code. The control function used to start most ANSI commands. You can transmit CSI as the two 7-bit characters ESC [, or the single 8-bit character CSI ( 9B hex).


Current Page

The displayed page.


Cursor

The indicator of the active position on the screen. The text cursor usually appears as a blinking underline or block; the mouse cursor as an I-bar symbol.


Data Bits

Number of bits, 7 or 8, in each data packet sent between two computers.


DDE

Dynamic Data Exchange. Windows-defined protocol for transferring data between Windows applications. KEA! supports DDE as a server and a client.


Debug

Test for and correct errors in a macro.


DEC Multinational Character Set

A character set consisting of two parts: 7-bit (left half), and 8-bit (right half). Each half contains its own control characters. This is the VT420 terminal's default character set.


DEC Special Graphics Character Set

A 7-bit character set of 94 graphic characters including special symbols and line segments. Also called the VT100 Line Drawing character set.


DEC Supplemental Graphic Character Set

An 8-bit character set of 94 graphic characters including letters with accents and diacritical marks, and special symbols.


DEC Technical Character Set

A 7-bit character set containing scientific and mathematical characters used to write formulas and equations. It includes the Greek alphabet, and mathematical symbols.


Desktop

Background of your screen on which windows, icons, and dialog boxes appear.


Device Attributes

Characteristics, stored as control sequences, that describe the terminal and its configuration. When the host requests it, the terminal sends a device attribute (DA) response. This DA response identifies the particular type of terminal.


Device Driver

Program that enables a specific piece of hardware (device) to communicate with Windows; usually has DRV as file name extension.


Dialog Box

Window that displays options for you to choose to give the application the information it needs to carry out a command.


Display Controls Mode

A special operating mode in which you can display control codes characters. In this mode, KEA! does not perform any control functions, but only displays the characters. This mode is controlled by the Transparent option in the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu).


Download

Move data or files from the host system to KEA!. You can use Shuttle, Capture, or Kermit, Xmodem, Ymodem, Zmodem, or FTP Receive.


Dynamically Redefinable Character Set (DRCS)

A character set that an application loads into KEA! from the host. You can design your own set. Also called Downloadable or Soft Character Set.


Echo

Display data sent to the host system on the screen as you type. If the host does not send back characters it receives you should select the Local Echo mode option in theTerminal General dialog box (Options Terminal menu).


Emulation

Mode in which a device imitates the behavior of a different device.


Emulation Window

The area of the application window containing the VT terminal face, scroll bars, and VT status line. Usually, the emulation window entirely fills the application window. When it does not, there is a border around the emulation window.


Ethernet

A type of local area network topology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access wth Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) technology, which allows the hardware to sense when two computers are simultaneously trying to transmit data.


Expression

Combination of variables, operators, functions, and so on that the macro evaluates to a single result.


Firewall

A security gateway that limits access to an internal network by the rest of the Internet.


Flow Control

Processes that regulate the rate at which data transfers from one device to another. This compensates for the differences in input and output data flow.


Font Set

Group of fonts designed for use with a specific device resolution; determine how the text looks on the screen and printer.


Font Size

Height of a printed character; also called point size. One point equals 1/72 of an inch.


Font Styles

Formats you can assign to characters — bold, underline, italic, normal, or combinations of these; also called text styles, attributes, and type styles.


FTP

File Transfer Protocol. A high level protocol used for transferring files between machines. FTP is usually implemented in application programs and makes use of the lower level Telnet and TCP protocols.


Full-Duplex

A communications mode in which the signal flows in both directions at the same time. This means that you can transmit and receive data simultaneously. KEA! normally operates in full-duplex mode.


Function

KEA! macro language command that tells the macro to perform an action and/or return a value; always followed by parentheses. Other macro language commands can use the returned value.


Function Keys

A row or rows of keys that perform special local functions, such as displaying Help.


Gateway

A device that attaches two or more networks, and routes packets between them. An Internet gateway routes IP packets among the networks it is connected to. Gateways are the means by which TCP/IP machines can communicate with each other, even when they are not on the same network.


Global Variable

Placeholder for values that can change during macro execution; available to all macros while KEA! is running.


Graphic Table

The terminal's two part in-use table. The left half contains the GL codes for use in 7-bit or 8-bit environments. The right half contains the GR codes for use in 8-bit environments only.


Half-Duplex

A communications mode in which the signal flows in both directions, but only one direction at a time.


History

KEA! feature that lets you store information that scrolls off the screen.


History Buffer

A temporary storage area where you can keep data no longer displayed in the emulation window. You can view, copy, and paste this data.


History File

File in which you store information from the History Buffer; uses HIS as default file extension.


HoldScreen Key

Causes output to the screen to pause until you press the HOLDSCREEN key again. On the IBM Enhanced keyboard, F1 functions as the HOLDSCREEN key.


Host System

The computer system to which KEA! connects.


Hotlink

Special Copy and Paste operations that use DDE to update information copied from KEA! and pasted (linked) into other applications or other sessions.


ISO

International Organization for Standardization.


Internet Address

A unique 32 bit number defining each machine connected to the Internet. It is used in all communications with a TCP/IP host. It uniquely identifies the network and the specific host address on that network. The number of address bits that define the network and the number that define the host vary according to the class of the address.


ISO Latin-1 Supplemental Set

An 8-bit character set including letters with accents and diacritical marks, and special symbols. For most purposes, this set is an extension of the DEC Multinational character set.


LAN

Local Area Network.


LAT

Local Area Transport. Digital Equipment Corporation's network protocol for terminal access using Ethernet.


Layout File

Layout refers to an arrangement of KEA! application windows, their positions on the desktop, and their host connections. A layout file stores current information about such a layout, allowing you to restart all the sessions in the layout at a later time.


Line Attributes

Characteristics (formats) you apply to a line to change the way it displays on the screen. KEA! supports the same line attributes as DIGITAL VT terminals: double-wide, double-high/double-wide, and normal.


Line Drop

Unrequested communications disconnection. Most network connections have built-in functions to indicate a broken connection. KEA! generally notifies the user when this happens.


Local Mode

An operating state in which keystrokes are displayed on the screen, but not sent to the host.


Local Edit

An editing mode in which the text you type is stored in page memory. You can edit this text locally, and then send a block of edited text to the host.


Local Variable

Placeholder for values that can change during macro execution; available only within the macro in which you define it.


Macro

Sequence of actions stored in a file; similar to a program.


Map

Assign sequences, VT functions, macros, or macro statements to keyboard keys, mouse buttons, and user-defined buttons.


Margins

The top, bottom, left, and right boundaries of a page. The host cannot write or scroll data beyond these margins. Also called scrolling margins.


Menu Bar

Horizontal bar in the application window that contains the names of the KEA! menus; appears below the Title bar.


Modem

A communications device that transmits and receives data over a telephone line. A modem converts (modulates) computer signals into signals it can transmit over a telephone line. It also demodulates signals it receives over a telephone line into signals the computer can understand.


MSU

Multi-session Serial Utility. KEAlink MSU is an implementation of the DIGITAL-defined SSU [image] Utility for providing multiple sessions on a single serial line.


National Replacement Character Sets (NRCs)

A class of 7-bit character sets created for different languages and dialects.


Online

An operating state in which KEA! can communicate with a host system. KEA! sends data entered at the keyboard to the host, and displays data received from the host on the screen.


On-screen VT Keyboard

KEA! provides an image of a VT keyboard on your Windows desktop. When you click a key on the on-screen keyboard, it is sent to the host just as if you pressed that actual key on your keyboard.


Operator

Word or mathematical sign (such as AND, + ) that tells the macro how to evaluate the values on either side of the word or sign.


Page

A section of the terminal's page memory. Each page has left, right, top, and bottom scrolling margins. You can define the size and layout of a page by using setup features or control functions.


Page Format

The size and number of pages in the terminal's page memory. You can arrange page memory into 1 to 6 pages. You also can define the margins of a page.


Page Memory

An area in memory that stores the information on the screen. You can divide page memory into a variable number of pages each containing the same number of lines.


Pan

The action of moving the page behind the window. This lets you view information not displayed in the window when the page is larger than the window. You use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to pan the page.


Parallel Port

Port used for devices that accept information one 8-bit word at a time; uses multiple lines to transfer data.


Parity

Error-detection method that checks the validity of a transmitted character; both systems must use the same type of parity.


PATHWORKS

Digital Equipment Corporation's PC LAN product, formerly called PCSA.


Ping

Packet InterNet Groper. Refers to the program used on the Internet to test the availability of a host by sending an echo request and waiting for a reply.


Pixel

Pixel, or pel (picture element) refers to the smallest displayable unit on a video screen. The resolution of a video screen is measured in pixels. For example, a standard VGA screen is 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels high. KEA! uses pixels as the measure of the font width.


PlayBack

KEA! command to display file contents in emulation window.


Port

Connection or socket used to attach a device, such as a printer or modem, to your personal computer. Your computer sends information to the attached device through a cable.


PowerStation

Attachmate's VT200/300 layout keyboard for the personal computer, with optional WPS gold key labeling. With DOS and Windows, the PowerStation functions as an Enhanced keyboard; with KEA!, it virtually eliminates keyboard remapping, as it positions each key exactly as it is on a real VT terminal. The PowerStation keyboard clearly marks both VT and personal computer functions on the keys for easy use with KEA!, ZSTEM, and other personal computer programs.


Print Buffer

Temporary storage area for information sent to a printer.


Printer Controller Mode

Mode in which data is sent directly from the host to a printer, without displaying it on the screen.


Protocol

A set of rules and procedures for communication between devices. For example, Kermit is a file transfer protocol, and XON/XOFF is a flow control protocol for serial communications.


Proxy

A server that works in conjunction with a firewall to provide network security. A proxy acts as an intermediary to limit access between clients in an internal network and outside servers.


Resolution

Number of dots that make up an image on a screen or printer. The more dots, the higher the resolution, and the finer and smoother images appear when displayed at a given size.


Scrolling

Moving data between the margins of the current page. Data that scrolls past the margins does not remain in page memory, but you can save it in the History Buffer.


Scrolling Region

The area on the current page between the top, bottom, left, and right page margins. The default scrolling region is the complete page.


Select

Mark a section of text for cutting or copying to the Clipboard. You can mark lines or blocks of text with the mouse or keyboard.


Serial Port

Port used for devices that accept information one bit at a time; uses a single line to transfer data.


Server

System or application that provides shared resources (such as printers) and services to other computers and applications.


Session

An active connection between KEA! and a host system. You can start additional sessions with the same or different hosts, each session in its own application window. Sessions can be saved with their current parameters and started at a later time.


7-Bit and 8-Bit Codes

Coding formats for characters; 7-bit coding uses 7 bits to send each character to the host system, 8-bit coding uses 8 bits. The ASCII character set uses 7-bit coding; the DEC Multinational and ISO character sets use 8-bit coding.


SmartPad

An area of the window that contains a display of user-defined buttons. You can create a SmartPad to display on the status bar or in a separate window.


Spooler

System program that automatically runs when you choose a print command. Lets you print a series of documents or files in the background while you continue working in the application.


SSU [image] Utility

Session Support Utility. SSU is a DIGITAL-defined mechanism that provides multiple sessions on a single serial line.


Statement

KEA! macro language command that tells the macro what action to perform.


Stop Bit

Timing unit between transmitted characters.


String

Sequence of alphanumeric characters.


Subscript

String or integer used to access an item in an array.


Supplemental Character Set

The 8-bit character set the terminal normally uses; usually, the DEC Multinational, or ISO Latin1 character set.


TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. TCP is the Internet standard transport level protocol. It provides full duplex reliable stream service, which application level protocols such as Telnet and FTP rely on.


Telnet

Protocol for terminal access to hosts using TCP/IP.


Terminator

Control character(s) that signal the end of a line, document, and so on.


Token Ring

A ring style network topology where computers on the network communicate by passing around a virtual entity called a token. Only the computer with the "token" can transmit data onto the network at any given time.


Transparent Mode

A special operating mode in which you can display control codes characters. In this mode, KEA! does not perform any control functions, but only displays the characters. This mode is controlled by the Transparent option in the Display dialog box (Options Terminal menu).


Upload

To transfer a file from a personal computer to a host.


User-Defined Function

Macro function you create with the Function statement.


User-Defined Keys (UDKs)

The Digital VT terminals defined fifteen of the top row keys on the keyboard as User-Defined Keys which can be used to send selected characters or control functions. You use them as SHIFT+F6 through SHIFT+F20. Normally the Host computer assigns these keys.


Variable

Placeholder for values that can change during macro execution.


VT Status Line

A line of text that appears below the emulation window. There are three possible settings: indicator (displays operating information about KEA!), host-writable (displays information provided by an application), and disabled.


XON/XOFF

Standard ASCII control characters used to tell an intelligent device to stop and resume transmission of data.


Zoom

Increase or decrease the magnification of an object (image).


Backing Store

KEA! feature that provides two methods of storing graphics images: Bitmap, and Display List.


Bitmap

Array of pixels representing an object (image).


Display List

Set of instructions for drawing an object (image).


Tektronix, 4014

A vector graphics terminal that uses direct-view storage tube technology.


ReGIS

DIGITAL's Remote Graphics Instruction Set. A set of commands that describes a graphics image using geometric shapes (lines, curves, and circles), and actions (fills and patterns).


Sixel

A unit of graphics data transmitted as a character. One sixel represents six vertical pixels of an image.


Definition of PRODNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of SHORTNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of EDITNAME bookmark:KEA! Edit


Attachmate Support
Attachmate Customer Support

Attachmate offers several convenient methods for contacting our customer support services. You can receive support from Attachmate by phone, Bulletin Board System (BBS), CompuServe forums, Internet services, and FaxBack services. Attachmate also offers several support plans designed to meet your specific technical support requirements.

In addition, Attachmate offers a 60-day complimentary interactive support per site for each family of Attachmate products. No-charge, electronic access to technical information is also available for customer’s who need assistance with installation and configuration.

Contacting Customer Support by Phone

Attachmate Internet Services

Attachmate FaxBack Services

SupportWare! Service Plans


Customer Service Phone Support
Contacting Customer Support by Phone

Attachmate Customer Support is available Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. Pacific time, excluding Attachmate holidays. Below are the phone numbers you can use to contact Attachmate Customer Support.

Service	Phone Number
Attachmate Customer Support	North America - (800) 688-3270
RLN and UNISYS Products	North America - (800) 274-6633
CROSSTALK/CROSSFAX Products	North America - (404) 442-3210
SupportWare! Service Plan Administration	North America - (800) 288-5232
NOTE: Customers outside of North America should contact your local reseller for assistance.


Internet Services
Attachmate Internet Services

The Attachmate Internet servers listed below offer technical and marketing information about Attachmate products 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, so you can browse, download, or communicate with Customer Support at your convenience.

Attachmate World Wide Web Server

Attachmate FTP Server

Attachmate Gopher Server

Internet E-mail to Customer Support

NOTE: Attachmate is adding support for the domain name ATTACHMATE.COM. If you experience difficulties reaching us at ATM.COM, please try ATTACHMATE.COM.


World Wide Web Server
Attachmate World Wide Web Server

Attachmate’s web server (http://www.atm.com or http:www.attachmate.com) offers technical and marketing information on Attachmate products to any Internet browser on the Web. The Customer support section of our web site contains technical documentation, including Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), popular solutions, technology focus papers, and various troubleshooting material.


FTP Server
Attachmate FTP Server

Attachmate’s FTP Server (ftp.atm.com or ftp.attachmate.com) allows FTP client software, running on an Internet-connected workstation, to browse and download Attachmate technical documents and program files. The information available through the FTP Server is also served by the Attachmate BBS, web server, gopher server, and CompuServe forums. The Attachmate FTP Server allows you to log on as "anonymous" with your full e-mail name as the password.


Gopher Server
Attachmate Gopher Server

Gopher is an Internet service that provides menu-driven access to Internet information. Attachmate’s Gopher Server (gopher.atm.com or gopher.attachmate.com) allows gopher clients to browse, search, and retrieve technical documents, programs, and other electronic information about Attachmate products.

The information available through the Gopher Server is also served by the Attachmate BBS, Web Server, FTP Server, and CompuServe forums. You can access the Gopher Server from the Customer Support page on the Attachmate Web Server.


Internet E-mail
Internet E-mail to Customer Support

To reach Attachmate Customer Support by e-mail, send your questions to support@atm.com. When submitting questions, please include the following information:

Full Name

Company Name

Address

City, State

Country

Zip Code

Area Code

Phone Number

Extension

E-mail Address

Product Name

Version Number

Case Number

Contact Number

DETAILED PROBLEM OR QUESTION


FaxBack Support
Attachmate FaxBack Support

Attachmate’s FaxBack service is available 24 hours per day, 7 days a week. The FaxBack service allows convenient delivery of technical support or marketing information directly to your fax machine.  To access Attachmate’s FaxBack service and receive a catalog of available documents, dial 206-649-6595.


SupportWare! Service Plans

Several other support plans are available for corporations that need connectivity expertise and information about Attachmate Products for their Help desks.

Our SupportWare! Services Plans are listed below. Attachmate is always expanding the ways we can serve you.

SupportWare! Enhanced Plan

SupportWare! Elite Plan

SupportWare! Strategic Plan

SupportWare! Global Plan

Per-Incident and Multi-pack Options

For more information, call the SupportWare! Service Administration Group at (800) 288-5232, or use FaxBack Support.

Attachmate FaxBack Services


Support!Ware Enhanced Plan

This plan is for corporations that need connectivity expertise and information about Attachmate products for their Help desks.


SupportWare! Elite Plan

This plan is for corporations that need expanded support for connectivity and host server products in mission-critical environments


SupportWare! Strategic Plan

This plan is for corporations that need extremely high interaction to offload data communications expertise within their mission-critical environments.


SupportWare! Global Plan

This plan is for multi-site, multi-national corporations that need extremely high interaction to offload data communications expertise within their mission-critical environments.


Per-Incident and Multi-Pack Plan

This plan is for corporations that rarely need to call Attachmate Customer Support.


Introduction

Thank you and congratulations on becoming a user of Attachmate's award winning KEA! Software. KEA! provides you the ultimate solution for VAX/VMS or UNIX information access, all the while allowing you to continue to work within your existing Windows environment. KEA! is widely recognized at both the end-users and corporate levels for its fast, robust and accurate connectivity. Readers of DEC User have named KEA! the Connectivity Product of the Year for three consecutive years and KEA!'s extensive features have made it a corporate standard at Digital Equipment Corporation. Additionally, Digital Equipment Corporation includes KEA! in their VT LAN40 and MULTIA desktop offerings.


Summary of KEA! Features

KEA! 420 for Windows provides an accurate and complete emulation of Digital Equipment Corporation's VT420 text terminal. KEA! includes many enhanced features beyond those provided by the VT terminal.

The graphics version--KEA! 340 for Window--has all the features of KEA! 420, and in addition it emulates the ReGIS, Tektronix, and sixel graphics features of the VT340 terminal.

Multiple Sessions

•	You can have any number of simultaneous KEA! sessions, limited only by your network connections.

Customizing a Session

•	Specially created menu items simplify common actions like logging onto a host system or running a macro.

·	KEA! has a set of on-screen buttons that you can map to character strings, VT functions, and macros.

Communication Types

KEA! supports a variety of communications types. For more information on a particular type, refer to the online help.

Serial    The serial communications type uses the COM ports on your personal computer. You can communicate directly with a host using a modem or terminal server connected to the personal computer's COM port.

LAT    KEA! allows you to connect to a host using Local Area Transport (LAT), Digital's network protocol for terminal access over Ethernet. KEA! supports several LAT implementations, including Attachmate's KEAlink LAT products—for Windows 95 and Windows NT.

Telnet    KEA! allows you to connect to a host using Telnet, a protocol for terminal access using TCP/IP. KEA! supports numerous TCP/IP packages on the personal computer.

KEAlink MSU    When used with KEA!, KEAlink MSU gives users access to multiple host sessions simultaneously over a single serial line. Attachmate is the only Connectivity vendor to provide this capability for VAX host access software.

NetWare for DEC Access    KEA! supports NetWare for DEC Access, a Novell gateway product that lets you connect to a LAT host (typically a VAX) without having a LAT protocol stack on your personal computer. Currently KEA! supports only IPX/SPX connections to the NetWare for DEC Access server.

Modem   If you are using KEA! with Windows 95 or Windows NT version 4.0, KEA! supports Modem communication using the Windows 95 built-in modem management facility to configure and dial a modem.

File Transfer

•	Supported file transfers include Kermit, integrated FTP for high performance TCP/IP based transfers, and Zmodem, Ymodem and Xmodem. These protocols offer secure data transfer between your personal computer and host computer.

•	If you drag-and-drop selected text from another application onto an active KEA! session, that text is sent to the host. You can also send a file to the host using the current transfer method by dragging the file from Windows Explorer (from File Manager if you are using Windows or Windows NT) and dropping it on an active KEA! session.

•	KEA!'s easy to use File Shuttle feature displays host and PC directories for simple point and click bi-directional file transfers.

•	When you transfer text, KEA! allows translation between the character set used on your host computer and the one you use on your PC. This is important when the text includes multinational characters, because many of the multinational characters have different codes on the personal computer and on the host.

OLE Automation

•	You can easily drag files or text from another application into KEA! for transfer to a host session.

•	KEA! can behave as an OLE Automation server, the Microsoft standard for Windows inter-program communication. For example, you could write an Excel program that uses functions in KEA! to obtain changing host data and applies Excel's analysis functions to the data. To access automation-enabled objects, you must use a macro or programming language that supports OLE Automation, such as C++, Microsoft's Visual Basic 3.0 or later, or Visual Basic for Applications (as used by Word, Access, and Excel).

Tools

•	Use KEA! with QuickApp, QuickPeer and Attachmate's Enterprise Client/Server Tools to extend the power of popular client/server development tools such as Visual Basic and PowerBuilder, giving users the capability to develop GUI front-ends to multiple host systems.

Macros

•	KEA!'s macro language increases user productivity and lowers end-user training and support costs.

•	The macros automate interaction between a KEA! session and the host computer. They provide the ability to run macro commands at startup, log onto the host computer automatically, transfer files to and from the host, and just about any other function you would want to automate.

Character Sets

•	KEA! supports all the VT character sets: ASCII, DEC-MCS, ISO Latin-1, DEC Technical, DEC Special Graphics, National Replacement Character sets, and downloadable (DRCS).

•	In addition, KEA! can display the IBM graphics character set, useful with some hosts and personal computer bulletin boards.

•	KEA! has numerous font sizes, all with 132 column variants, including special fonts for all the characters not normally available in Windows.

Attributes and Color

•	The KEA! window shows true representation of all character and line attributes: bold, blink, underline, inverse, and double-high/double-wide.

•	KEA! emulates the color features of the VT340, and supports ISO color commands. In addition, you can map character attributes to colors.

Pages

•	KEA! supports the multiple page and cursor coupling features of the VT terminal, and in addition, variable page lengths between 24 and 144 lines.

Copy and Paste

•	You can use your mouse or keyboard to copy and paste between terminal sessions, and between KEA! and other Windows applications. Pasting data into a KEA! session sends that data to the host.

•	KEA! supports the VT340 block editing feature.

Keyboard

•	KEA! provides an accurate emulation of the VT keyboard layout which you can easily change to your own liking. It provides the Digital compose-character feature for typing multinational characters.

•	KEA! supports the VT user-defined keys (UDK) feature.

Printing

•	KEA! supports the standard Digital printer operations: Print Screen, Autoprint mode, and Printer Controller mode.

•	In Printer Controller mode, if the host does not support the type of printer connected to your computer, but does support a Digital LA210 ANSI printer, KEA! translates the ANSI printer commands into the appropriate commands for the connected printer.

History

•	The history buffer lets you scroll back through previously received data without recalling it from the host.


License Agreement and Registration

KEA! is licensed (not sold) under the terms and conditions of the Licensing Agreement provided with this software.

Your KEA! package includes a Registration Card. Please complete this card and mail it to Attachmate as soon as you install your software. This makes you a registered user, and ensures that you receive information about upgrades and new versions of KEA!.

By opening your disk envelope, you agree to the terms and conditions of the KEA! License Agreement. Remember, when you buy a KEA! package, you are buying a license for use on a single system. If you want to use KEA! on more than one system, you must buy additional licenses.

Multiple Systems License

A multiple systems license allows your organization to run KEA! on a specified number of designated systems.

After you purchase a single Base Pack, purchase an A License for each additional designated user.

Methods of installing KEA! with a multiple systems license are described in the sections Private Installation From a File Server, Installation From the KEA! CD-ROM and Installation From Customized KEA! Disks.

Concurrent License

A concurrent license allows many users to have access to KEA!, but limits the number of simultaneous users.

After you purchase a single Base Pack, purchase the required number of Concurrent A Licenses matching the maximum number of simultaneous KEA! users in your organization.

The recommended method of installing KEA!  for a concurrent license is described in the section Shared Installation From a File Server.

Your local Attachmate dealer or our sales team can help you determine which license best fits your needs.


System Requirements

KEA! for Windows 95/Windows NT requires Windows 95 or Windows NT 3.51 or later, running on an Intel, MIPS, Alpha AXP, or PowerPC hardware platform.


Installing KEA! for a Single User

This section tells you how to install KEA! for a single user. In a multi-user environment, the System Administrator might have altered the KEA! distribution files and re-distributed them on a network server or floppy disks. The following steps are suitable for every user, in both stand-alone and multi-user settings.

If Windows is not running, start it. Ensure that any running applications are closed. If you are upgrading from an earlier version, back up your current KEA! directory.

To install KEA! on Windows 95

1	If you're installing from a CD-ROM, insert the KEA! CD in the CD-ROM drive.

If you're installing from a directory on a file server, connect to it.

If you're installing from floppy disks provided by your System Administrator, insert Disk 1 in drive A or B.

2	Using My Computer, Windows Explorer, or the Start button, run the Winhelp file README.HLP in the root directory of the location you're installing from.

3	Read the information in this help file, particularly the section "Installing KEA!". When you are ready to continue the installation, close the Help application.

4	Again, using My Computer, Windows Explorer, or the Start button, run SETUP.EXE in the root directory of the location you're installing from.

To install KEA! on Windows NT

1	If you're installing from a CD-ROM, insert the KEA! CD in the CD-ROM drive.

If you're installing from a directory on a file server, connect to it.

If you're installing from floppy disks provided by your System Administrator, insert Disk 1 in drive A or B.

2	In Program Manager, on the File menu, choose Run.

3	Type the location you're installing from plus \readme.hlp and choose OK.
For example,       g:\readme.hlp

4	Read the information in this Winhelp file, particularly the section "Installing KEA!". When you are ready to continue the installation, close the Help application.

5	In Program Manager, on the File menu, choose Run.

6	Type the location you're installing from plus \setup and choose OK.
For example,      g:\setup or x:\keasource\setup

SETUP guides you through the installation. You can request additional information at each step by using the Help buttons.

Note  If your system administrator has set up the distributed files to let you select either Private or Shared installation, you are asked how you want to complete the installation.
If you select Shared Network Disk, the executable file remains on the server, and only personal application files (including those with .KTC, .KTM and .KTR extensions) are copied to your personal computer or personal network directory; KEA! runs as a shared program.
If you select Private Disk, the executable file and all other files are copied to your personal computer or personal network directory.
For more information about Private and Shared installation, refer to Chapter four, "Installing KEA! in a Multi-User Environment."

When the installation completes, SETUP might ask you to exit and restart Windows, reboot your computer, or issue some additional commands depending on the options you selected. Please follow these instructions before attempting to start KEA!.


Installing Full Product Name in a Multi-User Environment
Installing KEA! in a Multi-user Environment

This section is provided for the system administrator installing KEA! in a multi-user environment.

There are various ways you can make KEA! available for later installation by end-users. You can use the administrative setup methods to prepare KEA! for your environment and preset some of the registration information for end-users. Each method might have advantages for your organization. Whichever method you choose, you must comply with the terms of your license, and not allow the number of users to exceed the licensed maximum.

Method	Description

Private Installation from a File Server  This is the recommended method for installing KEA! with a multiple systems license.

Shared Installation Using a File Server This is the recommended method for installing KEA! with a concurrent license.

End-User Decides if Private or Shared during Installation  If you use this method, end-users can choose either private or shared installation at the time they complete the installation on their own computer.

Alternatively, you can choose one of the end-user install methods, in which the KEA! files are copied to distribution disks or directly to the end-user's disk.


Private Installation From a File Server

All distributed KEA! files are copied to the network, but not made executable. When an end-user completes the installation, all files, including the executables, are copied from the file server to the user's computer or personal network directory. This is the recommended method for installing KEA! with a multiple systems license.

The advantages of this method include:

•	A file server is used to distribute the product. This is easier than distributing physical disks (and newer program versions) to each licensed user.

•	The file server is only used to store the distribution files. Users do not depend on the server for regular use.

•	Start up is faster because the executable files reside on the user's personal computer.

•	Running the application from the user's computer reduces network traffic.

Follow the procedure Preparing KEA! Files on the File Server. In step 5, select "Private Installation on each Workstation."

To complete the installation, end-users follow the procedure Installing KEA! for a Single User.


Shared Installation From a File Server

All distributed KEA! files are copied and made executable in a shared network directory. When an end-user completes the installation, only a few required files (including those with .KTC, .KTM and .KTR extensions) are transferred to the user's computer or personal network directory. The executable files remain on the network and are shared by all end-users. This is the recommended method for installing KEA! with a concurrent license.

The advantages of a shared installation include:

•	More disk space on the user's computer is available .

•	Upgrading executable files is easier.

•	User configurations are easy to manage.

Follow the procedure Preparing KEA! Files on the File Server. In step 5, select "Shared Installation."

To complete the installation, end-users follow the procedure Installing KEA! for a Single User.


End-User Decides if Private or Shared Installation

If you use this method to prepare KEA! for installation, each end-user can choose either private or shared installation at the time he or she completes the installation.

Follow the procedure Preparing KEA! Files on the File Server. In step 5, choose "End-user Selectable during Installation."

When end-users install KEA! following the procedure Installing KEA! for a Single User, they are asked how they want to complete the installation. Each end-user can select either Private Disk or Network Disk.


Installation From the KEA! Disks

Installation From the KEA! CD-ROM

If your site has a multiple systems license but a user's computer is not connected to a file server, use either this or the following method.

In this method, the administrator performs the complete installation on a user's personal computer. Take the distribution CD-ROM to the user's computer and follow the procedure Installing KEA! for a Single User.

In step 7, when SETUP asks you to choose Administrative Setup or End-user Install, select End-user Install.

SETUP finishes installing KEA! on the user's computer.

Installation From Customized KEA! Disks

In this method, the administrator prepares customized disks which are distributed within the organization. Individual users run SETUP to install KEA! on their own computers. Follow the procedure Preparing KEA! Disks for Users to Install.


Preparing KEA! Files on the File Server

Preparing Files on the File Server

This procedure copies the distribution files to a common directory on the server, making them available for installation on each user's computer.

1	If you are upgrading from a previous version, back up the common directory.

2	If Windows is not already running, start Windows.

3	Insert the KEA! CD in the CD-ROM drive.

4	From the Program Manager's File menu or the Windows Start menu, choose Run. Type drive letter:\setup. You can get assistance from the help buttons in each dialog box.

5	When SETUP asks you to choose between Administrative Setup and End-user Install, select Administrative Setup.

6	In the next dialog box, select Private Installation on each Workstation, Shared Installation, or End-user Selectable during Installation.

7	In the next dialog box, type your Organization and product Serial Number. Leave the User Name blank so that users can type their own names when later installing KEA!.

8	SETUP asks you for the name of the destination directory. Type the name of a common directory on the server where you want to store the files. The common directory must be available to users who want to install the program. SETUP copies the files into the common directory.

9	Write-protect the files in the common directory. To do this, flag all files read-only, or flag the directory itself read-only. The directory and the files must also be shareable (users must have read privileges).

When end-users install KEA! on a personal computer, they follow the procedure Installing KEA! for a Single User.


Preparing KEA! Disks for Users to Install

Use this procedure with the  method Installation From Customized KEA! Disks. This procedure prepares customized disks which the administrator can distribute within the organization.

1	If Windows is not already running, start Windows.

2	In the KEA! CD directory that matches your operating system and platform, find the directories named DISK1, DISK2, etc. The files in each DISKn directory comprise a single floppy disk image. Copy the disk images to the necessary number of (three or four) 1.4-megabyte floppy disks.

Operating System and Platform	Directory on CD-ROM
Windows 95	WIN95
Windows NT on Digital Alpha AXP	ALPHA
Windows NT on Intel	X86
Windows NT on MIPS	MIPS
Windows NT on PowerPC	PPC
Windows 3.1	WIN16
3	Insert your copy of the KEA! disk 1 in the disk drive.

4	From the Program Manager's File menu or Windows Start menu, choose Run. Type driveletter:\setup. You can get assistance from the help buttons in each dialog box.

5	When SETUP asks you to choose between Administrative Setup and End-user Install, select Administrative Setup.

6	In the next dialog box, select Private Installation on each Workstation.

7	In the next dialog box, type your Organization and product Serial Number. Leave the User Name blank so users can type their own names when later installing KEA!. If you do type a User Name now, that name is used for all subsequent installations. Neither you nor the users can change this User Name.

8	SETUP asks you for the name of the destination directory. Type the name of a temporary directory. SETUP copies the files into the temporary directory.

9	When SETUP is finished, copy the file KEAVT.KTR from the temporary directory back to disk 1 of your copied distribution disks.

10	Use the DOS diskcopy program to duplicate the copied distribution disks. Make as many copies as you need for your users, up to the number your license allows.

11	Delete the temporary directory.

12	Distribute the duplicate disks to users.

When an end-user installs KEA! on a personal computer, he or she follows the procedure Installing KEA! for a Single User. The executable files and all other files are copied to each user's computer.


Customizing the SETUP Program

The program that installs KEA! is called SETUP. Whatever the installation method, SETUP is run as part of the process. The following topics provide some information about ways you can change SETUP's operation before end-users install KEA!. They also describe how to provide a default session and other default options for users.

If you received your KEA! distribution on CD, prepare KEA! files on the file server (Administrative Setup) or copy the appropriate disk images from the CD to floppy disks, and modify these files.

Temporary Directory

About Information Files

Adding Files to be Copied during Setup

Preventing Files from being Copied during Setup

Changing KEA!'s Group Name and Group Contents

Providing a Default Session Configuration File

Assigning Default Values to Options in the Registry


Temporary Directory

By default, SETUP tries to create a temporary directory, C:\KEATEMP, which is deleted after the installation is complete. If no C: drive exists, or SETUP cannot create the directory for some other reason, SETUP asks for an alternative. If you know that the C: drive can't be used and don't want the user to have to type an alternative, you can change the location of the temporary directory as follows.

1	Edit the file SETUP1.INF found on distribution disk 1 (or the image of disk 1) and locate the line:

tempdir=c:\keatemp

2	Modify this line to suit your environment. For example, you might change it to:

tempdir=z:\mytemp

Be careful not to change any other information in SETUP1.INF.


About Information Files

SETUP obtains some of its operating parameters from an Information File (.INF). If you have the International version of this product, there is one INF file for each of the languages users can choose when they start SETUP. These INF files are named KTENG.INF, KTFRE.INF, KTGER.INF, KTITA.INF, KTPOR.INF, KTSPA.INF corresponding to a choice of English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese or Spanish.

As system administrator, you can change how SETUP works by making changes to the INF file. The following sections give detailed instructions for editing the .INF file. You need only change the INF file for the language(s) in which users run SETUP. Any Windows text editor can be used. Setting your editor's default tabs to eight gives the most readable view of the .INF file.


Adding Files to be Copied during Setup

You might want to provide additional files, such as custom macros, to be copied to the user's computer when the user installs KEA!. To do this, perform the following steps.

To provide additional files to be copied during installation

1	Create the new files to be copied.

2	In the Information Files KTENG.INF, KTFRE.INF, KTGER.INF, KTITA.INF, KTPOR.INF, and KTSPA.INF, find the section [kea.files].

3	Add a line for each additional file to be copied. The four fields following the filename are:

•	A string in quotes to be displayed while the file is being copied.

•	The uncompressed size in kilobytes (rounded up to the next K).

•	The file attributes where B is base (shareable), C is compressed, U is personal (user), S is system (Windows system), O is optional (installation is not essential for normal use), X is a file not installed, and 0 (zero) is no other flag used.

•	The products and platforms in which the file is to be copied.

3 is KEA! 340,

4 is KEA! 420,

S is KEAlink MSU,

W is Windows 3.1,

5 is Windows 95,

I is NT Intel,

A is NT Alpha AXP,

M is NT MIPS,

P is NT PowerPC

C is NT common.

The following could describe a file which is 6.7 K, not a Windows system file, not compressed, and is copied when installing either KEA! 340 or 420, in both Windows NT and Windows 3.1.

[kea.files]

...

SPECIAL.KTM, "Special macro", 7, U, 34CW

Note  Files should be added to the bottom of the list because they are copied from the last distribution disk.

4	Copy the modified .INF files to the common directory on the file server (or to disk 1 of the disks you are going to distribute).

5	Copy the new files to the common directory on the file server (or to the last distribution disk).


Preventing Files from being Copied during Setup

You might want to prevent some files from being copied to the user's computer during installation. To do this, perform the following steps.

To prevent files from being copied during installation

1	Identify the files you do not want copied.

2	In the information Files KTENG.INF, KTFRE.INF, KTGER.INF, KTITA.INF, KTPOR.INF, and KTSPA.INF, find the section [kea.files].

3	Find each file in one of these sections. Insert a semicolon at the front of the line or erase the line. For example:

[kea.files]

...

;EXCEL.KTM, "Sample script files.", 12, UCO, 34WC


Changing KEA!'s Group Name and Group Contents

You might want to install KEA! into a different group and/or provide additional icons in Program Manager's group.

To change KEA!'s group name and contents

The following steps are an example of installing KEA! into a group called "User Apps" and creating an additional icon in that group for a special read-me file called "USER.TXT."

1	Copy USER.TXT to the common directory on the file server (or the copied disks you are going to distribute).

2	In the Information Files KTENG.INF, KTFRE.INF, KTGER.INF, KTITA.INF, KTPOR.INF, and KTSPA.INF, find the section [kea.files].

3	Under the [kea.files] section heading, add a line for the new USER.TXT file similar to the following:

USER.TXT, "Special readme", 12, B, 34WIAMP5

The four fields following the filename USER.TXT are:

•	A string in quotes to be displayed while the file is being copied.

•	The uncompressed size in kilobytes (rounded up to the next K).

•	The file attributes where B is base (shareable), C is compressed, U is personal (user), S is system (Windows system), O is optional (installation is not essential for normal use), X is a file not installed, and 0 (zero) is no other flag used.

•	The products and platforms in which the file is to be copied.

3 is KEA! 340,

4 is KEA! 420,

S is KEAlink MSU,

W is Windows 3.1,

5 is Windows 95,

I is NT Intel,

A is NT Alpha AXP,

M is NT MIPS,

P is NT PowerPC

C is NT common.

Note  Files should be added to the bottom of the list because they are copied from the last distribution disk.

4	Find the [progman.groups] section in the Information File.

5	In the [progman.groups] section change the group name from KEA! to User Apps, and add an icon to this group which when invoked runs the KEAEDIT text editor on the new USER.TXT. Note that the string "User Apps" is enclosed in quotes because it contains a space. The new [UserApps] section heading corresponds to the new group name and does not contain a space.

[progman.groups]

"KEA!",                        kea.grp,   34WIAMP5

[KEA!]

"KEA!",             "%s%p.exe"

"Release Notes",    "%H %sreadme.hlp"

"Installation Log", "%skeaed.exe /o %skeasetup.log"

to appear as follows:

[progman.groups]

"User Apps",              userapps.grp,   34WIAMP5

[UserApps]

"KEA!",             "%s%p.exe"

"Release Notes",    "%H %sreadme.hlp"

"Installation Log", "%skeaed.exe /o %skeasetup.log"

"Using KEA!",  "%skeaedit.exe %suser.txt"

At installation, %s is replaced with the path KEA! is installing to, and %p will be replaced with the executable name (KEAVT) of the product being installed.


Providing a Default Configuration File

You might want to provide a default session that suits your environment, which users can later access when they run the application. To do this, perform the following steps and create a default configuration file.

To provide a default configuration file

1	Run a previously installed version of KEA!, making sure that it is the same version as the one you want to install now. If you are unsure, look in the About dialog box (Help menu.)

2	Use the regular application menus and commands to configure options (and macros, and mappings) the way you want the default configuration to appear.

3	Use the Save As command on the File menu to save this configuration as USERDFLT.KTX.

4	Copy this .KTX file to the common directory on the file server. Or if you are making disks for your users to install, copy this .KTX file to the disk that contains XSTARTUP.KTM.


Assigning Default Values to the Windows Registry

You can optionally assign default values to many KEA! options. If you want to assign default values, you can add them to the HKEY_USERS\.DEFAULT\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key in the Windows Registry database. KEA! uses the default values if the options do not exist in the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Attachmate\KEA!\n.nn\KEAVT key.

The options affect the following KEA! features.

Alternate Font

Bitmap used in the Border

Centering the Window

Color of the Border

Maximum Number of Concurrent Sessions

Paged Scroll Size

Pattern of the Border

Save Changed Configuration on Exit


Removing ProdName
Removing KEA!

The following instructions are provided should it be necessary to remove KEA! from a computer system.

KEASETUP.LOG is a record of changes made when the application was installed. Use KEA! Edit, or any text editor, to print KEASETUP.LOG, and refer to it in the steps that follow.

To remove KEA! from a Windows 95 or NT system

1	Look in KEASETUP.LOG for the location of the KEA! directory. Delete this directory and its contents.

2	Delete the KEA! icon from its Windows program group.

In Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0

•	Click the Start button, point to Settings, click Taskbar, click the Start Menu Programs tab, and then click Remove.

•	In the Remove Shortcuts/Folders dialog box, click the KEA! icon, and then click Remove.

In Windows NT 3.51

•	In Program Manager, select the KEA! icon. From the Program Manager File menu, choose Delete. If you also want to remove the group that contained the icon, first remove all its program-item icons and then choose Delete again.

3	Examine KEASETUP.LOG for other changes that were made during installation.


Customer Support

You can get help by calling Attachmate Customer Support from 6:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. (Pacific Time) Monday through Friday.

Please tell us about any problems you encounter with this product, or any comments and suggestions you have. We are eager to hear from you!

It will help if you can isolate the problem as much as possible. If you are not receiving data, particularly control sequences, correctly, use the Transparent option in the Display dialog box. This option lets you see control sequences. This helps you identify faulty or missing controls. You can capture the data your host sends onto disk. This lets you replay and examine it in detail later.

Please collect the information listed on the Customer Support Information Form at the back of the KEA! Installation Guide before calling Customer Support. Before calling, please check the following:

•	Is it a display problem? communications?

•	When does the problem occur?

•	Is it machine-dependent?

•	Make sure all cables are firmly attached.

•	Re-boot the computer and try again.

•	Try the procedure on another system.

KEA! Technical Support

Telephone:	1-800-688-3270 (from outside continental U.S.A. and Canada:  206-641-7273)

FaxBack:	1-206-649-6595

FAX:	1-604-473-3990

Internet:	use any WWW browser to reach http://www.attachmate.com

KEA! Sales

Inquiries:	1-206-644-4010

Orders:	1-800-426-6283


Frequently Asked Questions

"KEA! claims the installation is not complete."

When you install replacements for existing Windows drivers, the installation procedure asks you, at a certain point, to restart Windows. How you do the restart affects whether the installation procedure can finish the KEA! installation. If it cannot finish, exit from Windows, put the KEA! distribution disk in your drive, change your default directory to the directory from which you originally ran the KEA! installation, and run the program FINAL.EXE.

"When I maximize the KEA! window, it does not fill the entire screen."

If you want the maximized KEA! window to fill the screen, select View from the Options menu. Then, select Auto from the Font Width option.

"Typed characters appear on the screen, but I can't connect to my host."

This could mean that KEA! is in local mode. Choose Connection from the KEA! menu bar. Make sure the Local command does not have a check mark next to it.

"I can't connect to my host using LAT."

If you use KEAlink LAT with Windows 3.1, you may need to run the program LATDAT.COM before starting Windows. If you use PATHWORKS™, you must define its session control blocks (SCBs) with the LATCP program, and run the LAT protocol. For further information, please search for LAT in the online help.

"My COM3 (or COM4) port doesn't work properly, and the screen looks corrupted."

Many personal computers cannot share hardware interrupts. Configure your COM3 and COM4 ports to use an interrupt not used for another device.

"Why are KEA!'s colors not the same as my VT340?"

Your Windows color capability depends on your video board and driver, and may differ from the VT340. The VT340 can display 16 colors at a time, selected from a 4096 color palette.

Video display adapters such as standard VGA or EGA contain 16 fixed colors. You cannot use the Use Exact Colors option for these adapters. Fortunately, the 16 pre-set Windows colors correspond closely to the VT340's 16 factory default colors. So, in many cases, the VT340 and Windows colors are quite close. If the host changes a color from the default, KEA! must use one of the 16 pre-set Windows colors. In this case, KEA! matches the requested color to the closest Windows color. However, the color KEA! displays may differ from the VT color. You can improve the VT340-to-PC color match by using a different type of video board.

Video display adapters such as the 8514, and many super VGAs can display 256 colors simultaneously. You can define each color from a palette much larger than the VT340's 4096 colors. Since KEA! displays only 16 colors at a time, it uses palette entries to define the exact VT340 colors. Ensure the Use Exact Colors option in the Colors dialog box is selected to give KEA! this capability.

True or high color video boards can display more than 256 colors simultaneously and they do not use a palette. Because of the large number of colors, this type of adapter can match closely any VT340 color. The Use Exact Colors option does not affect this type of adapter as they always display exact colors.

"The Windows background and other applications change color or flash when I use KEA! 340."

If your computer contains a 256 color adapter, and you configured KEA! to use the palette (Use Exact Colors option), applications may conflict. Windows assigns palette entries to any application that requests them. If the foreground (active) application uses the same palette entry as another (inactive) application, the background application colors may appear strange. In all cases, the active application colors appear correctly. Switching a background application to the foreground restores its correct colors.

"KEA!'s graphics do not look the same as my VT340."

The VT340 terminal uses a fixed 800 by 480 resolution. Many host applications create graphics specifically tuned for that resolution. This can make the graphics look incorrect at other resolutions. You can configure KEA! 340 to use an 800 by 480 resolution by selecting the 10 Wide font. You may need to use the scroll bars to view the entire image, if your computer cannot display this resolution on the screen.

"KEA! 340 redisplays slowly or 'strangely' when the KEA! window is uncovered."

KEA! 340 uses two methods, Display List and Bitmap (Graphics dialog box), to store data for redisplay after you uncover the KEA! window.

The Display List method stores all received graphics data in a list. KEA! clears this list only when it receives a clear screen command. A host graphics application can change parts of the screen without ever clearing the screen (for example, a real-time monitor that displays the current state of some process). Whenever you uncover KEA!, it replays the display list to reconstruct the final image. For this type of display, you probably should use the Bitmap method.

The Bitmap method stores only the result of a graphics image as a memory image. Thus, KEA! can redisplay the current image very quickly. However, as this method depends on the window size, you cannot resize KEA! graphics. If you select both options, KEA! uses the Display List when necessary (for example, after a zoom), and the Bitmap at other times.

"KEA!'s graphics don't print correctly."

The appearance of printed graphics is affected by the type of Backing Store selected (Bitmap or Display List) in the Graphics dialog box, and the Windows printer driver being used. Try changing Backing Store to see if either type improves the appearance. (The Use Bitmap option in the Printer dialog box can override the Backing Store option, forcing the bitmap method.) Windows offers various drivers for some printers; experiment with different printer drivers to see if they change the appearance.

"How do I resize KEA!'s graphics?"

To resize the graphics, you must select the Display List option under Backing Store in the Graphics dialog box. You then resize by selecting a different font in Font Width (View dialog box, Options menu). Or, if you set the Font Width to Auto, you can resize the graphics by dragging the side borders of your KEA! window.

"How can I make KEA! draw dotted lines?"

Many Windows video drivers do not properly handle some Windows-defined display options. In particular, many drivers do not support styled lines properly (lines with a dash/dot pattern) on a transparent background. Sometimes, these styled lines do not display. If your image is missing some lines, try the Styled Lines option in the Graphics dialog box. It changes the way KEA! draws styled lines.

When you select Styled Lines, KEA! uses a solid background instead of a transparent background. Although this differs from what the VT340 does, it displays the styled lines properly. KEA! stores this option in the KEA.INI file, not in the configuration file. If you select this option, all KEA! sessions use it.

"At times, users can't access macro files. What could be wrong?"

If you have installed KEA! as shared, ensure the .KTM macro files on the server are shareable and read-only. The help file README.HLP may contain special instructions for your network.

"Why can't more than one user at a time run the application?"

If you have installed KEA! as shared, ensure the shared files on the server are indeed shareable. The help file README.HLP might contain special instructions for your network.

"I want the users to install KEA! themselves, but I want them to start up with a customized version and some macros written for our work environment. Can I do this?"

Yes. As system administrator, you can change the startup configuration. You can create a user default configuration file to suit the needs of your environment, and load it on the file server so when users install KEA! on their personal computers, their startup options are taken from this file. You can even add files, including special macros, to the standard installation, so they are also installed. For more information, see "Providing a Default Configuration File" in the section "Customizing KEA! SETUP."

"When users install this product, a new group called 'KEA!' is created in Program Manager. Instead, can I make the icon go into our existing 'Office Tools' group?"

Yes. You can change the destination of the icon so it appears in a different Program Manager group. For more information, see "Changing KEA!'s Group Name" in the section "Customizing KEA! SETUP."

"In our organization, we run Windows itself from a shared file server. After installing KEA!, why are some drivers installed into a user's local WINDOWS directory, not the shared SYSTEM directory?"

In some environments, Windows itself is installed on a file server. In this arrangement, only a few personal Windows files exist on users' personal computers. To run Windows, users access a shared copy of Windows files located on the server.

SETUP normally installs some components in the Windows System directory. However, when a user installs KEA! in a "shared Windows" environment, the Windows System directory is on the server, and is write-protected. In this case, SETUP will copy these files to the user's local Windows directory. Although SETUP does not report this as an error, you might wonder why the drivers end up on the user's personal computer. In practice this makes little difference, because Windows searches both directories for the drivers it needs.

"When I try to run the program, I get a message 'This copy of KEA! has not been installed correctly…' What could be wrong?"

The most likely cause of this error is that the distribution files have been copied into a directory without using SETUP to install the program. Consequently, some files were not modified as they should have been during installation. Follow the instructions to install the application. If the error still occurs, contact Attachmate Customer Support.


Concurrent Use License

A license for a total number of computers running KEA! simultaneously.


Multiple System License

A license for a specified number of designated computers.


Definition of PRODNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of SHORTNAME bookmark:KEA!

Definition of EDITNAME bookmark:KEA! Edit